Alcatel-Lucent 3600 MainStreet UG

Alcatel assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the information presented, which is subject to change without notice.
Alcatel, the Alcatel logo, MainStreet, and Newbridge are registered trademarks of Alcatel. All other trademarks are the
property of their respective owners.
Copyright 19942007 Alcatel.
All rights reserved.
Disclaimers
Alcatel products are intended for commercial uses. Without the appropriate network design engineering, they must not be
sold, licensed or otherwise distributed for use in any hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in
the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life-support
machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of products could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe
physical or environmental damage. The customer hereby agrees that the use, sale, licence or other distribution of the
products for any such application without the prior written consent of Alcatel, shall be at the customer's sole risk. The
customer hereby agrees to defend and hold Alcatel harmless from any claims for loss, cost, damage, expense or liability that
may arise out of or in connection with the use, sale, licence or other distribution of the products in such applications.
This document may contain information regarding the use and installation of non-Alcatel products. Please note that this
information is provided as a courtesy to assist you. While Alcatel tries to ensure that this information accurately reflects
information provided by the supplier, please refer to the materials provided with any non-Alcatel product and contact the
supplier for confirmation. Alcatel assumes no responsibility or liability for incorrect or incomplete information provided
about non-Alcatel products.
Alcatel has made reasonable efforts to ensure that the 3600 MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager, Release 8.0,
complies in all material respects with the "Referenced Detailed Functional Specification for Newbridge Product Date
Compliance" for all loads. To obtain this document, the Year 2000 Date Compliance status of the other products discussed
in this document, and other information related to Year 2000 Date Compliance, visit the Alcatel Year 2000 Date
Compliance website at the URL:
http://www.newbridge.com/year2000/index.html
However, this does not constitute a representation or warranty. The warranties provided for Alcatel products, if any, are
set forth in contractual documentation entered into by Alcatel and its customers.
This document was originally written in English. If the document you are reading is not in English, please refer to the
English version for a full legally binding description of the product/service.
PRINTED ON
RECYCLED PAPER
Preface
This General Information book describes Release 8.0 of the 3600 MainStreet
Multiservice Bandwidth Manager (software Generics 1118, C118, D118, E118, and
H118).
The 3600 MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager is a versatile, integrated
voice and data multiplexer. A 3600 MainStreet system can be built as a single-shelf,
dual-shelf, or multishelf system, all of which are easily provisioned for a wide
variety of applications.
This General Information book is divided into four sections:
Product overview
Chapters 1 and 2 introduce the features and benefits of the 3600 MainStreet
Multiservice Bandwidth Manager, and describe its many value-added
applications. For readers familiar with earlier releases of the product, a
summary of major Release 8.0 features and capabilities is provided at the end
of chapter 1.
A closer view
Chapters 3 through 9 provide detailed information about 3600 MainStreet
system design, cards, and interfaces.
Management
Chapters 10 and 11 provide detailed information about 3600 MainStreet node
and network management capabilities.
Technical specifications
Chapters 12 through 14 provide a convenient reference summary of
3600 MainStreet system, card, and power information.
The Technical specifications section is followed by a list of abbreviations and an
index.
iii
Preface
iv
Table of contents
Product overview 1 Introduction......................................................................... 3
Built-in intelligence and flexibility................................................................................4
Modular architecture................................................................................................... 14
Scalability with flexible configurations...................................................................... 17
Exceptional software control ...................................................................................... 19
Comprehensive system protection features .............................................................. 21
Easy-access maintenance features .............................................................................. 23
Major new release 8.0 features.................................................................................... 27
2 Applications ...................................................................... 29
ATM adaptation........................................................................................................... 31
ISDN bandwidth on demand..................................................................................... 34
Subrate data applications ............................................................................................ 41
Inverse multiplexing .................................................................................................... 67
Super-rate data: up to 1984 kb/s ................................................................................ 69
Voice applications ........................................................................................................ 70
Frame relay switching.................................................................................................. 89
X.25 switching.............................................................................................................. 94
A closer view
3 Design.............................................................................. 101
Modular components................................................................................................ 102
Shelf types................................................................................................................... 102
Single-shelf and dual-shelf system configurations ................................................. 106
Shelf architecture........................................................................................................ 110
Single-bandwidth and double-bandwidth options................................................ 117
Multishelf system configurations ............................................................................ 118
Switching shelves........................................................................................................ 121
Peripheral shelves....................................................................................................... 124
High-speed peripheral shelves.................................................................................. 127
Power supplies............................................................................................................ 130
Ringing generators..................................................................................................... 133
Cooling equipment.................................................................................................... 135
Distribution panels.................................................................................................... 136
Data termination units.............................................................................................. 141
v
Table of contents
Cables .......................................................................................................................... 144

System integrity.......................................................................................................... 145
Control redundancy .................................................................................................. 145
RAPID protection switching .................................................................................... 147
Alcatel 5620 NM AAR............................................................................................... 149
ISDN leased-line protection ..................................................................................... 150
Aggregate redundancy measures.............................................................................. 151
Fault signaling and trunk conditioning................................................................... 155
Control Packet Switching System............................................................................. 156
Node and network synchronization ........................................................................ 159
4 Network and external equipment connections .............. 165

Network connectors .................................................................................................. 165
External equipment connectors ............................................................................... 168
5 System cards ................................................................... 169

System Control card 3 ............................................................................................... 171
System Control card 3 (8+) ...................................................................................... 171
Balanced Transceiver card......................................................................................... 171
Expander card ............................................................................................................ 172
Clock card................................................................................................................... 172
General Facilities card 2............................................................................................. 172
General Facilities card 3............................................................................................. 173
Switching card ............................................................................................................ 173
Switching Interface card............................................................................................ 173
Test card ...................................................................................................................... 173
Common Carrier card............................................................................................... 174
Configurable parameters........................................................................................... 174
6 Aggregate cards .............................................................. 181

ATM Services card ..................................................................................................... 183
DS-3 II card ................................................................................................................ 184
E1 cards....................................................................................................................... 184
E3 cards....................................................................................................................... 186
Fibre card .................................................................................................................... 187
Multiport Aggregate card.......................................................................................... 187
Optical Extension cards............................................................................................. 187
T1 cards....................................................................................................................... 188
V.35 PRI card.............................................................................................................. 190
X.21 PRI and X.21 ESI PRI cards............................................................................. 190
vi
Table of contents
7 Voice interface cards and channel units.......................... 203

4WDX channel unit................................................................................................... 205
4WTO line card.......................................................................................................... 205
E&M interfaces........................................................................................................... 205
LGE interfaces............................................................................................................. 206
LGS interfaces............................................................................................................. 206
MRD interfaces .......................................................................................................... 207
8 Data interface cards and channel units........................... 211

2B1Q line card............................................................................................................ 213
2B1Q channel unit..................................................................................................... 213
27LC2 line card .......................................................................................................... 213
27LC3 line card .......................................................................................................... 214
28LC line card............................................................................................................. 214
4WTO channel unit................................................................................................... 215
DS0-DP channel unit ................................................................................................ 215
BRI S/T card ............................................................................................................... 215
64 kb/s Codirectional card........................................................................................ 215
OCU-DP channel unit .............................................................................................. 215
RS-232 DCC............................................................................................................... 216
RS-422 DCC............................................................................................................... 216
V.35 DCC.................................................................................................................... 216
X.21 DCC.................................................................................................................... 216
9 Application and packet switching cards ......................... 227

Call Processing card................................................................................................... 229
Data Communications Processor card.................................................................... 229
Digital Signal Processing cards and modules, and
Inverse Multiplexing cards .................................................................................... 229
FRE card...................................................................................................................... 230
FRS/SRIM card........................................................................................................... 231
PE card ........................................................................................................................ 231
vii
Table of contents
Management
10 Management overview.................................................... 249

Types of management................................................................................................ 250
Service management.................................................................................................. 250
Network management............................................................................................... 252
Node management .................................................................................................... 257
Open interfaces .......................................................................................................... 258
11 Node management .......................................................... 261

Node management sessions...................................................................................... 261
System serial ports...................................................................................................... 264
Configuration and cross-connections..................................................................... 264
Database management .............................................................................................. 264
Maintenance and diagnostics ................................................................................... 266
Technical
specifications
12 System specifications ...................................................... 277

Shelves ......................................................................................................................... 277
Power supplies............................................................................................................ 277
Ringing generators..................................................................................................... 279
Site requirements ....................................................................................................... 279
13 Voice interface specifications ......................................... 281

14 Power dissipation............................................................ 297
Abbreviations
Index
viii
Product overview
Introduction
The 3600 MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager is a flexible, scalable, and
reliable voice and data multiplexer. A 3600 MainStreet system can be used as:
a high-order DCS /M13 multiplexer

an integrated voice and data multiplexer
an intelligent channel bank
a frame relay circuit switch
an X.25 packet switch
an international gateway
All 3600 MainStreet systems offer ATM adaptation, ISDN bandwidth on demand,
comprehensive DSP applications, and international voice and data interfaces. The
basic system configurations are:
single shelf
The single-shelf system configuration provides up to 16 T1 or E1 network
links, with a fully nonblocking switching matrix up to 32 Mb/s.
dual shelf
The dual-shelf configuration offers up to 32 network links and up to 64 Mb/s
fully nonblocking switching capacity.
multishelf
The multishelf configuration offers up to 512 Mb/s fully nonblocking DS0
DCS, with interfaces for up to 256 T1 or E1 network links, 8 fully redundant
DS3 network links, or 16 fully redundant E3 network links in flexible
combinations.
Product overview
With modular architecture and flexible shelf configurations, the 3600 MainStreet
system is a scalable unit offering easy migration to allow the existing installed base
to take advantage of higher-bandwidth applications. The 3600 MainStreet system
accommodates network evolution and protects investment by offering a means of
integrating narrowband legacy services with broadband or IP-based networks.
The 3600 MainStreet system is an ideal choice for access networks that support
multiple TDM and packet or cell services. It can meet the stringent
communications requirements of corporate enterprise networks, utilities and mass
transit communications networks, government agencies, educational
communities, and public networks anywhere in the world.
Key features of the 3600 MainStreet system include:
built-in intelligence and flexibility

modular architecture
scalability with flexible configurations
exceptional software control
comprehensive system fault protection features
easy-access maintenance features
Built-in
intelligence and
flexibility
By embracing industry standards, the 3600 MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth

Manager addresses the public, private, and hybrid network requirements for ATM
adaptation, concurrent circuit, frame relay, and X.25 packet switching. Its
software-downloadable resource cards and wide range of WAN, voice and data
interfaces make it one of the most flexible platforms available on the market today.
Strict adherence to
international standards
The 3600 MainStreet system was developed in accordance with recognized

industry standards to provide interfaces and services that comply with diverse
international requirements.
To assist in the planning and implementation of your specific services, your local
Alcatel representative can provide detailed compliance information for your
region, as well as access to the full range of the Alcatel international network
services.
Private network
efficiencies with central
office services
Enhancements to standards, where implemented, are optional; their use is at the

discretion of network designers and operators. Where applicable, enhancements
are designed to work within the boundaries of established communications
standards. For example, HCM provides an 800 b/s resolution for subrate data while
respecting standard 64 kb/s channelized aggregate timeslot boundaries.
1. Introduction
Versatile service
capabilities and
applications
The 3600 MainStreet system is designed to expand easily to handle growth in

service demands. With a nonblocking information bandwidth capacity of up to
512 Mb/s, the 3600 MainStreet system can perform a variety of high-capacity
networking hub and node applications simultaneously. Such versatility makes the
3600 MainStreet system a highly efficient unit for handling business applications
that require multiple TDM, and packet or cell services.
The 3600 MainStreet system supports a wide range of applications, including:
2.048 Mb/s E1-to-1.544 Mb/s T1 format conversion

ADPCM, HCV, CS-A-CELP (G.729 and G.729A) and LD-CELP (G.728)
voice compression, super-tandem operation, and transport of compressed

voice signals over frame relay (VoFR)
aggregate multiplexing at the customer premises or at a CO
ATM service adaptation
digital cross-connect switching
drop and insert, and bypass multiplexing
frame relay switching
G3 fax signal demodulation/modulation
integrated voice and data multiplexing
international Mu-law and A-law companding, signaling, and ringing
conversion
inverse multiplexing
ISDN bandwidth on demand
line and circuit grooming
low-speed and high-speed data transmission and control
managed HDSL
matrix switching
multidrop data bridging and MJUs
PCM bridging digital multipoint
subrate data switching and multiplexing (including data and compressed
voice)
super-rate data transmission domestic and international
V.32 modem relay
voice conference bridging (Hoot n Holler)
X.25 packet switching
Figure 1-1 provides an overview of the 3600 MainStreet system service capabilities.
Product overview
Figure 1-1: 3600 MainStreet service capabilities
Frame
relay
Private
lines
Frame relay
ATM
IP
PSTN
TDM
Frame relay
ATM
ISDN
X.25
56/64 kb/s V.35/X.21

Fractional E1/T1
E1/T1
BRI/PRI
HDSL
IDSL
T1/E1 - full, fractional
Frame relay
E1/T1 ATM
E1/T1 IMA
E3/DS3
Analog voice
3600
MainStreet
Multiservice
Bandwidth
Manager
56/64 kb/s V.35/X.21

Subrate (HCM, DDS, X.50)
X.25
ISDN
ATM
Internet
Service interfaces
Aggregate interfaces
User interfaces
16022
Choice of switching
technology circuit or
packet
Because the 3600 MainStreet system provides circuit, frame relay, and X.25 packet
switching, network designers can choose the switching technology that best
accommodates the transmission characteristics of each end-to-end connection.
The low transit delay and constant bit rates provided by circuit switching are ideal
for highly interactive communication such as voice and video conferencing. In
addition, the cost of a dedicated, end-to-end, circuit-switched connection is
justified by the steady and high-average bandwidth usage typical of bulk file
transfer applications. The 3600 MainStreet system provides a fully nonblocking
DS0 DCS. It performs circuit switching between all interface and resource cards at
the DS0 level. For example, the 3600 MainStreet system cross-connects voice
channels from an LGS card to a T1 or E1 aggregate card.
Because frame relay has dynamic bandwidth allocation and high transmission
rates, it is ideal for bursty, high-speed and low-average bandwidth usage
applications such as LAN internetworking. Circuit-switched channels and frame
streams can be configured on the same aggregate link.
All 3600 MainStreet systems support standards-compliant frame relay services.
The FASTbus option provides greater speed and efficiency for the higher
bandwidth applications, especially on the larger multishelf systems.
1. Introduction
Frame relay services are supported by the FRS/SRIM, FRE, and PE cards. These
cards provide relay and routing functions at the data link layer (Layer 2 of the OSI
reference model). In addition to supporting frame relay PVCs, the cards also
support:
frame relay-to-X.25 network and service internetworking

HDLC-based protocol encapsulation
switched access to frame relay
QoS and fragmentation/defragmentation features for support of
delay-sensitive traffic, such as VoFR, and voice and data integration on frame
relay networks
X.25 packet switching provides reliable data transfer, and port and bandwidth
sharing for access line speeds from 1.2 kb/s to 2 Mb/s. The PE card provides fully
standards-compliant X.25 and X.75 services appropriate for both public and
private networks. To further optimize bandwidth usage in the network, the
MainStreet X.25 service uses frame relay PVCs as high-speed backbone trunks
between nodes.
The PE card consolidates frame relay and X.25 services on the same card to provide
seamless network and service interworking features, which simplifies the migration
path from X.25 to frame relay and protects hardware investment.
For more information about frame relay services with 3600 MainStreet systems, see
the MainStreet Frame Relay General Information book.
Software-driven services
Node software maintains extensive subrate voice and data applications. These
applications are downloaded to, and run on, DSP cards and modules at the request
of the network operator.
The 3600 MainStreet system supports DSP cards and modules that provide
different levels of processing power so that customers can purchase only the
processing power they need. Also, because DSP cards are application-independent,
they provide the flexibility to change with network requirements.
Upgrades of node firmware provide an ever-increasing choice of DSP applications,
often without a need to acquire new hardware.
In addition to software-downloadable DSP cards, several optimized,
application-specific DSP modules are available. For example, the VCM3 provides
M48 and M60 ADPCM transcoding. The VCM3 is supported on Dual T1 and
Dual E1 cards.
Product overview
800 b/s switching

resolution with subrate
switching
The resolution of the 3600 MainStreet core switching matrix can be enhanced by
the SRS DSP application. This application can be downloaded to one or more
DSP4 cards at the request of network operators. Fully flexible space- and
time-switching between similar data formats is supported for DDS DS0-A and
DS0-B (and DDS-compatible services), ITU-T X.50 Division 3, HCM, and I.460
(transparent) subrate data channels. For example, drop and insertion of individual
subrate data channels to and from DS0-A and DS0-B, X.50, HCM or transparent
aggregate channels is supported. For HCM aggregates, the switching resolution
allows drop and insertion of 800 b/s data channels.
SRS is ideal for grooming subrate voice and data circuits prior to their transmission
over the backbone network (for example, when the 3600 MainStreet system is
configured as a hub to multiple feeder nodes whose aggregate DS0s are
underutilized).
Noncontiguous bandwidth
ideal for rerouting
Further bandwidth efficiency is achieved through Alcatel 5620 Network Manager

support for noncontiguous, 800 b/s HCM bandwidth elements. This capability
greatly increases the bandwidth available to the Alcatel 5620 NM to route subrate
data channels during normal and fault conditions. Also, super-rate channels can
use noncontiguous aggregate DS0s.
Choice of aggregate
interfaces
A fully configured 3600 MainStreet switching shelf provides switching for

512 Mb/s of full-duplex, nonblocking information bandwidth. Combined with up
to 128 UCSs or up to 16 high-speed card slots, the 3600 MainStreet system
supports any combination of up to 256 T1 or E1 interfaces, 8 fully redundant DS3
interfaces, or 16 fully redundant E3 interfaces.
The 3600 MainStreet system supports the following aggregate interfaces:
channelized 44.736 Mb/s DS-3 II (T3) and fractional DS3 compatible with the
Basic M13 asynchronous multiplexer mode or the C-bit parity mode
This interface is recommended for accessing both public network facilities and
other CPE nodes in a campus environment.
channelized 34 Mb/s Single or Dual E3 supporting metallic or fiber trunk
access
This interface is recommended for accessing both public network facilities and
other CPE nodes in a campus environment.
4 Mb/s ATM Services cards, which provide inverse multiplexing over ATM
(IMA) and ATM service adaptation for four T1 or E1 interfaces
These interfaces are recommended for providing adaptation of low-speed,
legacy services to ATM cells for transmission through a multiservice
broadband network.
1. Introduction
channelized 2.048 Mb/s Single E1, Dual E1, and Dual E1-2 cards with CAS,
Integral DS3 and E3 a

more reliable and flexible
solution
CCS, or 31-channel signaling

These interfaces are recommended for accessing both public network facilities
and CPE, such as digital PBXs and LAN bridges.
channelized 1.544 Mb/s Single T1, Dual T1, Dual T1-2, and fractional T1 cards
with D4 or ESF framing
These interfaces are recommended for accessing both public network facilities
and CPE, such as digital PBXs, remote channel banks, and external echo
cancellation units.
four-port, n 48, n 56, n 64 kb/s MPA cards with software-configurable
TIA/EIA-449/V.36, TIA/EIA-530-A, V.35, or X.21 interfaces
This multiport card provides end users with a low-cost aggregate interface or
network trunks in areas where T1 or E1 links are unavailable.
single- and dual-port Optical Extension cards with IOTUs for converting
2.048 Mb/s E1 electrical signals to optical signals
These interfaces are used to extend transmission links beyond distances
supported by current copper technology.
channelized 2.048 Mb/s TTC2M cards, which provide a CMI interface to PBXs
V.35, X.21, or X.21 ESI cards for 56 kb/s and n 64 kb/s links between
multiplexers over private or leased lines
These cards provide end users with low-cost aggregate interface or network
trunks in areas where T1 or E1 links are unavailable.
The 3600 MainStreet integral DS3 and E3 capability provides flexibility and cost
savings. In a network with M13 multiplexers, deployment of 3600 MainStreet
nodes eliminates back-to-back DS1s, provides greater reliability in terms of
redundancy and rerouting, and offers a fully network-manageable solution.
In the carrier network shown in Figure 1-2, DCSs, M13 multiplexers, patch panels,
and international conversion units are replaced with a 3600 MainStreet multishelf
system. This way, the carrier can achieve an integrated package with complete
network management capability. Equipment sparing and craft training is less
expensive because of the reduction in multivendor equipment.
Because of its compact size, the 3600 MainStreet system requires relatively little
space. With fewer parts and cables, the 3600 MainStreet system ensures reliability.
Network management provides operators with more control in troubleshooting;
diagnostic tests can be run across all equipment, not just individual units.
Product overview
Figure 1-2: An integrated environment for common carriers

Transmission
(local)
3600 MainStreet
node
Other
exchanges
Local
customers
DS3
M13
T1
Alcatel 5620
Network Manager
T1
T1
T1
Patch
panel
DACS
T1
T1
T1/E1
T1 conversion
Intelligent T1
multiplexer
M13
T1
Voice and data

special services
DS3
Transmission
(long distance)
International
E1
Other
services
15125
Compatibility with public carrier services, such as the AT&T ACCUNET T45
subrated (M28) and nonsubrated service functions, allows 3600 MainStreet
multiplexers to be deployed in private, public, and hybrid networks. The DS3
interfaces are compatible with ANSI T-1.107-1988, T-1.102-1987, and
T-1.404-1989 at the DS3 signal level, and conform to the Basic M13 and C-bit
parity M-frame standards. D4 and ESF T1 framing standards are supported within
the DS3 aggregate.
Conformance with Telco standards means individual sites can be commissioned
individually. For example, a digital node terminating several public
network-switched T1 links can be upgraded to a 3600 MainStreet node with DS3
network access, without affecting other T1 nodes in the network.
Furthermore, any of the 672 DS0s within a DS3 link or the 512 DS0s within an E3
link can exploit the higher efficiencies of HCM, and 8 and 16 kb/s HCV. Because
they are often used in private networks and with narrowband feeder nodes, HCM
and HCV adhere to 64 kb/s channel boundaries and can be switched through the
public network. In addition, carrier special services (such as APC, DDS, and
ADPCM) are fully supported and can coexist with HCM and HCV, providing a
true single-product hybrid environment.
10
1. Introduction
Direct connect data

interfaces
For direct connection to computers, peripherals, front-end processors, video

CODECs, modems, digital network links, and public frame relay networks, the
3600 MainStreet system supports cards for connection to X.21/V.11, V.35, and
V.24 or TIA/EIA-232 interfaces. Subrate speeds as low as 150 b/s and super-rate
speeds of up to 1984 kb/s are supported.
For example, the RS-422 DCC provides four full-duplex interfaces, each
independently configurable as either TIA/EIA-530-A, TIA/EIA-449 or V.36, X.21,
or V.35. This allows a single DCC to serve diverse data interfaces simply through
software configuration.
The RS-422 DCC is complemented by the UDP, which can be provisioned with
any combination of up to four DCE and/or DTE RS-530-A, RS-449/V.36, X.21, or
V.35 interface modules. Interface modules provide the appropriate connector for
each interface type supported by the RS-422 DCC.
In addition, a 64 kb/s Codirectional card is available that provides four
synchronous interfaces to G.703-compatible, 64 kb/s codirectional circuits.
These circuits would typically be connected to 64 kb/s timeslots in a 2.048 Mb/s
G.704-framed signal.
Basic rate (2B+D)

interfaces and remote
DTUs
The 3600 MainStreet system offers basic rate (2B+D) interface circuits for the
remote distribution of data to compact and network-manageable DTUs. The
2B+D interface represents a combination of the NT and TA functions of the ISDN
reference model. DTUs offer V.24/TIA/EIA-232, X.21/V.11, and V.35 interfaces.
For off-premises applications, the combination of an extended-range
2700 MainStreet series DTU and a 2B1Q line card, 27LC2 line card, 27LC3 line
card, or 2B1Q channel unit provides two fully network-manageable 64 kb/s
channels over a single twisted-pairan attractive alternative to the traditional
OCU and DSU configurations used for access to DDS network services. Also, this
combination allows PTT authorities to provide flexible X.50 network access
services over existing 2-wire facilities.
All MainStreet series DTUs are completely network-manageable, provide remote
DCE or DTE ports, and use 2-wire, twisted-pair loops. DTUs can be located beside
desktop equipment that is physically remote from the 3600 MainStreet system.
Alternatively, up to 12 DTUs can be rack-mounted in a 19-inch shelf along with the
3600 MainStreet system for high-density data applications.
The maximum loop length supported depends on the type of copper cable used
and the cables associated resistance factor. For example, the 2700 MainStreet series
DTUs support a loop length of up to 5.5 km (4.5 mi) using 26 AWG copper cable.
11
Product overview
Multirate HDSL interfaces

and remote DTUs
The 3600 MainStreet system offers multirate HDSL interface circuits for the
remote distribution of data to compact, network-manageable 2801 MainStreet
HDSL DTUs. Two versions are available:
the 2-wire 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU, with the 28LC line card, provides
n 64 kb/s (up to 1 Mb/s) service over a single twisted-pair loop
the 4-wire 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU, with the 28LC line card, provides
n 128 kb/s (up to 2 Mb/s) service over a double twisted-pair loop
Both versions support one remote port and V.35, V.36/TIA/EIA-449, or X.21
interfaces.
The DTU can be collocated with desktop equipment that is physically remote from
the 3600 MainStreet system. The maximum loop length supported depends on
variations in cable characteristics and impedance, the presence of bridge taps,
impulse noise, electrical noise, and crosstalk. For example, the 2-wire version of the
2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU supports a loop length of up to 4.0 km (2.5 mi) using
26 AWG cable with a data rate of 256 kb/s. The 4-wire version supports a data rate
of 512 kb/s over the same distance.
Analog voice interfaces
Voice interfaces allow analog telephone CO exchanges, PBXs, and telephone sets to
connect to the 3600 MainStreet system. Six different analog voice interfaces are
supported:
LGS, which connects the network directly to either a PBX or telephone set
LGE, which connects the network directly to a telephone CO exchange or PBX
E&M, the popular, short-distance, private-wire circuit used to connect
switching systems (for example, PBXs) to each other over T1 or E1 facilities
MRD, which provides an on- or off-premises, single-circuit, 2-wire terminal
interface
4WTO, which is commonly used in analog cellular networks to provide
on-premises, 4-wire applications for which there is no requirement for
signaling
4WDX, a 4-wire transmission line interface that provides bidirectional on- or
off-hook signaling, and is used to interface with equipment that converts DX
signaling to E&M signaling
Analog voice interfaces are available on multiport cards and on single-port channel
units. Cards are intended for on-premises applications; channel units are intended
for off-premises and CO applications. Digital voice access over DS3, E3, T1, and E1
is also supported.
12
1. Introduction
Central office compliant

and international voice
frequency channel units
Channel units, the Common Carrier card, the Test card, and the Test module have
been specifically designed to meet public telephone company requirements. Alcatel
offers these channel units:
LGS
LGE
E&M
MRD and 2WMRD
4WTO
2B1Q
OCU-DP
DS0-DP
4WDX
The Common Carrier card accommodates up to four channel units, each with
individual circuit modularity (that is, a channel unit can be removed from the
Common Carrier card without affecting service on the other three channel units).
The Test card provides metallic test access, and the optional Test module provides
analog and digital test access to any channel unit, and 64 kb/s digital access to the
OCU-DP channel unit. Test configurations are controlled by software and include
direct and high-impedance monitor, split access, and 4-wire loopback (these test
configurations are described in more detail in Easy-access maintenance features).
Dissimilar voice and data
accommodated
The 3600 MainStreet system connects dissimilar voice and data interfaces over
digital transmission facilities. For example, an X.21 device can be cross-connected
to a V.35 device, or an LGS circuit can be cross-connected to an E&M trunk
either directly within a node or at endpoint nodes joined by an aggregate link. The
conversion between various interfaces is performed internally by node system
software.
13
Product overview
Modular
architecture
The 3600 MainStreet switching matrix is fully interconnected and nonblocking. It

can be used as a standalone unit or scaled to a multishelf system with a switching
shelf and up to eight peripheral units.
As shown in Figure 1-3, the switching shelf is the hub of a multishelf system and
provides cross-connect switching, system-wide control, and central alarm
collection. Peripheral shelves provide DS1 aggregates (T1, E1, X.21, and V.35),
voice and data interfaces, and special application features. HSPSs provide DS3
interfaces, and HSPS2s provide E3 interfaces.
Figure 1-3: 3600 MainStreet multishelf system architecture
Switching
shelf
Peripheral shelf: single (8 UCSs) or dual shelf (16 UCSs)

= or
High-speed peripheral shelf DS-3 II or E3 card: single or redundant card pair
4697
The 3600 MainStreet system provides a fully nonblocking DCS for up to 512 Mb/s
of full-duplex bandwidth switching. This bandwidth is cross-connected at the DS0
level and is segmented into eight 64-Mb/s modules.
Each segment can be configured to support any of the following:
a peripheral shelf pair with 16 UCSs providing up to 32 T1 or E1 interfaces

(equivalent to a dual shelf )
a fully redundant DS3 interface (equivalent to 28 T1s or 672 DS0s) installed in
an HSPS
a fully redundant Single or Dual E3 interface (equivalent to 16 E1s or 512 DS0s
for Single E3, and 32 E1s or 1024 DS0s for Dual E3) installed in an HSPS2
Flexible switching shelf
connections
The switching shelf provides eight nonblocking switching buses, allowing it to

support any combination of peripheral shelves, DS3 HSPSs, and E3 HSPS2s.
Each peripheral shelf, DS-3 II card, or E3 card connects to the switching shelf
through a Switching card. Switching cards expand switching shelf switching
capacity in 64-Mb/s increments, up to a maximum capacity of 512 Mb/s.
The switching shelf accommodates an SCC3, a Clock card, and from one to eight
Switching cards. Two load-sharing power supplies provide power redundancy, and
the entire shelf can be duplicated for redundancy. All DS0-level circuit connections
are configured from the switching shelf. Both unidirectional (one-way and
broadcast) and bidirectional connections are supported.
14
1. Introduction
As shown in Figure 1-4, bidirectional connections provide two separate receive and
transmit paths between source and destination devices. Data and signaling pass
back and forth between the source and destination devices. All UCS cards support
bidirectional connections.
Figure 1-4: Bidirectional connections
3600 MainStreet
node
3600 MainStreet
node
Circuit 1
Circuit 2
Network
10824
As shown in Figure 1-5, unidirectional connections provide a single path between

a source and destination device; data and signaling pass in one direction only.
Unidirectional connections are supported on the Dual E1 and 64 kb/s
Codirectional cards.
Figure 1-5: Unidirectional connections
3600 MainStreet
node
3600 MainStreet
node
Source
circuit 1
Destination
circuit 1
Network
3600 MainStreet
node
Destination
circuit 2
10825
Versatile peripheral shelf
The peripheral shelf provides interface and application functions, connects

external equipment (both voice and data) into the system, provides aggregate
interfaces up to 2.048 Mb/s, provides up to 62 DS0s for each UCS, and supports a
total bandwidth of 64 Mb/s. Each peripheral shelf connects to a switching shelf
Switching card through a Switching Interface card. The Switching Interface card
gives the peripheral shelf access to the DCS of the switching shelf.
15
Product overview
High-speed peripheral
shelves
HSPSs provide high-order interfaces and are available in two variants.
The HSPS accommodates up to eight 44.736 Mb/s DS-3 II interfaces and one
or two ac or dc power supplies mounted in a power tray.
The HSPS2 accommodates up to sixteen 34.368 Mb/s E3 interfaces (eight
Single E3 or eight Dual E3 cards), one or two dc, independently removable
(hot-swappable) power supply cards, and an integrated heat deflector.
A 3600 MainStreet multishelf system can be equipped with both HSPSs and
HSPS2s. If desired, each DS-3 II or E3 card can be installed in its own HSPS or
HSPS2. Optionally, DS-3 II or E3 cards can be configured in redundant card pairs,
up to a total of four redundant card pairs for each shelf.
DS0 and n DS0 (n 24) cross-connections are allowed between E3 and DS-3 II
cards in the same 3600 MainStreet system, depending on the type of signaling
configured.
DS0s configured for no signaling (NoSig) can be cross-connected without

restriction.
DS0s configured for all other signaling types cannot be cross-connected (for
example, PCM voice channels).
The above restrictions do not apply for cross-connections between E3 and T1 cards
or between DS-3 II and E1 cards. In this case, signaling conversion is performed by
the T1 or E1 cards, and companding conversion (if required) is provided by the T1
or E1 card CCM.
Each DS-3 II or E3 card provides a control complex that performs its own slot, card,
and circuit configuration as well as card maintenance. DS-3 II and E3 cards depend
on the switching shelf for all DCS functions. Each DS-3 II or E3 card connects
directly to a switching shelf Switching card.
The HSPS provides metallic DS3 trunk access through coaxial cable BNC
connectors at the rear of the shelf. The HSPS2 provides both metallic and fiber
optic E3 trunk access. Single E3 cards support both metallic and fiber trunk access.
Dual E3 cards support only metallic trunk access.
Universal and high-speed
card slots determine
application
In 3600 MainStreet multishelf systems, peripheral shelf UCSs accommodate any of

the aggregate interface cards, voice and data port cards, and resource cards such as
the FRS/SRIM, DSP, and DCP cards. The selection of cards, plus the number of
DS-3 II and E3 cards used in HSPSs and HSPS2s, determine the functionality that
any one 3600 MainStreet system provides.
Assorted shelf options
The 3600 MainStreet shelves fit directly into standard 19-inch racks or into 23-inch
racks using extender brackets. All shelves are compact in design, typically
measuring 48.6 cm (19.15 in.) high, 48.3 cm (19 in.) wide, and 25.8 cm (10.15 in.)
deep.
16
1. Introduction
Scalability with
flexible
configurations
Development of a common architecture and standard components enables the

3600 MainStreet system to evolve to meet changing business requirements.
Physical components such as shelves, power supplies, and all UCS peripheral cards,
are common to all 3600 MainStreet systems.
Upgrading requires neither replacement of these components nor rewiring of
input and output cables. The migration capability, building on the existing
installed base, reduces costs and minimizes excess inventory.
Software is designed according to the same principle of flexibility. Because all
3600 MainStreet systems are developed from a common software stream, all
products offer complementary features and provide similar user interfaces, which
reduces training needs.
Figure 1-6 illustrates some typical configurations, from a single-shelf unit to fully
redundant multishelf systems. The FASTbus option, available for all system
configurations, is particularly useful for the larger multishelf systems to offload
heavy frame relay traffic.
When it is time to expand a system, existing cards and other components can be
used in the new configuration, providing a built-in migration path for system
growth as networking applications evolve. Figure 1-7 shows the range of
3600 MainStreet system scalability.
17
Product overview
Figure 1-6: Typical 3600 MainStreet system configurations
Single or dual shelf
Multishelf
High-capacity frame relay
Switching shelf
(nonredundant or
control-redundant)
FIP-to-FRE
card
connections
Single shelf
(nonredundant or
control-redundant)
Single or dual shelves
with FASTbus
FASTbus
Interconnect
Panel
Up to 8 peripheral shelves
(single or dual, with or without
control redundancy)
Switching shelf
(nonredundant
or redundant)
Switching shelf
(nonredundant
or redundant)
Dual shelf
(nonredundant or
control-redundant)
Peripheral
shelves
HSPS
(single or
redundant
card pairs)
Peripheral shelves
(single, dual, or control-redundant)
and HSPS(1)
HSPS
(single or
redundant
card pairs)
Peripheral shelves
with FASTbus
Multishelf with FASTbus
and HSPS
1. One HSPS card pair counts as one peripheral shelf; the combined total of peripheral shelves
and HSPS card pairs must not exceed eight.
16028
18
1. Introduction
Figure 1-7: 3600 MainStreet system scalability

Maximum
# slots
128
64
32
1
Multishelf system with dual

peripheral shelves
Multishelf system with single

peripheral shelves
16
Dual-shelf system
8
Maximum switching
capacity (Mb/s)
Single-shelf system
32
64
128
256
512
16027
Exceptional
software control
All 3600 MainStreet hardware is software-configurable; there are no mechanical

switches or jumpers on any card. This reduces the number of on-site visits by
skilled personnel, as node configuration and reconfiguration can be performed by
software commands issued locally or from a remote network control center
anywhere in the world. For example, software commands can be issued to
configure an E&M card for 2-wire or 4-wire circuits, to specify transmission level
points for any voice port, to select the speed and format of data transmission, or to
set cross-connections between ports, aggregates, and resource cards.
19
Product overview
Node and network

management products
A 3600 MainStreet system can be managed using the products described below.
Alcatel Craft Interface Node Manager
This PC-based software product is intended for on-site node commissioning and
maintenance with the SCC3, frame relay, and call processing cards. The software
runs on laptops and personal computers.
Alcatel 5620 NM
This sophisticated network manager uses a GUI that runs on a UNIX-based

workstation from Sun Microsystems.
ASCII terminal
Any ASCII (VT100) terminal (or PC-based terminal emulation software) can be
used to initiate a node management session with the SCC3, frame relay, and call
processing cards through a built-in NMTI.
Alcatel 5521 PC-Based Element Manager
This PC-based software product provides remote access to the Alcatel 5620 NM
from laptops and personal computers.
Control packet switching
system
CPSS, based on X.25, allows communications between network management-tonode, node-to-node, and node-to-intelligent node elements. Any aggregate link
can transport CPSS messages. When two or more links join the same two nodes,
only one CPSS channel is necessary (this includes multiple parcel links).
If a node becomes isolated from the network, a backup CPSS route can be provided
using a modem and the PSTN. Each 3600 MainStreet node in a network has
integral CPSS message switching capability.
See chapter 3 for more information about CPSS.
Software upgrading and

downloadable
software-based
applications
The 3600 MainStreet system features fully upgradeable system software. The
switching shelf SCC3, peripheral shelf SCC3, DS-3 II card, and E3 card, as well as
some application cards, can be upgraded easily by downloading the latest system
software from the Alcatel 5620 NM.
Certain cards (such as the ATM Services, frame relay, and call processing cards, as
well as some digital signal processing cards) support software upgrading. This
feature greatly simplifies system upgrades by allowing new versions of card
software to be downloaded locally to a card using the Alcatel 5521 PC EM or the
Alcatel Craft Interface Node Manager.
Within the node, DSP card and DPM applications are software-downloadable
from the common control DSP application library. This allows a single DSP or
DPM to serve different applications at different times.
20
1. Introduction
Centralized network
management
The centralized approach to network management reduces internode control

overhead on the network. Connection management functions are handled by the
5620 NM using a state-of-the-art standard processor.
In the centralized network architecture, the higher-level networking functions,
such as path routing, are controlled by the Alcatel 5620 NM. Functions such as
managing port configuration parameters and cross-connect information are
assigned to the nodes.
In older, distributed network architectures, each node must communicate with
every other node. Any change in node status must be reported to all nodes in the
network. These architectures create a flood of status messages, effectively limiting
the size of the network. In contrast, centralized control reduces network traffic,
enabling much larger networks to be constructed.
In addition to supporting more nodes, the Alcatel 5620 NM is designed to run on
industry-standard computer platforms offered by Sun Microsystems. The Sun
platforms provide high performance and allow customers to take advantage of
third-party development of workstation technology at no extra cost. Furthermore,
because network managers perform the network management functions, the nodes
require simpler, less expensive CPU components.
Shared node usage

network partitioning
The combination of centralized network management and fully softwarecontrolled nodes provides a powerful foundation for advanced network
management functions. For example, the Alcatel 5620 NM allows a physical
network to be managed as multiple VBNs, VSNs, or a combination of both.
Corporations gain economic advantages by multiplexing all enterprise information
over common transmission facilities, while at the same time letting operational
groups within the organization manage their parts of the network. For
transmission service providers, the ability to provide end-customer control of
managed bandwidth services represents new revenue-generating services that will
stem bypass and extend the life of their investment.
Comprehensive
system protection
features
A suite of system protection capabilities ensures that 3600 MainStreet nodes

provide high levels of availability and accessibility. Protection begins at the
component level with state-of-the-art, low-power IC technology. At the system
level, protection options include full control and switching redundancy, power
supply redundancy, interface redundancy, and automatic path rerouting.
Energy-efficient design
The 3600 MainStreet system requires less power than comparable products from
other vendors. Typically, the 3600 MainStreet system requires only 150 W for each
shelf, reducing power and heat dissipation problems. A separate, dedicated UPS is
seldom required because the low power requirement of the 3600 MainStreet
system allows it to tie into existing PBX or computer power backup systems.
21
Product overview
Hot standby protection
All 3600 MainStreet shelves support redundant common control, switching, and
load-sharing power supplies for hot standby capability that automatically switches
to the backup cards and power supplies when warranted by the severity of one or
more faults. All redundant cards and power supplies can be independently installed
and removed without interrupting service. In addition, the 45 Mb/s DS-3 II,
34 Mb/s E3, single 2.048 Mb/s E1, single 1.544 Mb/s T1, X.21 PRI, and V.35 PRI
aggregate cards can be configured for one-to-one card redundancy.
If the node becomes isolated from the network manager, it continues to function
as programmed. To reduce the likelihood of node isolation, redundant and remote
Alcatel 5620 NM configurations are supported. In addition, CPSS is designed to
reroute around link failures and can be configured to use backup modem links.
Alternate path routing
End-to-end circuit paths can be protected by an alternate route should the

preferred route become unavailable. The 3600 MainStreet system supports four
types of path protection:
RAPID, which is implemented at the node level by the 3600 MainStreet system
ISDN leased-line protection, which is implemented at the node level by the
3600 MainStreet system
DS3 and E3 APC, which is implemented at the DS3 and E3 interface level
AAR, which is implemented at the network level by the Alcatel 5620 NM
Choice of timing sources
System timing can be either frequency-locked to an external source or allowed to

free run from the Clock card Stratum-3 crystal oscillator, accurate to 4.6 ppm.
External timing sources can be directly connected (for example, a station clock) or
derived from an aggregate or data link.
Flexible node and network

synchronization
Two synchronization algorithms are available that provide a controlled slip

mechanism to enable the use of 3600 MainStreet nodes in plesiochronous
networks:
synchronization tables
automatic network synchronization
Synchronization tables
Synchronization tables allow each 3600 MainStreet node to identify and rank up to
four timing sources. These sources may consist of externally attached clocks or
clocks derived from aggregate links. The node ensures that the timing source with
the highest ranking is always used.
22
1. Introduction
Automatic network synchronization
ANS can be configured network-wide to ensure that all nodes in a network are
automatically synchronized to the same reference frequency.
ANS v2 is designed to better accommodate large complex networks. ANS v2
features are:
independence from the CPSS network

flexible ANS link options
enhanced network layer services
ANS subnetworking (zones)
Easy-access
maintenance
features
A suite of system maintenance features provides network operators with easy access
to status information and diagnostic tests.
Dual maintenance ports
The SCC3 and DCP card are equipped with dual V.24 and TIA/EIA-232
maintenance ports for connection to network management products or the Alcatel
Craft Interface Node Manager. These ports can be configured for direct local access
or modem access. In full control-redundant configurations, the currently inactive
SCC3 ports are disabled to allow Y-cabling and ensure communications with the
active SCC3. The frame relay and call processing cards also provide V.24 and
TIA/EIA-232 maintenance ports.
Automatic and directed

diagnostics
Startup diagnostics, which check program integrity as well as memory and

equipment configuration, are run automatically during system initialization.
During regular operation, the system can be configured to run background
diagnostics on a cyclical basis, and the system operator can activate diagnostics
selectively (including analog and digital loopbacks). If a voice circuit (or an
aggregate channel cross-connected to a voice circuit) is required for a call while a
test is in progress, the test on that circuit is aborted.
Clock card and

General Facilities card 2
The Clock card and GFC2 provide either a TEP-1(E) or a North American style
alarm interface, additional background diagnostics, and system integrity tests.
Access to input and output alarm contacts through the Clock card allows the
monitoring of external equipment, thereby providing the basis for a telemetry
network. The alarm contacts may be enabled or disabled through software control.
GFC2s and Clock cards also provide power supply and fan tray alarms for the
peripheral and switching shelves, respectively. In the HSPS and HSPS2, these
alarms are communicated to the node through DS-3 II and E3 cards, respectively.
The GFC2 also provides system integrity checks, an integral tone generator, and a
test port and synchronization inputs for 1.544 MHz and 64 kHz composite clocks.
23
Product overview
The GFC3 provides all the functionality of the GFC2, as well as the following
features:
Digital connection
maintenance
metallic test access

digital and analog tone tester
DS0 test access
BERT
Digital connection maintenance allows access to the data paths through the central
switching matrix of the 3600 MainStreet system, so you can verify and change data
and signaling carried between two connected target circuits.
Connection maintenance provides these functions:
monitor maintenance
split-through and split-back maintenance
terminate-and-leave maintenance
For more information about digital connection maintenance, see chapter 11.
Digital and metallic split
and monitor test access
The optional Test card and GFC3 provide both digital and metallic test access
connections.
Digital test connections allow access to any DS0 from the faceplate of the Test card
or GFC3 to configure interface speed, error correction, and fault signaling.
Metallic test connections provide direct metallic access to tip and ring pairs from
the faceplate of the Test card or GFC3. The Test card and GFC3 support these
metallic test connections:
direct monitor
high-impedance monitor
split-access
4-wire loopback
For more information about digital and metallic split and monitor test access, see
chapter 11.
Test module analog,
digital and BER tests
The optional Test module, which is installed on the Test card, generates an analog
or digital sinusoidal test tone that has a configurable frequency and output level.
Analog tone testing conducts tests on cabling connections, external equipment,
channel units, and digital components. Digital tone testing measures the amplitude
and frequency of the test tone on voice circuits in digital PCM format.
BER tests allow you to test the quality of data paths.
24
1. Introduction
Continuous alarm
monitoring
The 3600 MainStreet system is continuously monitored for abnormal conditions

and significant events. The Control cards monitor events and conditions for the
system components, as well as for the system, interface, and application cards. The
FRS/SRIM, FRE, and PE cards monitor local events and conditions on the card,
and maintain card-specific alarm queues.
The types of alarm notifications that may be raised by the 3600 MainStreet system
are:
Categorized and recorded

alarms
configuration alarms
equipment faults
loss of aggregate link signaling or framing alignments
external alarm activities (tail circuit status)
synchronization timing source changes
external contact closures (through the Clock card)
startup diagnostic errors
The cards and shelves are monitored for significant events and abnormal
conditions. When such an event or condition is detected, an alarm record is
created. Individual alarms are logged to alarm queues of varying degrees of severity.
Each alarm management mode (standard or TEP-1(E) mode) has different names
for the severity classifications.
Alarm messages in both modes can be viewed, acknowledged, and deleted using an
Alcatel 5620 NM or the NMTI. All queues hold up to 2000 alarms (depending on
the system configuration), except for the FRS/SRIM, FRE, and PE card alarm
queues, which hold up to 256 alarms. Queues can be configured to discard new
alarms when the queue is full, or to overwrite the oldest alarms.
Standard mode
Standard mode supports two types of trouble and event notification:
alarms
diagnostic notifications
Alarms indicate conditions that have an immediate or potential impact on the
operation of the node. Alarms require technical attention; the severity of the alarm
dictates the level of attention required.
Diagnostic notifications do not require technical attention; they report system
events (for example, a database reset) or alarms raised during node maintenance.
Every diagnostic alarm raised by the node is automatically cleared and stored to
provide historical maintenance information.
Standard mode classifies alarms and diagnostic notifications according to the
following severities: critical, major, minor, or diagnostic.
25
Product overview
TEP-1(E) mode
In TEP-1(E) mode, each alarm may be categorized by the operator as either

prompt, deferred, or in-station. Once categorized, alarm messages are recorded in
the corresponding alarm queue. All alarms are identified by the date and time, a
unique number, and a message describing the alarm. Alarms can also be
categorized as none (meaning alarm occurrences are ignored and no information
is logged).
Remote or local alarm
logging
Alarms can be logged locally to a printer, the Craft Interface Node Manager, or a
network management product directly connected to the node. Alarms can also be
logged remotely to the network operations center using either CPSS or a modem
link to transport alarm information.
Flexible external alarm

support
The 3600 MainStreet system supports extensive external alarm capabilities, such as:
external fan unit and ringing generator failure alarm inputs

user-configurable external alarm names (for switching and peripheral shelves)
visual (major and minor) and audio external alarm outputs
Loopbacks
Loopbacks can be invoked by the network operator or by network-generated

requests, such as DDS. Loopbacks occur at the attached device interface (analog),
or at the junction of the card and backplane (digital). Loopbacks can be applied to
individual channels on a link or to an entire link. Table 1-1 lists the maximum
number of concurrent loopbacks possible on the 3600 MainStreet system.
Table 1-1: Maximum number of concurrent loopbacks
Shelf or card
Dual E3 card
Single E3 card
Loopback type
Maximum number of loopbacks
Circuit
100
Slot (1)
42
Circuit
100
Slot
DS-3 II card
Peripheral shelf
(2)
21
Circuit
100
Slot (3)
28
Circuit
100
Slot
32
Port (on MPA card)
40
Notes
1. Slot loopbacks can be applied to any E1 or E2 on a Dual E3 card as well as on the card itself.
2. Slot loopbacks can be applied to any E1 or E2 on a Single E3 card as well as on the card itself
or its Fibre card (when present).
3. Slot loopbacks can be applied to any DS1 on a DS-3 II card as well as on the card itself.
26
1. Introduction
Major new release

8.0 features
This section summarizes the major new features and enhancements supported by
Release 8.0 (Generics 1118, C118, D118, E118, and H118) system software. In
addition to providing these new features, Release 8.0 continues to build on the
features provided in earlier releases.
System features
Release 8.0 introduces a new memory module and a new 24 V dc power supply.
Downloadable Memory module 3
The DMM3 provides additional resources to support future releases of the

3600 MainStreet system. The DMM3 can be used in a redundant node where the
mate Control card has a DMM2.
24 V dc power supply
The new 24 V dc power supply design uses a modular construction, allowing the
addition of more power modules to extend the power availability for UCSs.
For more information about the new 24 V dc power supply, see chapter 12.
Data features
Release 8.0 introduces the 27LC3 line card and DPM3 module, support for a 4-wire
2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU, the 2752 MainStreet DTU, and new functionality for
the 2751 and 2753 MainStreet DTUs.
27LC3 line card and DPM3 module
The 27LC3 line card provides 12 ports of 2B1Q connectivity for the 2751, 2752, and
2753 MainStreet DTUs. The functionality of the 12-port 27LC3 line card is
identical to that of the 6-port 27LC2 line card, except that it supports double data
bandwidth.
The DPM3 module is supported with the 27LC3 line card, providing subrate
multiplexing for all 12 ports. The DPM3 supports only HCM in this release.
For more information about the 27LC3 line card, see chapter 8.
Support for 4-wire 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU
The new 4-wire 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU allows for low-cost, high-bandwidth
access from the edge of the network, with selectable loop and customer data rates.
The DTU provides two wires to each of two (1 Mb/s) ports on the 28LC line card,
for a maximum line speed of 2 Mb/s.
For more information on the 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU, see chapter 3.
27
Product overview
2752 MainStreet DTU and expanded functionality for 2751 and 2753 MainStreet
DTUs
The 2752 MainStreet DTU supports both X.21 and TIA/EIA-449 interfaces in
either a redundant or a 2-port nonredundant configuration.
Enhanced functionality for the 2751 and 2753 MainStreet DTUs includes data port
redundancy support, visual indicators, OOS lead handling, integral BERT, built-in
self tests and reporting, and n 64 kb/s super-rate data interface speed.
For more information about these DTUs, see chapter 3.
Management and
configuration features
Release 8.0 improves control redundancy by introducing failure switching as an

alternative to demerit switching (supported in earlier releases).
Activity switch control and failure switching
Failure switching determines the system health based on the severity of failures that
occur on each control complex. The control complex with the most severe failure
is the inactive complex. An activity switch occurs when the active complex develops
a problem that is more severe than any problem on the inactive complex, even if
the inactive complex has several minor problems.
Other features
Release 8.0 introduces an enhanced version of the external ringing generator,

which provides:
wider input voltage with an operational range of -38 to -75 V dc

dual dc inputs for dc feed redundancy on a separate connector
customer-selectable ringing frequency and dc bias
pull-out tray for easy access to ringing units from the front panel
For more information about the external ringing generator, see chapter 3.
28
Applications
This chapter describes the wide range of value-added applications supported by the
3600 MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager, including:
ATM adaptation
subrate data applications: DDS, X.50, HCM, and I.460 transparent rate
adaption; multidrop data bridging; subrate multiplexing; subrate switching,

and Switched 56 kb/s Access
inverse multiplexing
super-rate data access (up to 1984 kb/s)
voice applications: ADPCM G.721, HCV, CS-A-CELP G.729 and G.729
Annex A, LD-CELP G.728 voice compression, super-tandem operation, and
VoFR; G3 fax and V.32 modem relay; echo cancellation; international
aggregate signaling and companding conversion; analog interface conversion;
voice conference bridging
frame relay switching
X.25 packet switching
29
Product overview
Both Telco-standard and optional proprietary applications are supported using

one or more of the following resources:
multipurpose, software-downloadable application cards and modules, such as

the IMC, DSP card, and the DPM
hardware-optimized, application-specific cards and modules, such as the
FRS/SRIM, FRE, and PE cards, and the VCM3 and CCM
system software Generic 1118 and Generic C118, which reside on the
switching shelf SCC3; Generic D118, which resides on the peripheral shelf
SCC3; Generic H118, which resides on the DS-3 II card; and Generic E118,
which resides on the E3 card
Table 2-1 lists the applications supported by 3600 MainStreet systems and the
specific resources they require.
Table 2-1: 3600 MainStreet value-added applications
Application
Card or module
A
T
M
S
C
ATM adaptation
C
P
C
D
S
P
D
S
P
2
D
S
P
3
D
S
P
4
D
S
P
5
D
S
P
5
H
I
M
C
F
R
S/
S
R
I
M
D
P
M
1
D
P
M
2
V
C
M
3
Frame relay switching
Subrate switching
DDS Access
DDS Core
X.50 (Div. 3) and X.50 Telco

(Div. 2 and 3)
HCM or transparent rate

adaption
HCM with 4 kb/s CPSS

PCM bridging
ADPCM
ADPCM with G3 fax
A-CELP (G.729 and G.729A)
30
F
R
E
P
E
X.25 services
Inverse multiplexing
C
C
M
2. Applications
Application
Card or module
A
T
M
S
C
C
P
C
D
S
P
D
S
P
2
D
S
P
3
D
S
P
4
D
S
P
5
Bulk HCV
F
R
S/
S
R
I
M
D
P
M
1
D
P
M
2
V
C
M
3
C
C
M
F
R
E
P
E
HCV
HCV and G3 fax
Super-tandem operation
VoFR
Voice conference bridging
I
M
C
LD-CELP (G.728)
Echo cancellation
D
S
P
5
H
PCM companding conversion

G3 fax relay
V.32 bis modem relay
ATM adaptation
This section describes the ATM adaptation methods supported on the ATM
Services card, and how bandwidth is distributed to support these adaptation
methods.
Adaptation methods
Two adaptation methods are supported on the ATM Services card: AAL1, which
provides circuit emulation service, and AAL5, which provides HDLC service.
The circuit emulation service formats data and signaling for n 64 kb/s circuits
into constant bit rate AAL1 cells for transport over an ATM network. Circuit
emulation service can be applied to traffic from voice, data, aggregate and DSP
circuits, and frame relay packets.
The HDLC service formats HDLC and frame relay packets into variable or
unspecified bit rate AAL5 cells for transport over an ATM network. HDLC service
can be applied to traffic from data, aggregate and DSP circuits, and frame relay
packets.
The ATM Services card supports service and network interworking modes. Service
interworking mode translates frame relay into ATM for transport across an ATM
network to ATM devices. Network interworking mode transports frame relay
across an ATM network to another frame relay network.
31
Product overview
In addition to supporting ATM adaptation, the ATM Services card provides:
traffic management for frame relay and ATM

connection admission control
scaling factor
redundancy (load sharing of traffic)
timing and synchronization
Figure 2-1 illustrates the multiservice aspect of ATM adaptation.

Figure 2-1: Multiservice ATM adaptation
5620 NM
3612 MainStreet
NBM
FR
36110
MainStreet
MPC
X.25
ATM
Network
T1/E1 ATM
T1/E1
V.35/X.21
3600 MainStreet
with ATM
Services card
PBX
LGE
Router
LGS
PSTN
Fax
16026
32
2. Applications
Bandwidth distribution
Bandwidth distribution is instrumental in providing adaptation services. The ATM

Services card uses two types of bandwidth: backplane and network bandwidth.
ATM Services cards installed in a 3600 MainStreet system support 4 Mb/s of
backplane bandwidth. Network bandwidth support is the same for the AAL1 and
AAL5 variants, but is allocated differently depending on the configuration.
The ATM Services card provides four T1 or E1 network interfaces (physical ports),
and is equipped with an IMA module, which provides one ATM network interface
(logical port). Each T1 or E1 port provides an independent network link, or can be
assigned to an IMA group for combined transmission. An IMA group can be
inversely multiplexed to form an aggregate ATM cell stream.
Each T1 port provides 1.5 Mb/s of network bandwidth, for a total of 6 Mb/s; each
E1 port provides 2 Mb/s of network bandwidth, for a total of 8 Mb/s. The IMA
module provides a logical port for an IMA group, which can be composed of up to
four T1 or E1 physical ports and their associated links. The effective network
bandwidth for the IMA port is approximately n 1.5 Mb/s (T1) or n 2 Mb/s
(E1), where n is the number of ports in the IMA group. The values are approximate
as IMA overhead must be factored into the total bandwidth.
Transport entities
The ATM Services card uses bandwidth to support:
ASC circuits
An ASC circuit represents 64 kb/s of TDM bandwidth on the system
backplane. ASC circuits, which are organized into ASC circuit groups, act as
intermediate points between the TDM and ATM sides of the ATM Services
card. On the TDM side, the circuits cross-connect through the Control card
switching matrix to 64 kb/s circuits on other UCS cards. On the ATM side, the
circuits are assigned VC parameters to define an AAL1 VC, or are assigned to
a frame stream circuit that connects to an AAL5 VC.
The ATM Services card provides 60 ASC circuits, organized into two circuit
groups with 30 circuits per group.
frame stream circuits
A frame stream on the AAL1/5 ATM Services card specifies the bandwidth
over which HDLC-formatted connections operate. HDLC-formatted traffic
includes frames configured for transparent HDLC applications or frame relay
HDLC applications. A frame stream circuit is the entity used to configure and
connect a frame stream. Frame streams are specified by frame stream circuit
identifiers.
The AAL1/5 variants of the 4 Mb/s ATM Services card support 44 FSCs,
providing a combined bandwidth of up to 2816 kb/s (44 64 kb/s) for
HDLC-formatted traffic. An individual stream can carry up to 1920 kb/s.
Future developments on the ATM Services card includes support for 62 FSCs.
33
Product overview
DLCs
An FSC configured for frame relay interworking can support up to 250 DLCs;
however, the ATM Services card supports a total of 1024 DLCs. Each FSC
configured for transparent HDLC traffic counts as one DLC toward the
1024 DLCs per card limit.
VPs
The ATM Services card supports 32 VPs per port (E1, T1, and IMA), with a
VPI range of 0 to 31 and a VCI range of 32 to 65535 (per VP).
PVCs
A PVC connects a backplane circuit to a VC on an ATM link. VCs carrying
AAL5-adapted traffic require frame relay-to-ATM PVC configuration. VCs
carrying AAL1-adapted traffic require AAL1 PVC configuration.
ISDN bandwidth
on demand
ISDN bandwidth on demand in 3600 MainStreet systems provides customers with

an alternate transport facility for leased-line applications. For example, customers
can use ISDN bandwidth to address the backup and disaster recovery requirements
of their leased-line network, and service providers can offer ISDN access to their
managed bandwidth services networks, as shown in Figures 2-2 and 2-3.
Figure 2-2: Advanced managed bandwidth services
Remote
CPE
T1/E1
ISDN
3600
MainStreet
system
ISDN as an access facility
to extended leased-line or frame relay
services to customers who:
are not directly accessible
only require part-time connectivity
Multiservice backbone
network
3600
MainStreet
system
ISDN
T1/E1
T1/E1
ISDN within the backbone network:
for backup and disaster recovery solutions
to access nodes only reachable through
another provider's network
3600 MainStreet
system
34
7917
2. Applications
Figure 2-3: Extended corporate networks

Remote
CPE
T1/E1
ISDN
Multiservice backbone
network
3600
MainStreet
system
ISDN
ISDN as an access facility
to multiservices backbone network:
branch office, telecommuter connectivity
remote learning, telemedicine
T1/E1
ISDN as an adjunct to leased lines within
the multiservices backbone network:
rapid deployment of interim
and overflow services
leased versus switched tariff optimization
3600 MainStreet
flexible leased-line backup and
system
disaster recovery solutions
3600
MainStreet
system
T1/E1
7914
The 3600 MainStreet system supports a variety of ISDN applications on the CPC,
IMC, BRI S/T card, Dual T1-2 card, Dual E1 card, Dual E1-2 card, and 2B1Q
channel unit. These applications fall under four categories:
ISDN leased-line backup
ISDN leased-line backup

ISDN channel search
ISDN protocol tracing and status message monitoring
ISDN transport
ISDN leased-line backup is supported on the CPC and can be used to back up two,
twenty-three, or thirty 64 kb/s B channels, depending on whether the interface is
basic rate, T1 primary rate, or E1 primary rate.
The ISDN backup application provides RAPID protection of leased lines using
ISDN. For situations in which out-of-band signaling is not needed and the call
setup for the backup connection can have a delay of 1 or 2 seconds, ISDN
B-channel backup is more cost-effective than standard RAPID.
In backup applications, a protected channel normally transported by a leased line
uses a BRI or PRI interface as its alternative path. RAPID uses a one-to-one
mapping of channels from preferred to alternative paths.
When a failure is detected at one endpoint node, the node immediately switches the
leased-line circuits to a BRI or PRI with the appropriate preprogrammed dialing
information. A variable delay setting can be programmed to prevent simultaneous
dialing by both endpoints, which may result in a glare situation.
35
Product overview
When it answers an incoming ISDN call, the node disconnects the specified
channel from its preferred path and connects it to the B channel specified by the
network. One end node can be programmed for answer-only mode.
Figure 2-4 shows a channel connected from 3600 MainStreet node #1 to
3600 MainStreet node #2 through intermediate nodes A and B on a leased line. If a
failure is detected by 3600 MainStreet node #1, it initiates an ISDN call through the
PSTN to 3600 MainStreet node #2. Each 3600 MainStreet system then connects the
backed-up channel to the ISDN B channel.
Figure 2-4: ISDN backup application
Preferred connection
Node
A
Node
B
ISDN
backup
3600 MainStreet
system (node #1)
ISDN
backup
PSTN
3600 MainStreet
system (node #2)
10835
On all 3600 MainStreet systems, ISDN is used to set up 56 kb/s or 64 kb/s clear
channel bandwidth between two points. CPE signaling, if required, is transported
in-band (for example, in-band voice signaling using HCV).
Super-rate connections can also be backed up with ISDN. Some ISDNs support
n 64 kb/s connections or specific speeds, such as 384 kb/s (H0); for networks that
do not, the 3600 MainStreet systems provide inverse multiplexing capability.
Figure 2-5 shows the connections required for the ISDN leased-line backup
application. The D channel in each interface used for ISDN signaling must be
connected to an HDLC circuit on the CPC through the switching matrix. Up to 31
D channels can be connected to each CPC. The B channels are not connected until
the need for backup occurs, or a preferred connection is programmed.
36
2. Applications
Figure 2-5: ISDN backup connections

CPC
BRI
BRI-1
BRI-2
BRI-3
BRI-8
D channel
2B
D channel
2B
D channel
HDLC
2B
D channel
2B
B channels are unconnected

except when a call is in progress
Connected through
switching matrix
7916
ISDN backup is ideal for providing sporadic backup for leased lines because it is
tariffed on a usage-only basis. ISDN backup can be used in situations where there
is not enough leased-line bandwidth available. You can set up a link for a few hours
in an overflow situation, or for several weeks until more leased lines can be
installed.
ISDN channel search
ISDN channel search allows multiple circuits within an ISDN interface to have the
same directory number. The channel search facility is ideal for applications in
which many short-duration calls are made to the same number (for example, credit
card authorization and 1-800 services).
Circuits with the same directory number are part of the same hunt group. When a
call is received, the node searches the group that contains the specified number and
connects the incoming B channel to the first available circuit.
As with ISDN backup, the D channel for each BRI interface must be connected to
an HDLC circuit on the CPC. However, each circuit connection does not have to
contain a unique directory number.
ISDN protocol tracing and

status message
monitoring
The ISDN protocol tracing feature allows you to record and view Layer 2 and
Layer 3 protocol messages for any circuit on the CPC. When ISDN protocol tracing
is activated for a particular circuit, each Layer 2 and Layer 3 message transmitted by
the CPC physical layer over that circuit is recorded. The messages are stored in the
trace buffer.
Layer 2 and Layer 3 messages currently stored in the trace buffer can be viewed
using short or detailed formats. Layer 2 trace status information of the circuit or
group of circuits specified can also be viewed.
ISDN transport
There are two ISDN transport applications: ISDN leased lines and ISDN loop
extension. Both the leased-line and loop extension applications are supported on
the BRI S/T card. Loop extension is supported on the 2B1Q channel unit.
37
Product overview
ISDN leased lines
This application allows CPE to be connected to the 3600 MainStreet system

through a BRI or PRI. The B channels and D channels are treated as regular 16 kb/s,
64 kb/s, or n 64 kb/s connections. On the network side, the 3600 MainStreet
system can use the BRI S/T card for leased-line connectivity in countries such as
Germany and Japan where the SoFV and I interface, respectively, are so prevalent.
Figure 2-6 shows a typical 2B+D leased-line application. In this example, the
3600 MainStreet node is used in a private network to access a 2B+D leased-line
network. The 2B+D leased line is carrying six 8 kb/s compressed voice calls, three
D channels with the signaling for the voice calls, three 9.6 kb/s X.21 data calls, and
a 4 kb/s CPSS channel. (The X.21 data calls are connected to an X.21 DCC in the
3600 MainStreet node.) The 3600 MainStreet node passes the D channels
transparently to the network.
Figure 2-6: Leased-line application
ISDN
PBX
D3
9.6 kb/s
X.21
D
D2
Voice 6
B2
Voice 3
Voice 4
Voice 5
B1
4 kb/s
CPSS
and 2 x
9.6 kb/s
X.21
Voice 1
D1
Voice 2
Front end
processor or
mainframe
9.6 kb/s
2B+D
BRI
S/T
BRI
S/T
2B+D
2B+D
leased
line network
3600
MainStreet system
6739
ISDN loop extension
When cost or distance factors make it impractical to access an ISDN network, a

non-ISDN digital facility can be used to extend the ISDN loop. Figures 2-7 and 2-8
show an ISDN loop extension.
In Figure 2-7, at either end of the loop extension, a BRI S/T card provides the 2B+D
interface. At the customer premises, the BRI S/T card operates in NT mode. At the
network end, it operates in TE mode.
38
2. Applications
Figure 2-7: ISDN loop extension with the BRI S/T card
3600 MainStreet
system
Non-ISDN
digital
facility
ISDN
device
TE
2B+D
format
3600 MainStreet
system
BRI
S/T
BRI
S/T
E1
E1
(NT)
2B+D
format
ISDN
network
NT1
(TE)
1st DS0
2nd DS0
3rd DS0
B1
B2
11001 D 1
3DS0 format
6741
The loop extension scheme on the BRI S/T card uses three DS0 channels on a DS1
interface to transport the basic rate traffic between the two 3600 MainStreet nodes.
One DS0 is used for each B channel and the third DS0 carries a D channel
containing signaling. In Figure 2-7, an ISDN device gains access to a remote ISDN
network using 3DS0 transport over an E1 link. If the application needs delay
equalization, the B1, B2, and D channels can be configured as a super-rate group;
otherwise, each channel can be connected individually.
In Figure 2-8, at either end of the loop extension, a LULT and LUNT provide the
termination for the U-interface. The LULT and LUNT are very similar to an LT
and NT (respectively), but have slight differences that make them suitable for loop
extensions. In 3600 MainStreet systems, the 2B1Q channel unit acts as a LULT or
LUNT.
Figure 2-8: ISDN loop extension with the 2B1Q channel unit
Alcatel 5620 Network Manager
ISDN CO
SS7
network
LT
LT
LT
3600 MainStreet
local system
LUNT
LUNT
LUNT
T1
T1
LT
LUNT
3600 MainStreet
remote system
3DS0
format
T1
LULT
LULT
LULT
Managed
private line T1
network
facilities
(4-5 interoffice
T1 links)
LULT
Basic rate
2B1Q CU
"U" reference
soft-configured
point as defined by for LUNT mode
ANSI T1.604 - 1992
Local
loop
CPE
NT1
2B1Q CU
soft-configured
for LULT mode
7932
39
Product overview
One loop extension scheme, defined by Bellcore in TR-TSY-000397, uses three DS0
channels on a DS1 (or higher) interface to transport the basic rate traffic between
the LULT and LUNT. In the 3DS0 format, one DS0 is used for each B channel and
the third DS0 carries a D+ channel containing signaling.
Figure 2-9 shows a typical 3DS0 loop extension application. In this example, the
U-interface-compatible device gains access to a remote ISDN network using 3DS0
transport over a T1 link. The B1, B2, and D+ channels are treated as parts of one
192 kb/s super-rate circuit connected to the T1 card.
Figure 2-9: 3DS0 ISDN loop extension with the 2B1Q channel unit
3600 MainStreet
system
NT
U
2B1Q
interface CU
T1
3600 MainStreet
system
Digital
facility
U
2B1Q
CU interface LT
LUNT
T1
LULT
ISDN
U-interface
computer
ISDN
network
DS0n
B1
DS0n+1
DS0n+2
B2
D+
192 kb/s data over 3 DS0s

6585
Another transmission scheme, specified in ITU-T Q.512, carries the data stream for
two U-interfaces on five DS0 channels of a digital facility. Four DS0s correspond to
the B channels from both interfaces. Two 32 kb/s D+CV channels, which consist of
D-channel bits and overhead bits, are multiplexed onto a fifth DS0.
Figure 2-10 shows a typical 5DS0 loop extension application. In this example, two
U-interface-compatible devices use 5DS0 transport over a T1 link to access a
remote ISDN network. An SRM multiplexes two D+CV channels into one DS0.
The B1 and B2 channels are connected to the T1 link directly as parts of one
128 kb/s super-rate circuit.
40
2. Applications
Figure 2-10: 5DS0 loop extension application

ISDN
U-interface
telephone
2B1Q
CU
B11 B21
B11 B21 2B1Q

CU
U
interface LULT
LUNT
D1 CV1
SRM
NT
T1
Digital
facility
D1 CV1
T1
ISDN
network
SRM
D2 CV2
D2 CV2
U
interface 2B1Q
CU
LULT
U
LT
interface
2B1Q
CU
U
LT
B12 B22 LUNT interface
B1
B2 B22
ISDN
U-interface
computer
DS0n
B11
DS0n+1
DS0n+2
DS0n+3
DS0n+4
B21
B12
B22
D1CV1 D2CV2
320 kb/s over 5 DS0s

6584
Subrate data
applications
T1 and E1 specifications define framing structures based on the 64 kb/s channels

required for digitizing one voice call. Data devices often operate at rates well below
64 kb/s, rates that T1 and E1 framing were not specifically designed to support.
Consequently, data formats have been developed that rate-adapt subrate data onto
64 kb/s channels.
The 3600 MainStreet system supports both standard and proprietary subrate data
formats:
DDS and all DDS-compatibles DS0-A, DS0-B, MJU, and Switched 56 Special
Access
ITU-T X.50 Division 2 and Division 3 framing, X.54 channel allocation, and
X.51 bis transmission format
HCM a proprietary technique that provides a multiplexing resolution of
800 b/s while respecting channelized T1 and E1 boundaries
ITU-T I.460 transparent n 8 kb/s subrate channels
41
Product overview
The 3600 MainStreet system performs the following subrate data applications on
each of these data formats (where applicable):
rate adaption
Rate adaption applies a particular data format to a subrate circuit for
transmission on a 64 kb/s T1 or E1 channel.
MDDBs and MJUs
MDDBs and MJUs allow several subrate circuits to use the same transmission
bandwidth on the assumption that only one circuit will use the shared
bandwidth at any one time (typical of mainframe computer-to-multiterminal
communication networks).
SRM
SRMs combine several discrete subrate circuits onto the same 64 kb/s T1 or E1
channel.
SRS
SRSs allow network operators to switch (groom) subrate circuits on aggregate
DS0 channels.
Other subrate data services include:
control lead propagation through the network

end-to-end continuity checking and error correction
independent (pass-through) clocking
network- and operator-requested loopbacks
multiplexing low bit-rate voice and data in the same DS0
Most subrate data applications use independently programmed DSP resources

(see Table 2-1) to emulate SRMs for DDS, X.50, HCM, and I.460 (transparent)
service.
Dataphone Digital Service
42
DDS is an all-digital data transmission service. It provides full-duplex

point-to-point and multipoint data transmission for subrate data circuits. The
3600 MainStreet system supports DDS access over OCU-DP channel units, 2B1Q
line cards, or 2B1Q channel unit-attached DTUs, and X.21, V.35, and V.24/RS-232
DCCs.
2. Applications
The 3600 MainStreet system supports DS0-A, DS0-B, and MJU devices for both
DDS and DDS-compatible services and provides the following userprogrammable DDS resources:
traditional DDS Access on the OCU-DP channel unit, using OCU-DP channel
units (providing 4-wire CSU interfaces) programmable for standard or
Switched 56 service
DDS Access, a DSP application for standards-compliant DDS DS0-A, DS0-B,
and MJU functions (including 19.2 kb/s DS0-B and MJU, BCH error
correction for 19.2 kb/s DS0-A connections and DS0-A formatted MJU
connections, and MJU antistreaming) used at the edges of large networks and
throughout networks with small DDS requirements
DDS Core, an optimized version of the DDS Access for high-volume DS0-B
and MJU functions; intended for bulk DDS processing on the backbone
network
subrate switching, a DSP4 card application for DS0-B channel time and space
switching, and DS0-A channel drop and insertion
There are two possible configurations for DDS access on the 3600 MainStreet
system:
traditional access
CSSNA and local (T1) access
Figure 2-11 shows both DDS access configurations.
43
Product overview
Figure 2-11: 3600 MainStreet DDS Access configurations

Central office
Customer premises
MJU
SRM
OCU-DP
DTE
Traditional
access
DSU/
CSU
4-wire
conditioned
loop
Carrier card
T1
card
DS0-A
DDS
network
DS0-B
SRM
Central office
MJU
SRM
Customer premises
DTE
DTE
Local and
CSSNA
access
2700
MainStreet
series DTU
2-wire
twisted pair
loop (26 AWG)
5.5 km (3.4 mi)
2BIQ
line
card
DS0-B
SRM
T1
card
DDS
network
DS0-A
SRM
12542
In traditional DDS implementations, a DTE on the customer premises connects to

a DSU or CSU. The CSU provides the line drivers necessary for transmission over
the local loop. At the CO, the local loop terminates on an OCU, such as the
3600 MainStreet OCU-DP channel unit.
In CSSNA implementations, 2751 MainStreet, 2752 MainStreet, or
2753 MainStreet DTUs are located on the customer premises, and 2B1Q line cards
or 2B1Q channel units are installed in the 3600 MainStreet system located at the
CO. SRMs are used to provide the desired DDS rate adaption, subrate
multiplexing, and multipoint (MJU) configurations.
Figure 2-12 shows DDS subrate DS0 frame structures.
44
2. Applications
Figure 2-12: DDS DS0-A and DS0-B frame formats

Framing bit
User data for
56 and 64 kb/s
operation
MSB
8-bit DS0
LSB
Primary channel
- user data
- inband
maintenance
codes
Frame
1
2
3
4
5
2.4 kb/s
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20
4.8 kb/s
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
9
10
Standard CSU-to-CSU
communication channel
DDS secondary channel, plus:
- end-to-end control lead propagation
- continuity checking
Switched 56 signaling channel
User data for 64 kb/s operation
9.6 kb/s
1
2
3
4
5
5 frames,
20 channels
5 frames,
10 channels
DS0-A:
user data repeated
in all 20 cells
majority vote 12/20
DS0-B:
each cell
(numbers 1 to 20)
represents a separate
2.4 kb/s channel
DS0-A:
DS0-A:
user data repeated user data repeated
in all 10 cells
in all 5 cells
majority vote 6/10
majority vote 3/5
DS0-B:
DS0-B:
each cell
each cell
(numbers 1 to 10)
(numbers 1 to 5)
represents a
represents a
separate 4.8 kb/s
separate 9.6 kb/s
channel
channel
5 frames,
5 channels
19.2 kb/s
1
2
3
4
5
5 frames,
1 channel
56 or 64 kb/s
1
1 frame,
1 channel
DS0-A:
DS0-A:
56 kb/s operation:
BCH (17,9) OFF
user data occupies
user data divided
framing bit plus
between cells
primary channel
2 and 3
bits (7 bits total)
pad characters
64 kb/s operation:
elsewhere
(using the OCU-DP
DS0-A_EC
channel unit) user
user data divided
data occupies
between cells
framing bit, primary
1 and 2
channel bits, and
BCH code in cells
secondary channel
3 and 4
bit (8 bits total)
framing in cell 5
DS0-B:
BCH (17, 9) code in
second DS0
each cell
(numbers 1 to 5)
represents a separate
9.6 kb/s channel
19.2 fits onto 2 and 3
and/or 4 and 5
5964
Traditional DDS access with OCU-DP channel unit
The OCU-DP channel unit rate adapts the local loops signal to form a DS0-A
channel. The DS0-A channel is suitable for multiplexing onto a single 64 kb/s
timeslot on a DS1 (T1) network link, or cross-connection to:
a DS0-B device, which produces an aggregate DS0-B signal composed of up to

20 DS0-A channels
an MJU device, which produces a composite DS0-A signal (that is, a DDSbased multidrop data bridge)
DS0-B and MJU functions are performed by the 3600 MainStreet system using
SRMs.
45
Product overview
The OCU-DP channel unit can be installed in any of the Common Carrier cards
four channel unit positions to provide single-circuit modularity. Built-in DS0-A
functionality includes:
majority vote error correction for 2.4, 4.8, and 9.6 kb/s DS0-A signals and BCH
(17, 9) forward error correction code support for 19.2, 56 and 64 kb/s DS0-A
signals
upstream and downstream control code support (see Figure 2-13)
network- and operator-generated latching and alternating loopbacks (see
Figure 2-14)
DS0-A rate adaption for the attached DSU/CSUs primary and secondary
channels (see Figure 2-15)
Figure 2-13: DDS control codes supported by the OCU-DP channel unit
OCU-DP
CU
DSU/
CSU
Upstream
control codes
IDLE
Zero code suppression
Out of service
Out of frame
Loopback (customer control)
T1
Downstream
control codes
Control Mode Idle (CMI)
CSU loopback (CSU)
DSU loopback (DSU)
OCU loopback (OCU)
Abnormal Station Code (ASC)
Mux out-of-sync (MOS)
Unassigned Mux Channel (UMC)
Test
Test Alert (TA)
MJU Alert (MA)
Loopback Enable (LBE)
Far End Voice (FEV)
Transition In Progress (TIP)
Block code (BLK)
Release code (Rls)
10837
The OCU-DP channel unit can also be configured to interface to Switched 56 kb/s
services offered by interexchange carriers. In this mode, on- or off-hook status and
dialing information from the CSU are translated into standard D4, T1 RBS E&M
codes.
Access is supported on the customer loop by installing OCU-DP channel units at
the CO, or by installing a 3600 MainStreet system and OCU-DP channel units at
the customer premises and accessing the Switched 56 network over T1 and an
SW56 CSU.
The Common Carrier card provides network bandwidth support for all
configurations, including four OCU-DP channel units configured for 56 kb/s
primary channels with error correction.
46
2. Applications
Figure 2-14: DDS loopbacks

Upstream device (1)

DTE
DSU/
CSU
DDS Access MJU, DS0-B

DDS Core MJU, DS0-B
SRS
DDS network via T1/FT1
OCU-DP
CU
4-wire
Alternating Alternating
DSU
and latching
loopback
CSU
loopbacks
Alternating
and latching
OCU
loopbacks
Loopback
C
(switching shelf)
Upstream device (1)
DTE
2B1Q
interface
DTU (2)
2-wire
DTE
Alternating Alternating
DSU
and latching
loopback
CSU
loopbacks
DDS
Access
SRM (3)
Alternating
and latching
OCU
loopbacks

DDS Core MJU, DS0-B
SRS
Loopback
C
(switching shelf)

Upstream device (1)
DTE
DCC (4)
DDS
Access
SRM (3)
DTE
Alternating
DSU
loopback
CSU OCU
Alternating
and latching
loopbacks

DDS Core MJU, DS0-B
SRS
Loopback
C
(switching shelf)
Notes
1. Upstream DDS Access and Core SRMs pass network generated loopback commands to the downstream terminating DDS device.
Upstream DDS Access and Core MJU SRMs also pass loopback commands, provided the appropriate MJU Branch Select is invoked.
2. DDS loopbacks are applied on an individual DTU port basis. DSU and CSU loopbacks occur in the DTU's rate adaption gate array
near the DTE interface (DSU) and the 2B1Q interface (CSU).
3. For DTU and DCC tributary or branch circuits, all DDS Access SRM functions can be used as the terminating DDS device (for example,
DDS Access DS0-B and MJU SRMs include DS0-A rate adaption functionality). Terminating DDS Access DS0-A and MJU SRMs
support latching and alternating OCU, CSU and DSU loopbacks (terminating DDS Access DS0-B SRMs support alternating loopbacks).
DDS Access MJU SRMs also support Branch Select, Branch Block, MJU loopback and Global Release.
4. DDS loopbacks are applied on an individual DCC port basis. DSU and CSU loopbacks occur in the DCC's rate adaption gate array
near the DTE interface (DSU) and the backplane interface (CSU).
10838
47
Product overview
Figure 2-15: Valid tributary and branch channel sources and resources
DDS resources and applications
OCU-DP
DS0-A
DDS Access
DS0-A MJU
SRM SRM
SRS (1)
DDS Core
DS0-B SRM
(maximum # of tributaries)
2.4 kb/s 4.8 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 19.2 kb/s
MJU
SRM
DS0-B
(maximum # of tributaries)
DDS
port
2.4 kb/s 4.8 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 19.2 kb/s
CSU
Eligible tributary/branch channel sources
kb/s
2.4
4.8
9.6
19.2
56
DTU/DCC (2)
1.2/2.4 (3)
4.8
kb/s
9.6
19.2
56
20
10
10
5
5
5
2
1
3
3
3
2
1
2.4
4.8
9.6
19.2
56
20
10
10
5
5
5
2
1
3
3
3
2
1
2.4
4.8
9.6
19.2
DS0-A (4)
kb/s
20
10
10
5
5
5
2
1
3
3
3
2
1
DS0-B (5)
kb/s
Secondary
channel
(6)
1
1
1
1
1
1
supported
trans- trans- trans- transparent parent parent parent
1
trans- trans- trans- trans- transparent parent parent parent parent
Notes
1. A " " in this column indicates that the tributary/branch channel source can be cross-connected to a
DDS-configured subrate switching application port.
2. Data ports include 2700 MainStreet series DTUs, V.24/RS-232 DCC and V.35 DCC.
3. DTU and DCC ports rate adapt 1.2 kb/s to 2.4 kb/s prior to DDS Access DS0-A rate adaption.
4. DS0-A sources include OCU-DP (all speeds), DDS Access DS0-A SRMs (all speeds), DDS
Access/Core MJU SRMs (2.4, 4.8, 9.6 and 56 kb/s), and T1, E1 and PRI timeslots (all speeds).
OCU-DP 56 kb/s and DS0-A signals connected to an SRM should have error correction disabled.
5. DS0-B sources include DDS Access DS0-B SRMs, DDS Core DS0-B SRMs and T1, E1 and PRI timeslots.
6. Secondary channel data from CSU supported by OCU-DP and passed transparently by other devices indicated.
7931
DDS Access
The DDS Access application uses SRMs to provide a standards-compliant suite of

DS0-A, DS0-B, and MJU functionality. DDS Access is intended for access
applications. For example, it would be used at a 3600 MainStreet system configured
to groom several data streams from attached 2700 MainStreet series DTUs for
transmission through a DDS network. DDS Access is also used when the volume of
DS0-B or MJU traffic (or both) is less than the processing capacity of one DSP card
(DDS Core is best suited for higher-volume DDS traffic).
48
2. Applications
DDS Access runs on the entire DPM2 or on a pair of DSP resources resident on a
DSP2 or DSP3 card (see Figure 2-23 and Table 2-3). The propagation delay
through an SRM running DDS Access is only 1.5 ms, independent of data rate.
DDS Access DS0-A functionality includes:
majority vote error correction on all incoming 2.4, 4.8, and 9.6 kb/s DS0-A
signals
BCH error correction on incoming 19.2 kb/s DS0-A formatted connections
latching loopbacks as described in Bellcore TA-TSY-000077 and alternating
loopbacks (see Figure 2-14)
support for all DDS maintenance codes
transmission of CMI when attached HCM/transparent device is idle (RTS low)
optional continuity checking using the secondary channel
optional end-to-end RTS to DCD control lead propagation for DTU and DCC
data interfaces; DCC and DTU interfaces also allow control leads to be forced
high or low
DDS Access DS0-B functionality includes all the DS0-A features noted above, as
well as:
19.2 kb/s DS0-B

Bellcore TA-TSY-000189 compliance (DS0-B framing algorithm and reframe
performance)
transparent upstream and downstream control code transmission (except
when configured as the terminating DDS device, in which case, alternating
loopbacks are supported)
UMC and DS0 OOS support
DDS Access MJU functionality includes all of the DS0-A features noted above as
well as:
antistreaming
19.2 kb/s MJU
Bellcore TA-TSY-000192 Issue 2 MJU compliance for primary channel
hub ID report as Bellcore TR-TSY-000476
latching HL96 and DS0-DP loopbacks processed as an OCU loopback for
directly connected HCM/transparent branch channels (otherwise, control
codes are passed transparently)
maintenance code support for: Branch Select, Branch Block/Unblock, MJU
loopback, MJU antistreaming, and Global Release (unblock all)
49
Product overview
DDS Core
The DDS Core application is an optimized version of DDS Access. DDS Core
supports a four-fold increase in DS0-B and MJU traffic (twelve 9.6 kb/s DS0-B
SRMs for each DSP card versus three for DDS Access) and lower SRM propagation
delays (only 0.625 ms versus 1.5 ms for DDS Access). DDS Core is intended for
high-volume DS0-B and MJU requirements at hub locations. It supports DS0-A
and DS0-B channels originating from OCU-DP channel units, the DDS network,
and DTU/DCC circuits formatted using DDS Access (see Figure 2-15). The DDS
Core application uses an entire DSP2 or DSP3 card (see Table 2-3).
DDS SRM enhancements
The 3600 MainStreet system offers several enhancements to DDS. These

enhancements include:
the use of 2700 MainStreet series DTUs

secondary channel continuity checking
SRS
Secondary channel continuity checking is a proprietary continuity checking
algorithm supported by DDS Access SRMs using the secondary channel
(DDS Core DS0-B SRMs pass secondary channel data transparently). For data
paths that span several nodes, endpoint devices detect faults on intermediate links,
even though a Red Alarm has not been raised on the link to which they are directly
connected.
Continuity checking can also be used to detect faults on individual DS0-B
subchannels (that is, subchannels that are carried partially by links other than the
one carrying the DS0-B aggregate).
The error threshold is 20%. The time to declare continuity gained from startup
varies from 657 ms for 2.4 kb/s channels to 33 ms for 56 kb/s channels. When a fault
occurs, the time to declare loss of continuity varies from 15 ms for 2.4 kb/s channels
to 0.8 ms for 56 kb/s channels.
Figure 2-16 shows a number of paths for which continuity checking (labeled CC in
the figure) can be applied. The first path is between two DDS Access DS0-B SRMs
(labeled DS0-B II in the figure). The remaining paths pass continuity checking
information transparently through these two SRMs, which can be either DDS
Access or DDS Core SRMs as specified in Figure 2-15.
50
2. Applications
Figure 2-16: Secondary channel continuity testing

-1Terminating
SRM
DCC
DS0-B
II
DS0-B
II
Terminating
SRM
DS0-A
-2-
DS0-A
DS0-B
-3-
DS0-B
(a) DTU
(b) DTU
(c)
Slave channels
DTU
DCC
DTU
(a)
DTU
(b)
DTU
(c)
DCC
DCC
DTU
MJU
-4-
DS0-A
Master
channel
DTU
CC
on path
1
2
3
4
DTU
DSP Application:
Terminating SRM
DS0-B II SRM
Any DDS device
DDS Access (CC enabled)

DDS Access (CC disabled) or DDS Core
DDS Access (CC enabled or disabled) or DDS Core
DDS Access (CC disabled) or DDS Core
6075
DDS subrate switching
DDS subrate switching is performed by DSP4 cards running the subrate switching
application. This DSP application provides fully flexible subrate switching for 2.4,
4.8, and 9.6 kb/s DS0-B aggregate channels as well as drop and insertion of 2.4, 4.8,
9.6, and 19.2 kb/s DS0-A channels (see Subrate switching in this chapter for a
complete description of the application).
ITU-T X.50
X.50 is a subrate data multiplexing scheme used in E1 environments. It specifies

techniques for rate adaption and subrate multiplexing of 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, and
48 kb/s synchronous data channels.
The 3600 MainStreet system X.50 implementation complies with:
ITU-T X.50 Division 2 and Division 3 envelope structure

ITU-T X.54 channel allocation
ITU-T X.51 bis transmission format for 48 kb/s channels
Support is also provided for 19.2 kb/s channel speeds (point-to-point), A-bit
operation, control lead propagation, bit-aligned framing, multidrop data bridging
and subrate switching.
Table 2-2 describes the X.50 DSP applications supported on the 3600 MainStreet
system.
51
Product overview
Table 2-2: 3600 MainStreet X.50 DSP applications

Application
X.50 Telco
Basic X.50
Division 2
Division 3
Division 3
Framing pattern
80 frame pattern: five phases of

16 frames each

four frames each

four frames each
Subrate channels
supported
for each phase: (1)
1 x 9.6 kb/s
1 x 9.6 kb/s
2 x 4.8 kb/s
2 x 4.8 kb/s
2 x 4.8 kb/s
4 x 2.4 kb/s
4 x 2.4 kb/s
4 x 2.4 kb/s
8 x 1.2 kb/s
4 x 1.2 kb/s
4 x 1.2 kb/s
two phases:
1 x 19.2 kb/s
for each phase: (2)
1 x 9.6 kb/s
16 x 0.6 kb/s
for each phase: (2)
two phases:
1 x 19.2 kb/s
all five phases:
all five phases:
two phases:
1 x 19.2 kb/s
1 x 48 kb/s
all five phases:

1 x 48 kb/s
1 x 48 kb/s
SRM inputs (3)
12
A-bit support
(4)
(4)
Control lead
propagation
Bit-aligned framing
MDDB (5)
SRS
Notes
1. 1.2 and 0.6 kb/s channels occupy exactly 1.2 and 0.6 kb/s of bandwidth, respectively.
2. Each 1.2 kb/s channel connected to an X.50 or X.50 Telco Division 3 SRM is rate-adapted by the X.50 application into 2.4 kb/s
worth of bandwidth for transport across the network (each 1.2 kb/s channel is made up of 3 data bits repeated as aabbcc to occupy
6 bits of bandwidth).
3. One input for each X.50 SRM can be an X.50 DS0 aggregate.
4. When the X.50 Telco SRM loses sync with the incoming signal, it sets the A-bit in the transmit direction. The 3600 MainStreet
system does not raise an alarm.
5. Only MDDBs with channel speeds below 19.2 kb/s are supported.
Both the X.50 and X.50 Telco applications use all DSP resources on DPM2s or all
pairs of DSP resources on DSP2 or DSP3 cards. Propagation delay through an X.50
or X.50 Telco SRM is 1.5 ms independent of data rate.
The 3600 MainStreet system can access X.50 network services over E1 and 64 kb/s
codirectional (G.703) links. DTE access is provided by applying the X.50 or
X.50 Telco DSP application to the HCM/transparent output of DTUs and DCCs
(see Figure 2-17).
52
2. Applications
Using 2700 MainStreet series DTUs and 2B1Q line cards or 2B1Q channel units,
PTTs can provide flexible network access services over existing 2-wire facilities. The
Alcatel Craft Interface Node Manager and the Alcatel 5620 Network Manager can
be used to direct loopbacks on individual X.50 SRM tributaries and other points in
the network.
Figure 2-17: X.50 access and loopback
2700 MainStreet
series DTU
DTE
2B+D
B channel
2B1Q
2-wire
twisted
pair
loop
DTE
DTE
DCC
B channel
X.50/
X.50 Telco
SRM
Upstream
devices
X.50
network
E1 timeslot
64 kb/s Codirectional
Loopback Loopback SRS
X.50/X.50 Telco SRMs
(individual
tributaries)
Loopback Loopback
Loopback Loopback
10839
The X.50 aggregate DS0 is divided into five phases as shown in Figure 2-18.
Depending on the type of X.50 application applied, each phase can be individually
configured to accommodate the subrate channels listed in Table 2-2.
Figure 2-18: X.50 framing structure
MSB
X.50 framing
and A-bit
(one for each
superframe)
8-bit DS0
LSB
User data
End-to-end control
lead propagation
(X.50 Telco only)
Data channels for each phase
E1 frame
X.50 Telco
1
2
3
4
5
Phase 1
Phase 2
Phase 3
Phase 4
Phase 5
X.50
DIV 3
DIV 2
DIV 3
1 x 9.6 kb/s
1 x 9.6 kb/s
1 x 9.6 kb/s
2 x 4.8 kb/s
2 x 4.8 kb/s
2 x 4.8 kb/s
4 x 2.4 kb/s
4 x 2.4 kb/s
4 x 2.4 kb/s
4 x 1.2 kb/s
8 x 1.2 kb/s
4 x 1.2 kb/s
16 x 0.6 kb/s
Two phases can accommodate 1 x 19.2 kb/s
All five phases can accommodate 1 x 48 kb/s
7563
53
Product overview
X.50 SRM enhancements
The 3600 MainStreet system offers several enhancements to X.50. These

enhancements include:
control lead propagation

bit-aligned framing
multidrop data bridging
SRS
The X.50 Telco Division 3 application provides C-to-I lead propagation for X.21
data interfaces and RTS, and DCD lead propagation for TIA/EIA-232 and V.35
data interfaces when data interface control leads are configured for end-to-end
operation.
The X.50 Telco application supports bit-aligned framing. This means that an X.50
data stream need not be received from the network in the byte-aligned order in
which it was transmitted. The X.50 Telco application can extract framing from a
data stream that has been skewed (shifted) during transmission.
Multidrop data bridging allows several data devices to communicate with a host
processor using the same bandwidth within an X.50 aggregate (see Multidrop data
bridging for a complete description of the application).
X.50 subrate switching
For X.50 and X.50 Telco Division 3, subrate switching is performed by the
DSP4 card SRS application. It provides flexible subrate switching of 2.4, 4.8, 9.6,
and 19.2 kb/s aggregate channels, and drop and insertion of X.50 data channels
(see Subrate switching for a complete description of the SRS application).
As shown in Figure 2-19, for X.50 Telco Division 2, back-to-back SRMs can be
configured to provide switching of subrate channels. For clarity, the X.50
five-phase framing structure is shown beside each of the four aggregate channels,
and each subrate channel has been assigned a number (which does not relate to
subframe position). For example, the 1.2 kb/s channel (4) is subrate-switched
between the X.50 aggregate shown in the upper left and the X.50 aggregate frame
shown in the lower left.
54
2. Applications
Figure 2-19: X.50 Telco Division 2 back-to-back SRMs

X.50 aggregate DS0
X.50 aggregate DS0
9.6 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
1.2 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
11 12
1.2 kb/s
6
11 14
1
2
3
SRM
SRM
11
6
14
12
14
SRM
SRM
SRM
5
7
8
9
SRM
10
13
15
X.50 aggregate DS0
X.50 aggregate DS0
5
6
13
7
4
8
14 15
10
4.8 kb/s
2.4 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
4.8 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
1.2 kb/s
2.4 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
10
5
12 15
13
1.2 kb/s
7585
High capacity multiplexing

98% bandwidth
efficiency
HCM is a proprietary rate adaption and subrate multiplexing scheme that provides
a bandwidth granularity of 800 b/s throughout the network. This scheme
dramatically improves the efficiency of todays networks, which are based on
56 and 64 kb/s channel connections. Using HCM, more than 98% bandwidth
utilization can be achieved on aggregate links, while still respecting standard carrier
DS0 channel boundaries.
HCM applications and the resources that provide them include:
rate adaption, using a customized rate adaption gate array located on all DCCs
and DTUs
multidrop data bridging, using SRMs (located on various cards and modules,
as noted in Table 2-3)
subrate multiplexing, using SRMs (located on various cards and modules, as
noted in Table 2-3)
subrate switching, using the subrate switching application on DSP4 cards
55
Product overview
Table 2-3: Location and quantity of SRMs

Card or module
DCC (1)
DPM1 (2)
DPM2 (2)
DSP (3)
DSP2 or
DSP3 (3)
Number of DSP resources (4)
2 or 6
2 or 6
Tributary channels (m)
Aggregate channels (n)
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
10
10
DDS Access (5)
DDS Core
(6) (7)
X.50 (5) (8)
X.50 Telco (5)
HCM/transparent
(7) (9)
Notes
1. Includes RS-232/V.24 DCC, V.35 DCC, and X.21 DCC. SRM tributary channels service on-card ports.
2. 2B1Q line cards provide 23 and 48 backplane DS0s for single and double bandwidth UCSs, respectively. On-card connections do
not use a backplane DS0 channel (for example, connections between 2B1Q ports and the card's DPM, or connections between
SRMs located on the same DPM; this is also true for DSP cards).
3. DSP, DSP2, and DSP3 cards provide 26 and 48 backplane DS0s for single and double bandwidth UCSs, respectively. On-card
connections do not use a backplane DS0 channel.
4. Only one composite input can be connected to an SRM. Cascaded SRMs are considered as a single SRM. Connecting a second
composite input disconnects the first.
5. This application uses a pair of DSP resources (m and n for each DSP resource pair).
6. DDS Core is a single DSP resource application, but the entire DSP2 or DSP3 card must be configured. A DSP2 or DSP3 card
provides support for up to 12 DS0-B or MJU SRMs and 60 tributary channels. The system backplane supports 26 and 48 DS0s for
single and double bandwidth UCSs respectively (on-card connections do not use a backplane DS0 channel).
7. This application uses a single DSP resource (m and n for each single DSP resource).
8. This category also applies to the DDS application.
9. DSP2 and DSP3 cards support a maximum of 50 aggregate and branch channels.
HCM provides additional functionality, such as:
independent (pass-through) clocking

end-to-end signal propagation for up to eight control leads
subrate multiplexing of HCM data with 8 and 16 kb/s HCV channels
HCM can be used with aggregate timeslots that provide transport bandwidths of
64, 56, 48, ..., 8 kb/s. HCM divides this n 8 kb/s frame into 800 b/s bandwidth
elements (for example, a 64 kb/s HCM frame consists of eighty 800 b/s elements,
and a 56 kb/s HCM frame consists of seventy 800 b/s elements).
56
2. Applications
The Alcatel 5620 NM and the Alcatel Craft Interface Node Manager display an
HCM frame as a 10 row by 1 to 8 column matrix, as shown in Figure 2-20. The rows
are named Frame 0 to Frame 9 (F0-F9), and the columns are named Bit 7 to Bit 0
(B7-B0). An element is identified by its row and column, for example, F2-B2.
When an HCM channel is connected to a DS0 on an aggregate link, one row is sent
every aggregate frame. Because the HCM frame pattern is independent of the
aggregate framing pattern, the start of the HCM frame is flagged by a framing bit,
indicated by an F (found in position F0-B7 in Figure 2-20). Each tributary circuit
has an optional signaling bit (indicated by an S). This bit is required for each
subrate data channel using control lead propagation or independent clocking (or
both).
Bandwidth allocated to a circuit within an HCM frame is represented by HCM
elements containing a D (for Data), where each D represents 800 b/s of bandwidth.
Figure 2-20 shows a 9.6 kb/s data channel with end-to-end signaling or
independent clocking, or both (9600 b/s plus 800 b/s).
Figure 2-20: 64 kb/s HCM frame with eighty 800 b/s elements
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
B7
F
D
-
B6
S
D
-
B5
D
D
-
B4
D
D
-
B3
D
D
-
B2
D
D
-
B1
D
-
B0
D
-
10 rows
8 columns (64 kb/s)

5969
Any combination of data rates can be used to fill an HCM frame: synchronous and
asynchronous, and 8 kb/s and 16 kb/s HCV channels. A wide range of synchronous
and asynchronous data rates are supported. Any element in the HCM frame that
does not contain an F, S, or D represents unused bandwidth.
HCM frames can also be reduced by 8-kb/s increments (that is, by 10 HCM
elements) to allow both HCM and transparent (I.460) data to occupy the same
aggregate DS0. This is useful when 8 or 16 kb/s CPSS channels are multiplexed
together with HCM data. Figure 2-21 shows a 9.6 kb/s data channel and a 16 kb/s
CPSS channel multiplexed with it. Transparent data can be positioned before or
after the HCM framing bit position.
The ability to reduce the HCM frame bandwidth in 8-kb/s increments also permits
use of 48 and 56 kb/s transmission services. Transparent (I.460) channels can be
configured before or after the framing (F) bit.
57
Product overview
Figure 2-21: Combined 48 kb/s HCM and 16 kb/s transparent frame
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
B7
F
D
D
-
B6
S
D
D
-
B5
D
D
-
B2
D
D
-
B3
D
D
-
B4
D
D
-
6 columns (48 kb/s)

HCM
B1
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
B0
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
10 rows
16 kb/s
transparent
5970
The HCM S-bit provides end-to-end signal propagation for up to eight control
signals (control leads can also be forced high or low).
Independent (pass-through) clocking
The S-bit can also be configured to provide independent clocking when a particular
data circuits timing cannot be locked to the MainStreet network. This typically
occurs when a data circuit between a host computer and a cluster controller is
transported by two transmission providers, and each providers network uses a
different clock. The HCM S-bit allows synchronous isochronous communications
with only 800 b/s of overhead (see Figure 2-22).
Figure 2-22: 9.6 kb/s synchronous isochronous communications with 800 b/s overhead
9.6 kb/s HCM + 800 b/s S-bit
9.6 kb/s DDS
Transmission
service
provider
A
Transmission
service
provider
B
Network
Network
DSU
Host
3600
MainStreet
system
Port
configured for
independent
clocking
A
gives clock
to both
MainStreet
systems
3600
MainStreet
system
Port
configured for
independent
clocking
DSU
B
gives clock
to each
DSU
Cluster
controller
7641
58
2. Applications
Optional multidrop data bridging
processor using the same HCM bandwidth (see Multidrop data bridging in this
chapter for a complete description of the application).
HCM subrate switching
HCM subrate switching is performed by DSP4 cards running the SRS application.
This DSP application provides fully flexible subrate switching for data channels
within an HCM frame, as well as drop and insertion of individual HCM data
channels.
Transparent (I.460) rate
adaption 100%
bandwidth efficiency
The 3600 MainStreet system provides rate adaption, multidrop data bridging,
subrate multiplexing and subrate switching for synchronous, n 8 kb/s
transparent/I.460 data channels. Transparent aggregate channels support transport
bandwidths of 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56, and 64 kb/s.
Transparent data channels carry data, signaling, and framing information through
the 3600 MainStreet system without adding any system overhead. For example,
8 kb/s and 16 kb/s CPSS circuits can be carried through the network using the
transparent data format.
As with HCM rate adaption, transparent rate adaption is applied by a customized
rate adaption gate array integral to DTUs and DCCs. SRMs are used to perform
subrate multiplexing and multidrop data bridging. Both HCM and transparent
data can be processed by the same SRM and transported in the same aggregate DS0
(see Figure 2-21). An HCM/transparent SRM can accommodate one terminating
CPSS channel at either 4 kb/s (HCM format) or n 8 kb/s (transparent format).
Any number of nonterminating n 8 kb/s CPSS channels can be transported as
normal data.
processor using the same bandwidth (see Multidrop data bridging in this chapter
for a complete description of the application).
Transparent subrate switching is performed by DSP4 cards running the SRS
application. This DSP application provides fully flexible subrate switching for
transparent data channels within transparent or mixed HCM or transparent
frames. Drop and insertion of individual data channels is also supported.
Fully softwareconfigurable SRMs
The 3600 MainStreet system uses versatile DSP technology to provide fully
user-programmable SRM functionality. DSP cards are available with two or six
DSP resources. The DPM has two DSP resources. Some SRM applications use a
single DSP resource to provide several SRMs. Other SRM applications require that
DSP resources be configured in pairs (that is, two DSP resources combine to
provide several SRMs).
59
Product overview
The type of DSP card or module and the SRM application determine the number
of SRMs provided by a given DSP resource or resource pair, and the number of
tributary and branch channels it supports. Figure 2-23 shows a DSP resource or
resource pair configured to provide SRM functionality. Table 2-3 lists the number
of SRMs supported.
Figure 2-23: A DSP resource configured for SRM operation

Voice card or
channel unit
DSP4 card
with
Fax module
DSP3 card
Primary rate
card
Device 2
Network
SRM
Device 1
Device 2
Device 1
HCM frame on SRM
B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
F
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
F
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
F
F0
Device 1
F1
F2
Device 2
F3
F4
F5
Other HCM
connections
F6
F7
F8
F9
Transport position = F0-B5

Transport bandwidth = 48 kb/s
Data position = F1-B0
Data bandwidth = 9.6 kb/s
Transport position = F0-B5

Transport bandwidth = 48 kb/s
Data position = F1-B0
Data bandwidth = 8 kb/s
Reserved for
transparent
9038
Subrate switching
SRS is a resource-efficient application using the DSP4 card, allowing subrate voice
and data circuits to be groomed prior to transmission over the backbone network.
For example, SRS is ideal when the 3600 MainStreet system is configured as a hub
to multiple feeder nodes whose aggregate DS0s are underutilized.
The SRS application performs:
space switching (for example, a specific channel can be switched between two
aggregate DS0s)
time switching (for example, a switched channel can occupy a different
position or phase within each aggregate DS0)
drop or insert of individual channels
60
2. Applications
The SRS application runs on the entire DSP4 card and provides 48 DS0 ports for
each card. The 3600 MainStreet system supports a total of 48 DSP4 cards
performing SRS; the maximum number in a peripheral shelf pair is 12. Concurrent
DDS, X.50 Division 3, HCM, and transparent switching is supported on the same
card, with switching between the same data formats (that is, DDS-to-DDS, X.50
Division 3-to-X.50 Division 3, HCM-to-HCM, and transparent-to-transparent
switching).
The Alcatel 5620 NM is specifically programmed to control the SRS application.
Using its advanced GUI, the Alcatel 5620 NM creates SRLs between SRS
applications, SRMs, and aggregate timeslots throughout the network. The Alcatel
5620 NM uses SRLs to automatically route and reroute (under fault conditions)
end-to-end subrate data paths.
The Alcatel 5620 NM supports noncontiguous HCM bandwidth elements between
HCM SRLs and SRSs. The criteria that determines whether a subrate channel can
be transported by a particular aggregate DS0 is the aggregates total unused
bandwidth, not the amount of contiguous bandwidth. This feature fully exploits
HCMs 800 b/s bandwidth granularity and greatly increases rerouting options
during network faults.
DDS subrate switching
Full switching flexibility is provided for 2.4, 4.8, and 9.6 kb/s DS0-B aggregate
channels, as well as drop and insertion of 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, and 19.2 kb/s DS0-A data
channels. DS0-A channels experience a delay of 2.5 ms. DS0-B channels experience
these typical and worst-case delays:
2.4 kb/s DS0-B: 5 ms and 7.5 ms

4.8 kb/s DS0-B: 3.75 ms and 5 ms
9.6 kb/s DS0-B: 3.125 ms and 3.75 ms
Figure 2-24 shows subrate switching of DS0-A and DS0-B channels from a remote
channel bank (A), a remote 3600 MainStreet system (also running SRS) at (B), a
collection of local terminations including an OCU-DP channel unit (C), two
2700 MainStreet series DTUs (D), and the DDS network (E). Some of the channels
switched include:
one 9.6 kb/s DS0-A channel (1) switched between (A) and (B)
two 4.8 kb/s channels (2) and (3) within a 9.6 kb/s DS0-B at (B) switched to a
4.8 kb/s DS0-B at (E)
one 19.2 kb/s DTU channel (6) switched to 9.6 kb/s DS0-B at (E)
61
Product overview
Figure 2-24: DDS subrate switching capabilities
A
3624 MainStreet
ICB
E
DDS network
1 9.6 kb/s DS0-A
9.6 DS0-B
T1
2 4.8 kb/s
3 4.8 kb/s
4 9.6 kb/s
SRS
(DSP4)
T1
4.8 kb/s
DS0-B
5
9
T1
B SRS T1
3600
MainStreet
system
C
S
DD e link
t
a
r
sub
9.6 kb/s
DS0-B
OCU
DP
2B1Q
D
DTU
Port (a): 6 19.2 kb/s
Port (b): 7 2.4 kb/s
DTU
via
DDS Access
9.6 kb/s
DS0-B
SRM
6
6
4
8
8 9.6 kb/s
9 4.8 kb/s
CSU/DSU
5 4.8 kb/s
7642
X.50/X.50 Telco Division 3 subrate switching
Full switching flexibility (including drop and insert) is provided for 2.4, 4.8, 9.6,
and 19.2 kb/s X.50/X.50 Telco Division 3 data channels (X.50 Telco Division 2 does
not support the SRS application). The typical delay through the application is 5 ms;
the worst-case delay is 7.5 ms.
Figure 2-25 shows subrate switching of X.50 Division 3 formatted channels from a
third-party device (A), a remote 3600 MainStreet system (also running SRS) at (B),
two 2700 MainStreet series DTUs at (C), and the X.50 network (D). Some of the
channels switched include:
one 9.6 kb/s channel (1) switched between (A) and (D)
one 4.8 kb/s channel (4) switched between (B) and (D)
one 2.4 kb/s channel (12) switched between (C) and (D)
62
2. Applications
Figure 2-25: X.50 Division 3 subrate switching capabilities

X.50 aggregate
9.6 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
1
2
A
3rd party
equipment
D
X.50 network

64 kb/s
Codirectional
X.50 aggregate
X.50 aggregate
4.8 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
2.4 kb/s
SRS
(DSP4)
5
6
E1
9 10
9.6 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
4.8 kb/s
E1
1
2
3
6
11
14
X.50 aggregate
B SRS E1
0
X.5 e link
t
a
r
sub
2B1Q
C
3600
MainStreet
system
DTU
Port (a): 11 4.8 kb/s
Port (b): 12 2.4 kb/s
DTU
13 9.6 kb/s
14 4.8 kb/s
2.4 kb/s 7 8 9 10
4
5
4.8 kb/s
2.4 kb/s 12
13
9.6 kb/s
via X.50 or
X.50 Telco
SRM
7643
HCM subrate switching
Full switching flexibility is provided for all HCM data channels, including drop and
insert and use of noncontiguous HCM bandwidth elements. The typical delay
through the application is 3.75 ms; the worst-case delay is 5 ms.
A special CPSS capability enables the SRS application to extract 4 kb/s HCM CPSS
channels from HCM aggregate channels. These channels can be dropped or
inserted directly to or from 4 kb/s CPSS ports on the SCC3 and DCP cards.
Figure 2-26 shows subrate switching of HCM formatted channels between the
3612 MainStreet NBM feeder multiplexers at (A) and (B), and the 3600 MainStreet
nodes at (C) and (D). Some of the channels switched include:
one 19.2 kb/s channel (1) switched between (A) and (C)
one 4.8 kb/s channel (2) switched between (A) and (D)
one 19.2 kb/s channel (3) switched between (B) and (C)
one 9.6 kb/s channel (4) switched between (B) and (D)
one 9.6 kb/s channel (5) switched between (C) and (D) using noncontiguous
bandwidth at (C)
one 9.6 kb/s channel (6) switched between (C) and (D)
two 4 kb/s CPSS channels extracted from (A) and (B)
63
Product overview
Figure 2-26: HCM subrate switching capabilities

56 kb/s HCM frame
48 kb/s HCM frame
F 4 kb/s CPSS
5
6
DCP card / SCC3

4 kb/s CPSS ports
CPSS
3612 (A)
CPSS
3612 (B)
SRS
(DSP4)
I/F
A
I/F
I/F
3612
MainStreet
unit
I/F
Subrate
link
SRS
3600
MainStreet
system
I/F
56 kb/s HCM frame
64 kb/s HCM frame

F
F 4 kb/s CPSS
Subrate
link
1
I/F
4
3612
MainStreet
unit
B
5a
SRS
3600
MainStreet
system
C
6
5b
7644
Transparent subrate switching
Full switching flexibility is provided for transparent data channels including

n 8 kb/s (I.460) data channels, 8 and 16 kb/s HCV channels, and n 8 kb/s CPSS
channels. The delay of transparent data through the DSP card based SRS
application is 2.5 ms.
Multidrop data bridging
64
Multidrop data bridging, which is a subrate data application, allows a master host
processor to communicate with two or more slave devices using the same transport
bandwidth (see Figure 2-27). As with DDS MJUs, multidrop data bridges operate
on digital data. By contrast, PCM bridges operate on modem outputs, which are
the PCM representation of voice band data. All SRMs configured for HCM,
transparent, or X.50/X.50 Telco (Divisions 2 and 3) support multidrop data
bridging.
2. Applications
Figure 2-27: Multidrop data bridging

SRMs map all slave circuit data
into the same phase (X.50) or
element (HCM/transparent)
Polling information
broadcasted to slaves
Master
Tributary
not involved
in MDDB
Slave
SRM
SRM
SRM
Slave responses
(user application must ensure
only one slave transmits at
any one time)
Slave
Slave
Slave
Tributary
not involved
in MDDB
7568
Digital multidrop data bridging
The data for all circuits involved in a multidrop data bridge must use the same rate
adaption technique and must occupy the same elements (HCM or transparent) or
phase positions (X.50, X.50 Telco Divisions 2 and 3).
The master device sends out polling messages and receives data from slave devices
in these elements or phase positions. The host communications protocol must
ensure that only one slave transmits information at any time (for example,
SNA/SDLC).
Large multidrop data bridging applications can be configured by cascading SRMs.
Cascaded SRMs may be collocated or situated throughout the network on remote
nodes. Any aggregate DS0 bandwidth not used by the multidrop bridging can be
used for normal subrate multiplexing.
PCM multidrop data bridging
PCM multidrop data bridging is a 3600 MainStreet system DSP application that
provides multipoint data bridging for analog, VF data circuits. For example, the
multiplexer can bridge multipoint modem circuits between a master host
processor and two or more slave devices.
Figure 2-28 shows a typical application with a host processor as the master device,
and cluster controllers or intelligent data terminals as slaves.
The master polls the slaves by broadcasting polling information to all of them. The
addressed slave responds to the master with the requested information. Each slave
may only communicate with the master and not with other slaves. The
communications protocol, such as SNA/SDLC, Pole Response, or Bisync, must
ensure that only one slave communicates at any one time. The PCM bridge is
responsible for identifying the active slave channel and for switching the slave data
to the master.
65
Product overview
Figure 2-28: PCM bridging (digital multipoint)

Slave responses
(user application must ensure
only one slave transmits at
any one time)
Polling information
broadcasted to slaves
DSP resource
configured for
PCM bridging
T1
64 kb/s
PCM
T1
E&M
voice
module
In-house
copper
3624 MainStreet
ICB
E&M
Host
processor
4WTO
channel
units
Outside plant
copper

4-wire modems
used throughout
7569
The PCM bridging application provides the following features:
bridging on DSP cards
66
The PCM bridging application runs on a single DSP resource located on any
DSP card. One or two bridges can be configured for each DSP resource; up to
10 slave channels are used for one bridge, and up to 10 slave channels are
shared between two bridges. DSP cards installed in single bandwidth UCSs
support 26 backplane DS0 channels, while double bandwidth UCSs support
48 (on-card connections between bridges do not use backplane channels).
antistreaming
PCM bridging will automatically remove a slave channel from the bridge if the
end device using the channel fails to return to an idle state upon completion of
its host messaging. The disconnect threshold can be set for each slave channel;
the range is from 1 to 255 seconds, in 1-second intervals.
dynamic connections
Individual slave channels can be dynamically connected to and disconnected
from active bridges.
multipoint configurations
The master channel from one bridge can be connected as a slave on another to
form large, noncollocated and/or physically diverse multipoint configurations.
RAPID protection
The PCM bridge master (composite) channel can be protected with RAPID.
2. Applications
support for high-speed data and low-speed control channels

Data rates supported by PCM bridging are dependent on the modems voice
frequency data modulation (that is, if two modems can communicate over the
MainStreet network in a point-to-point configuration, they will also
communicate in a PCM bridge configuration). The PCM bridge identifies and
transmits the PCM representation of the two loudest slave channels VF
signals. This supports applications that use both a high-speed data channel and
a low-speed control channel.
low processing delay
The processing delay through the PCM bridge is 1.0 ms.
support for 4-wire modems
Four-wire modems are supported with any combination of E&M and 4WTO
interfaces.
Inverse
multiplexing
The 3600 MainStreet system supports two inverse multiplexing applications:

inverse multiplexing over ATM, and BONDING-based inverse multiplexing.
Inverse multiplexing over

ATM
Inverse multiplexing over ATM, which is supported on an IMA module installed

on an ATM Services card, breaks down an aggregate ATM cell stream onto an IMA
link, which is composed of one or more 56 kb/s (E1) or 64 kb/s (T1) circuits. Cells
on these circuits are passed via the IMA link to the far end through an ATM
network. At the far end, round-robin schedulers on the IMA module control the
collection and distribution of cells on the active circuits in the IMA link, and
recombine them to form the original aggregate ATM cell stream. The IMA module
is compliant with ATM Forum standard AF-PHY-00086.
Figure 2-29 illustrates the inverse multiplexing process over ATM.
Figure 2-29: Inverse multiplexing over ATM
Transmit
direction
Receive
direction
Multiple links
Aggregate
IMA
module
Receive
direction
ATM network
IMA
module
Aggregate
Transmit
direction
10112
67
Product overview
BONDING-based inverse
multiplexing
BONDING-based inverse multiplexing, which is supported on the IMC, breaks

down an n 56 kb/s or n 64 kb/s super-rate circuit into individual 56 kb/s or
64 kb/s circuits, passes these individual circuits through a network with variable
transit delay paths, and recombines them at the far end to form the original
super-rate circuit.
Figure 2-30 shows how a data stream may become delayed as it is inversely
multiplexed and then sent over channels with varying delays.
Figure 2-30: Data transmission without BONDING-based inverse multiplexing
64 kb/s
network
ABC
A Channel 1
? ? ?
A Channel 1
B Channel 2
B Channel 2
C Channel 3
C Channel 3
6615
Figure 2-31 shows how the same data stream is handled by the IMC. Based on the
BONDING specification for delay equalization, inverse multiplexing compensates
for the differential delays among the individual data streams, allowing the data
passing over the super-rate circuit to remain intact.
Figure 2-31: Data transmission with BONDING-based inverse multiplexing
ABC
BONDING
64 kb/s
network
BONDING
n x 64 kb/s
ABC
n x 64 kb/s
A Channel 1
A Channel 1
B Channel 2
B Channel 2
C Channel 3
C Channel 3
6616
Typically, inverse multiplexing is used when the underlying network cannot assure
the end-to-end sequence integrity of super-rate data passing through it, or when
insufficient bandwidth is available to transport the circuit on any one aggregate link
(which would normally result in the circuit being passed over multiple and often
diversely routed links).
68
2. Applications
Inverse multiplexing equalizes the delays of data streams and maintains data
integrity.
Figure 2-32 shows a typical leased application in which two communicating data
devices (in 3600 MainStreet nodes #1 and #3) do not have enough bandwidth for
direct connection. The network manager uses the available three 64 kb/s timeslots
between 3600 MainStreet nodes #1 and #3 and three timeslots between
3600 MainStreet nodes #1 and #2, as well as the three timeslots between
3600 MainStreet nodes #2 and #3. Since the delay is unpredictable, inverse
multiplexing resources on 3600 MainStreet nodes #1 and #3 determine, then
equalize, the delay.
Figure 2-32: Typical leased application
(node #1)
with BONDING

(node #3)
with BONDING
3 x 64 kb/s
Data device #2
(384 kb/s)
Data device #1
(384 kb/s)
3 x 64 kb/s
3 x 64 kb/s

(node #2)
with BONDING
10832
Super-rate data:
up to 1984 kb/s
The 3600 MainStreet system provides super-rate network access and transport on
the cards listed in Table 2-4.
Table 2-4: Supported super-rate speeds
Card
Supported data rates n (64, 56, 48, ... 8 kb/s)
1.544 Mb/s T1 and Dual 1.544 Mb/s T1
n = {1, 2, 3, ... 24} (1)
Embedded DS1 within a DS3

2.048 Mb/s E1 and Dual 2.048 Mb/s E1
n = {1, 2, 3, ... 30} (2)
Embedded E1 within an E3
X.21 and V.35 aggregate
n = {1, 2, 3, ... 30} (3)
X.21 and V.35 DCC
n = {1, 2, 4, 6, ... 30}
69
Product overview
Card
Supported data rates n (64, 56, 48, ... 8 kb/s)
RS-422 DCC (4)
n = {1, 2, 3, 4, ... 62} for double bandwidth
FRE and PE (4)
n = {1, 2, 3, 4, ... 62} for double bandwidth
FRS/SRIM
n = {1, 2, 3, 4, ... 31}
28LC line card (2-wire configuration)
n = {1, 2, 3, ... 16}, n = {1, 2, 3, ... 8}, or

n = {1, 2, 3, 4} (5)
28LC line card (4-wire configuration)
n = {1, 2, 3, ... 32}, n = {1, 2, 3, ... 16}, or

n = {1, 2, 3, ... 8} (6)
Notes
1. User-defined aggregate timeslot usage supports contiguous and noncontiguous super-rate
channels (including AT&T Publication 54019A IBR format).
2. User-defined aggregate timeslot usage supports contiguous, noncontiguous, and equidistant
super-rate channels (including ITU-T G.735, G.737).
3. Timeslot 0 is partially used by the supervisory channel. User-defined aggregate timeslot usage
supports contiguous and noncontiguous super-rate channels.
4. The card can access up to 3968 kb/s (for double bandwidth). Any one circuit can be configured
for up to 1984 kb/s.
5. The 28LC HDSL line interface can be configured for a maximum of 4, 8 or 16 DS0s in 2-wire
configuration. Longer loop lengths are possible with the lower line interface speeds.
6. The 28LC HDSL line interface can be configured for a maximum of 8, 16, or 32 DS0s in 4-wire
configuration. Longer loop lengths are possible with the lower line interface speeds.
The use of noncontiguous timeslots for super-rate circuits adds flexibility,

particularly when rerouting is required (for example, the alternate path can consist
of unused DS0 timeslots within a link). Contiguous super-rate channels can also be
cross-connected to noncontiguous super-rate channels between T1, E1, and X.21
and V.35 aggregate links.
CAS and CCS E1 links also support equidistant super-rate channels around TS16.
For single E1 cards, the SAM provides this capability (if the channels allocated to a
super-rate circuit are confined to one side or the other of TS16, a SAM is not
needed).
Voice applications
The 3600 MainStreet system provides a wide range of voice applications, including:
voice compression: ADPCM (G.721), HCV, CS-A-CELP (G.729 and
70
G.729 Annex A), LD-CELP (G.728)

voice over frame relay
G3 fax relay
V.32 bis modem relay
super-tandem operation
echo cancellation
international aggregate signaling and companding conversion
analog interface conversion
voice conference bridging
2. Applications
Uncompressed PCM voice circuits require the full 64 kb/s bandwidth provided by
an aggregates timeslot. Voice compression reduces this bandwidth requirement
and maintains voice quality. The 3600 MainStreet system supports the following
voice compression algorithms:
32 kb/s ADPCM
32 kb/s ADPCM G3 fax, which is a modified ADPCM algorithm that passes
9600 b/s G3 fax signals

16 kb/s HCV, which is a proprietary compression algorithm adapted from the
CELP coding that provides equivalent quality to 32 kb/s ADPCM with reduced
bandwidth requirements
8 kb/s HCV, which is a bandwidth-optimized version of 16 kb/s HCV that
provides exceptionally high quality
8 and 16 kb/s bulk HCV (supported on DSP5 and DSP5H cards), which
multiplexes two compressed voice circuits onto a single aggregate circuit
before transmission. Up to 20 compressed voice circuits can be multiplexed
onto the 10-circuit card.
HCV with G3 fax (supported on the DSP4 and DSP5H cards), which monitors
PCM voice channel content and dynamically invokes HCV or G3 fax. Voice
channels can originate from an analog voice card or a digital aggregate link.
HCV with G3 fax and V.32 bis modem relay (supported on DSP5 cards),
which monitors PCM voice channel content and dynamically invokes HCV,
G3 fax or V.32 bis modem relay
CS-A-CELP (G.729 and G.729 Annex A) with V.32 bis modem relay
(supported on DSP5 cards), which monitors PCM voice channel content and
dynamically invokes 8 kb/s A-CELP voice compression or V.32 bis modem
relay
LD-CELP with V.32 bis modem relay (supported on DSP5 cards), which
monitors PCM voice channel content and dynamically invokes 16 kb/s
LD-CELP voice compression or V.32 bis modem relay
super-tandem operation (supported on the DSP4, DSP5, and DSP5H cards),
which eliminates the voice degradation resulting from the compression and
decompression of tandem-switched calls
Table 2-5 summarizes the capabilities of ADPCM, HCV, CS-A-CELP, LD-CELP,

G3 fax, V.32 bis modem relay and super-tandem.
71
72
32 kb/s I.460
32 kb/s I.460
HCM: 8, 9.6,
10.4, 12.8,
14.4, 15.2, or
16 kb/s
ADPCM (G.721)
ADPCM
(G3 fax)
CS-A-CELP
(G.729)
HCM: 8, 9.6,
or 16 kb/s
HCV 8 kb/s
HCV 16 kb/s
16 kb/s HCM
or I.460
HCV 16 kb/s
I.460: 16 kb/s
HCM: 16 kb/s
I.460: 8 or
16 kb/s
8 kb/s HCM or
I.460
I.460: 8 or
16 kb/s
HCM: 8, 9.6,
10.4, 12.8,
14.4, 15.2, or
16 kb/s
HCV 8 kb/s
CS-A-CELP
(G.729A)
64 kb/s
PCM
I.460: 8 or
16 kb/s
Transport
bandwidth
and format
Digital voice
compression
algorithm
7.2
9.6
14.4
9.6
14.4
9.6
9.6
4.8
7.2
9.6
14.4
12
4.8
4.8
14.4
12
4.8
9.6
V.32
modem
relay
(max
rate in
kb/s)
4.8
9.6
G3 fax
(max
rate in
kb/s)
In-band
In-band
In-In-band
In-band
In-band
In-band
In-band
In-band
In-band
In-band
In-band
M60 (in-band)
In-band
M55
M48 (In-band)
M60 (in-band)
M48 (in-band)
M44
M55
M44
96
192
96
192
192
192
48
44
48
44
23
CCS
(3)
TS24
24
CAS
RBS (in-band)
120
240
120
240
240
240
60
55
60
55
30
30
E1
T1
T1
E1
Voice
channels
for each
aggregate
(maximum)
Signaling type (1)
Supertandem
Table 2-5: 3600 MainStreet system voice compression algorithms
DSP3
DSP4
20
10
DSP5
DSP5H
55/60 E1
44/48 T1
55/60 E1
44/48 T1
VCM3 (2)
DSP capacity (voice circuits for each card or

module)
Product overview
LD-CELP 12.8 kb/s
LD-CELP 9.6 kb/s
HCV 16 kb/s
HCV 8 kb/s
HCV 16 kb/s
HCM: 8, 9.6,
10.4, 12.8,
14.4, 15.2, or
16 kb/s
HCV 8 kb/s
7.2
9.6
14.4
16 kb/s HCM
or I.460
HCM: 12.8,
14.4, 15.2, or
16 kb/s
I.460: 16 kb/s
7.2
9.6
14.4
7.2
9.6
9.6
14.4
14.4
12
4.8
4.8
14.4
12
4.8
9.6
14.4
4.8
9.6
I.460: 16 kb/s
HCM: 9.6,
10.4, 12, 12.8,
14.4, 15.2, or
16 kb/s
4.8
9.6
4.8
HCM: 16 kb/s
I.460: 8 or
16 kb/s
HCM: 8, 9.6,
10.4, 12.8,
14.4, 15.2 or
16 kb/s
9.6
14.4
12
7.2
9.6
4.8
4.8
I.460: 16 kb/s
14.4
12
4.8
9.6
V.32
modem
relay
(max
rate in
kb/s)
4.8
G3 fax
(max
rate in
kb/s)
HCM: 16 kb/s
I.460: 8 or
16 kb/s
Transport
bandwidth
and format
Digital voice
compression
algorithm
Supertandem
In-band
In-band
In-band
In-band
In-band
In-band
In-band
In-band
In-band
In-band
In-band
In-band
96
96
96
192
96
192
120
120
120
240
120
240
E1
T1
T1
E1
Voice
channels
for each
aggregate
(maximum)
Signaling type (1)
DSP3
DSP4
10
10
20
20
DSP5
20
20
DSP5H
VCM3 (2)

module)
2. Applications
73
74
7.2
9.6
9.6
14.4
I.460: 16 kb/s
Supertandem
In-band
In-band
96
120
E1
T1
T1
E1
Voice
channels
for each
aggregate
(maximum)
Signaling type (1)
Notes
1. If not otherwise indicated, the signaling type supports out-of-band signaling.
2. This module is supported on Dual T1 and Dual E1 cards.
3. To support this signaling type, Dual T1 cards require a TSM, and Dual T1-2 cards require a DRM.
14.4
12
4.8
4.8
HCM: 16 kb/s
V.32
modem
relay
(max
rate in
kb/s)
LD-CELP 16 kb/s
G3 fax
(max
rate in
kb/s)
Transport
bandwidth
and format
Digital voice
compression
algorithm
DSP3
DSP4
10
DSP5
DSP5H
VCM3 (2)

module)
Product overview
2. Applications
ADPCM voice compression
ADPCM voice compression is based on bundles of six DS0s that accommodate one
signaling channel and 11 voice channels. In T1 environments, the M44 and M48
signaling formats are supported, giving 44 and 48 voice channels (respectively) and
four delta signaling channels (for M44 only) in 24 DS0s. In E1 environments, the
M55 and M60 signaling formats are supported, giving 55 and 60 voice channels
(respectively) and five delta signaling channels (for M55 only) in 30 DS0s.
The 3600 MainStreet system supports ADPCM (ITU-T G.721, AT&T Publication
54070, and Bellcore TR-TSY-000120) and ADPCM G3 fax in both Mu-law and
A-law companding environments.
ADPCM is provided by the VCM3 on Dual 1.544 Mb/s T1 and Dual 2.048 Mb/s E1
cards. The VCM3 functions as a full M48 or M60 ADPCM, or ADPCM/G3 fax
transcoder. Typical applications include satellite or terrestrial links between PBXs
or COs (or both) at different locations.
Up to 48 (T1) and 60 (E1) voice circuits, received at the Dual T1 or Dual E1 line
interfaces, can be compressed by the VCM3 and cross-connected to another
aggregate card. All 48 T1 channels can be compressed.
Unused DS0s within a bundle can be used by other voice and/or data circuits.
Uncompressed voice circuits that occupy one of these unused DS0s transmit
signaling information in the normal way, for example, RBS for T1 and TS16 for E1.
HCV voice compression
HCV is a proprietary algorithm that reduces the voice and signaling bandwidth of
a regular 64 kb/s voice call to 8 or 16 kb/s. The use of in-band signaling eliminates
all signaling bandwidth overhead, and facilitates bandwidth management
flexibility by supporting subrate multiplexing with other HCV circuits and HCM
or transparent data.
The following list highlights the specifications and features supported by HCV.
The compressed output is configurable for HCM or transparent subrate data
formats, and is fully supported in subrate multiplexing and subrate switching

applications involving other subrate data.
The signaling and companding law is configurable for each endpoint,
including different settings at opposite ends of the same channel, for example,
in an international voice channel (see Figure 2-33).
An intelligent slip handling mechanism minimizes speech distortion when
aggregate frame slips occur, and maintains channel synchronization at channel
bit error rates up to 10-3 (by comparison, T1 and E1 aggregate links declare a
severely errored second at bit error rates of 10-5).
HCV passes 10 and 20 pps dialing, DTMF tones and AC15 call initiation tones.
The end-to-end speech delay of approximately 60 ms is compensated by the
HCV integral 8 ms echo cancellation facility.
The end-to-end delay for signaling ABCD bits is 5.75 to 9.0 ms.
75
Product overview
Using the internationally accepted MOS test in which listeners rate speech quality
on a scale of 1 to 5, 16 kb/s HCV was ranked slightly better than 32 kb/s ADPCM
(4.28 for HCV, 4.26 for ADPCM) while 8 kb/s HCV was ranked as near toll-quality
with a score of 3.56. In addition, HCV provides an optional 8 ms of echo
cancellation to support tail circuit lengths to approximately 1200 km (800 mi). The
echo clipper can be used to remove residual echoes when strong echoes are present.
As shown in Figure 2-33, 3600 MainStreet systems provide full HCV support for
international networks. HCV is performed using DSP3, DSP4, DSP5, and DSP5H
cards. On the DSP3 and DSP4 cards, each DSP resource can perform 8 kb/s or
16 kb/s HCV on one PCM voice channel. On the DSP5 and DSP5H cards, each
DSP resource can perform 8 kb/s or 16 kb/s HCV on two PCM voice channels.
Figure 2-33: HCV support for international networks
London
Tokyo
A-law
companding
E1 (CAS, R2D)
a) E&M-Type V, LGS-PLAR
b) LGS/LGE-RE
c) LGS/LGE-EC
Mu-law
companding
T1 (RBS)
a) E&M-Type V
3600
MainStreet
system
PBX
3600
MainStreet
system
T1
FT1
V.35 PRI
HCV
HCV
E1
X.21 PRI
PBX
Digital
network
HCV
HCV
E1
X.21 PRI
PBX
T1
FT1
V.35 PRI
3600
MainStreet
system
Mexico City
Mu-law
companding
E1 (CAS using T1 AB bits)
a) E&M-Type I, II, III, IV, V, V with filter, LGS PLAR
b) LGS/LGE LS
c) LGS/LGE GS
3600
MainStreet
system
New York
PBX
Mu-law
companding
T1 (RBS)
a) E&M-Type I, II, III, IV, V,
V with filter, LGS PLAR
b) LGS/LGE LS
c) LGS/LGE GS
7570
76
2. Applications
The compressed output format is configurable for HCM or I.460 (transparent) rate
adaption (8 or 16 kb/s based on compression ratio). A 9.6 kb/s HCM format is also
supported by the HCV with G3 fax application. PCM (uncompressed) voice
channels can originate from any voice interface or aggregate card.
Each endpoint HCV compressor can select the signaling type from one of the
signaling groups designated in the figure as a), b) or c). For example, LGS-LS and
LGE-RE can be used at opposite ends of the same HCV channel, and Mu-law or
A-law companding can also be selected for each end of the HCV channel. Direct
cross-connections between the HCV compressors PCM side and T1 or E1 links or
analog voice ports are supported. International voice support is extended to
include G3 fax data using the HCV with G3 fax application. A typical G3 fax
application would have the PBXs (shown in the figure) programmed to switch G3
fax traffic to trunks, which the 3600 MainStreet node cross-connects to a DSP4
card.
CS-A-CELP voice
compression
CS-A-CELP complies with ITU-T Recommendations G.729 and G.729 Annex A.

CS-A-CELP compresses voice to 8 kb/s and provides a low, constant, end-to-end
compression/decompression delay of 45 to 55 ms. CS-A-CELP provides a
higher-quality compressed voice signal than HCV.
The DSP5 card provides 10 circuits for transmission of CS-A-CELP (G.729)
compressed voice, and 20 circuits for transmission of CS-A-CELP (G.729A)
compressed voice.
LD-CELP voice
compression
LD-CELP, which complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.728, compresses voice

to 9.6, 12.8, or 16 kb/s, and provides a low, constant, end-to-end compression/
decompression delay of 10 to 12.5 ms. LD-CELP provides a higher-quality
compressed voice signal than HCV.
The DSP5 card provides 10 circuits for transmission of LD-CELP compressed
voice.
Super-tandem operation
Super-tandem operation provides improved voice quality, additional bandwidth

savings and simplified network design with HCV and CS-A-CELP (G.729 and
G.729A) voice compression.
Super-tandem operation is recommended for use in large networks where
engineering many point-to-point paths is difficult and usually results in a network
configuration that consists primarily of multihop paths.
Typically, three to five links are assigned to a path. With standard voice
compression, the voice signal is compressed and decompressed at each link,
reducing voice quality. To offset this, the voice paths are engineered for higher
bandwidth, which counteracts the benefits of voice compression.
Furthermore, during the voice compression stage, an encoding and decoding delay
occurs. This delay accumulates at each tandem node in a multihop network.
77
Product overview
With super-tandem operation, calls pass transparently through any digitalconnected PBX without loss of voice quality, because they are cross-connected
through the PBX as compressed voice circuits. By eliminating the need to compress
and decompress the voice signal each time the calls pass through a PBX, voice
quality remains high, regardless of how many hops are required to route the calls.
Super-tandem also greatly simplifies network design. To minimize the number of
multihop calls in networks that use standard voice compression, network designers
must determine not only the estimated voice traffic between adjacent PBX sites, but
also the traffic between PBXs, whether they are or are not adjacent.
Figure 2-34 shows a network configuration using standard voice compression,
which is required to provide single compression and decompression between any
two PBXs. Additional trunks are required between PBX-A and PBX-C, whether the
traffic levels warrant the additional bandwidth or not. This configuration preserves
voice quality, but is an expensive solution for bandwidth usage.
Figure 2-34: Standard voice compression network
A
3600 MainStreet
system
B
3600 MainStreet
system
HCV trunks
C
3600 MainStreet
system
HCV trunks
PBX
PBX
PBX
Phone
Phone
Phone
7934
Figure 2-35 shows a network configuration using super-tandem. Using

super-tandem eliminates the need to determine voice traffic levels between all
PBXs and to install additional trunks. In addition to allowing for a simpler network
design, using super-tandem provides significant bandwidth savings.
78
2. Applications
Figure 2-35: Super-tandem network configuration

A
3600 MainStreet
system
B
3600 MainStreet
system
Super-tandem
trunks
C
3600 MainStreet
system
Super-tandem
trunks
PBX
PBX
PBX
Phone
Phone
Phone
7936
Voice over frame relay
Voice over frame relay (VoFR) is a method of compressing voice calls and
transporting them over a frame relay network. The statistical multiplexing
capability of frame relay allows bandwidth to be shared between voice and data
virtual circuits, which improves bandwidth utilization. For example, a voice call
only uses bandwidth when a call is in progress, which means that other data traffic
or voice calls can occupy the bandwidth when a call is not being made.
The Alcatel implementation of VoFR focuses on transporting voice using
compression and circuit-switching techniques to deliver predictable and consistent
quality of voice, even at low bit rates. This is made possible by:
adopting the Frame Relay Forum Implementation Agreement (FRF.11),

which ensures vendor interoperability for VoFR technology
using advanced DSP technology
providing enhancements to frame relay technology and standards that
guarantee quality of service for delay-sensitive packet traffic
The VoFR application uses the CS-A-CELP (G.729A) voice compression algorithm
selected by the Frame Relay Forum for voice communications over frame relay.
The CS-A-CELP (G.729A) 8 kb/s voice compression is performed by the DSP5
card. Voice calls are compressed and packetized by the DSP5 card for transport
within the payload of a frame relay frame. Including the frame relay overhead, this
equates to approximately 9.6 kb/s for each voice channel.
VoFR offers the potential for significant savings in bandwidth and cost. With the
Alcatel solution, further savings are achieved with silence suppression, a technique
that disables the transmission of voice frames when a caller is not speaking. When
CS-A-CELP is used in conjunction with silence suppression, acceptable quality
voice is delivered over frame relay at approximately 6 kb/s.
79
Product overview
Silence suppression
The Alcatel approach to VoFR takes advantage of the characteristics of voice to

increase bandwidth availability. Advanced voice processing techniques are used to
detect silent periods and halt the transmission of packets during these silent
periods. The extra bandwidth saved from the silent period of one voice channel can
be used by another voice or data channel. This technique can improve bandwidth
utilization by 40% or more since conversations are half-duplex. Silence
suppression can be enabled or disabled for each channel, depending on the
bandwidth requirements of the network applications.
To create a natural-sounding conversation, sample background noise is
transmitted to the far end, where it is played back for the listener. This is
particularly beneficial when the background noise level is high or variable, as the
listener perceives more natural-sounding speech.
Quality of service
To provide a measurable quality of service, it is essential to determine frame

transfer delay and frame loss ratios. With the use of these parameters, the Alcatel
5620 NM can specify and guarantee support for real-time voice traffic, without
significantly affecting nonreal-time data traffic. Quality of service techniques used
with the Alcatel VoFR solution address:
end-to-end delay
jitter control
distortion and noise
frame loss
echo
As voice is transmitted over a frame relay network, frames encounter slight delays
across each link and through each switch. The end-to-end delay has an impact on
the perceived quality of speech. For the best possible speech quality over a frame
relay network, voice traffic must be given priority over data passing through the
same frame relay infrastructure. This is achieved by transmitting the frames from
queues with different priority levels, and servicing the high-priority queue first.
The bursty nature and variable frame sizes of frame relay networks may result in
variable delays between consecutive packets. The time difference between each
arriving packet is known as jitter. Jitter occurs in packet networks when an
intermediate switch is already busy with a packet and another packet arrives. The
second packet is held in a buffer at the switch until transmission of the first packet
is complete. The resulting delay is dependent on the length of the first packet.
Since frame relay allows for variable-length packets, this delay is unpredictable,
resulting in jitter. If the jitter exceeds the buffering capacity of the receiving device,
it can interfere with the smooth regeneration of voice at the receiving end. A large
gap in regenerated voice packets results in distorted sound. Extreme jitter can cause
voice frames to be dropped. If a voice frame arrives too late, it may be discarded.
80
2. Applications
To avoid speech distortions and dropped frames, frames are buffered at the speech
decoder. The buffer must be large enough to accommodate the worst case of jitter
through the network. The Alcatel VoFR algorithm uses a unique, state-of-the-art
technique called Adaptive Delay Equalization, which provides efficient
equalization of delay jitter end to end in the network. The size of the jitter buffer
can be adapted according to the delay profile of received speech frames. The result
is low end-to-end delay during low congestion periods, and no jitter buffer
overflow during congested periods.
The proprietary super-tandem algorithm has been extended to the Alcatel VoFR
implementation. In addition to rendering the compression and decompression
cycle unnecessary, the implementation of super-tandem VoFR eliminates the need
for voice packets to be queued in the playback jitter buffer. The jitter buffer is used
to compensate for variation in network delays, and is normally active in the
conversion from VoFR back to PCM. By eliminating the need for playback buffer
at the tandem switching node, the end-to-end delay across the network can be
significantly reduced, and a high-quality speech path can be maintained.
Figure 2-36 illustrates the implementation of super-tandem VoFR.
Figure 2-36: VoFR with super-tandem operation
Leased line
PBX
3612 MainStreet
NBM
Frame
relay
3600 MainStreet
system
3608 MainStreet
FRAD
PBX
T1/E1
Router
VoFR
with
super-tandem
Router
Router
Tandem PBX
12611
Echo cancellation
Echo is a phenomenon in which transmitted voice is reflected back to the

transmission point. Depending on its severity, echo can disrupt the normal flow of
conversation. Frame relay networks have no capacity to handle echo, so the
problem must be resolved by the equipment at the network edge. The Alcatel VoFR
algorithm provides integral G.165 echo cancellation (no tone disabling) with up to
16 ms tail circuit length, a convergence time of 500 ms, and a software-configurable
minimum echo return loss with optional nonlinear suppressor.
81
Product overview
Interoperability
VoFR is interoperable across multiple MainStreet platforms (see Figure 2-37),

providing an integrated end-to-end solution for small remote offices right through
to high-capacity backbone switches, all managed from a single network
management platform. VoFR technology is supported on the 3608 MainStreet and
3609 MainStreet FRADs for smaller remote or branch office access, and on the
3612 MainStreet NBM for larger branch sites. For backbone locations, the
integration of VoFR technology directly into 3600 MainStreet systems provides a
unique, scalable central-site solution.
Figure 2-37: End-to-end VoFR solution
Remote office
LGS
Phone
3609 MainStreet
FRAD
E&M
Phone
Fax
PBX
Alcatel 5620
Network Manager
Remote office
Central site office
Router
Phone
Fax
Public
frame relay
E&M
PBX
E1
PBX
Up to 256 kb/s
Router
Fax
PBX
SBRI
analog
Fractional
E1
3612 MainStreet
NBM
Fax
3600 MainStreet
system
frame relay with QoS
Branch office
Phone
Phone
3608 MainStreet
FRAD
V.35
Up to 512 kb/s
Private
backbone
network
Router
Regional office
2721 MainStreet
DTU
Phone
Fax
T1/E1
PBX
n x T1/E1
3600 MainStreet
system
15089
82
2. Applications
G3 fax
G3 fax modulation and demodulation is supported in conjunction with ADPCM,

and with HCV, CS-A-CELP (G.729 and G.729A), LD-CELP (G.728), and VoFR.
ADPCM with G3 fax
The VCM3, in conjunction with the Dual T1 and Dual E1 cards, provides ADPCM
voice compression or ADPCM-based G3 fax capability in both Mu-law and A-law
companding environments. The VCM3 can provide up to 44 or 48 (T1) or up to
55 or 60 (E1) ADPCM G3 fax channels, each running at 32 kb/s.
HCV, CS-A-CELP, LD-CELP, and VoFR with G3 fax
HCV, CS-A-CELP, LD-CELP, and VoFR with G3 fax is a special DSP application
that provides optimum transport bandwidth efficiency for shared voice and G3 fax
channels. Six channels are supported using the 6-circuit DSP4 or 10-circuit DSP5
and DSP5H cards.
Each channel is independently monitored for activity. When G3 fax tones are
present, the DSP resource dynamically invokes G3 fax demodulation to extract the
digital fax data. When G3 fax tones are not present, voice compression is applied.
At the far end, the digital signal is either remodulated or uncompressed for fax and
voice respectively. Figure 2-38 shows a sample application.
The demodulated fax and compressed voice information can be formatted as
HCM or transparent data. Various transport bandwidths are supported (see
Table 2-5). The G3 fax feature is fully compatible with the G3 fax capabilities of all
other Alcatel products, such as the 3612 MainStreet and 3600 MainStreet nodes.
Figure 2-38: HCV with G3 fax support
3600
MainStreet
system

DSP-n or
DPM
G3 fax
LGS
E&M
T1/E1
PBX
G3 fax
DSP4
with
Fax
module
SRM
T1/E1
etc...
SRM used to subrate multiplex

HCV, HCV with G3 fax, CPSS
and other HCM/transparent
data channels
Digital
network
3600
3612
MainStreet
MainStreet
system
Narrowband Mux
7571
83
Product overview
In addition, international companding and voice signaling support is extended to

allow international fax connections. For example, the PBXs in Figure 2-33 could be
programmed to route fax traffic over a specific trunk; the multiplexer would apply
the voice compression algorithm with G3 fax application to it. This would result in
transparent, international support for voice/fax calls using optimum transport
bandwidth.
V.32 modem relay
V.32 modem relay on the DSP5 card complies with V.32 and V.32 bis ITU
standards. When the DSP5 card detects V.32 modem signals, it automatically
switches from voice to data mode. The DSP5 card supports modem rates of 4800,
7200, 9600, 12 000, and 14 400 b/s.
Echo cancellation
Echo cancellation removes voice echoes caused by reflections from a far-end

2- to 4-wire analog conversion hybrid and telephone set. The echo cancellation
resources on the 3600 MainStreet system can be used to remove up to 26 ms of tail
circuit echoes (tail circuit lengths of approximately 4000 km [2500 mi]). This
feature is shown in Figure 2-39.
Figure 2-39: Echo cancellation, tail circuit lengths and transit delays
Tail circuit
length (1)
Tail circuit length (1)
Echo (2)
Echo (3)
2- or 4-wire conversion hybrid

and echo cancellation (4)
2-wire
4-wire
T1
E1
3600
MainStreet system
(node A)
Echo (2)
Echo
2- or 4-wire
cancellation (5) conversion hybrid
Digital
network
4-wire
T1
E1
4-wire
T1
E1
2-wire
PBX
3600
MainStreet system
(node B)
Network transit time
Notes
1. Negligible tail circuit length at node A: 2- and 4-wire conversion hybrid and echo cancellation
at same physical location, consequently the tail circuit length consists of just the local loop.
For the echo cancellation circuit in node B, the tail circuit length consists primarily of the
distance between node B and the PBX.
2. On-hook (worst case) and off-hook echoes introduced by telephone set.
3. Echo introduced by 2- and 4-wire conversion hybrid.
4. Echo cancellation at node A prevents echoes from returning to node B. Though not shown,
the 2- and 4-wire conversion hybrid at node A also produces an echo.
5. Echo cancellation at node B prevents echoes from returning to node A.
10842
84
2. Applications
Echoes become annoying when voice circuits are transmitted through a network
with long delays (for example, networks with satellite links). Generally, a
maximum delay of 25 to 30 ms can be tolerated before echo cancellation is
required. The echo return loss is also a factor in determining the need for echo
cancellation; loud echoes are more annoying than quiet ones.
The 3600 MainStreet system uses an ITU-T G.165-compliant echo cancellation
algorithm. The minimum ERL is 6 dB while the residual echo level is 48 dBm0.
Any DSP resource located on DSP1, DSP2, and DSP3 cards can be configured for
echo cancellation, with one PCM channel for each resource. Alternatively, all voice
compression algorithms provide an optional 8 ms of echo cancellation.
By default, the minimum ERL is 6 dB, but you can configure the ERL for 3 dB. The
3 dB ERL feature should be used for tail circuits with severe impedance
mismatches.
International signaling
and companding
conversion
The 3600 MainStreet system supports the international PCM voice signaling and
companding conversions necessary in networks using both T1 and E1 and
multinational telephone equipment, including:
conversion of RBS, used in D4 and ESF T1, to ITU-T G.732 signaling, used in
CAS E1
conversion of analog voice signaling, such as North American LGS LS to
European LGE RE signaling
conversion of Mu-law companding to A-law
transport of T1 AB signaling bits over E1 links
Figure 2-40 shows how the 3600 MainStreet system can be used in international
voice networks. The T1 link (a) and/or the E1 link (b), can be used to interconnect
the North American and European nodes. Note that one of the T1/E1 cards
terminating the transatlantic link must have a CCM.
For the T1 link (a), companding and signaling conversion is performed at the
European node (the T1 link carries Mu-law and T1 AB signaling channels). For the
E1 link (b), companding conversion occurs at the North American node. Signaling
conversion is performed at the European node, when T1 signaling is used on the E1
link, or at the North American node, when the E1 CAS timeslots are
cross-connected to T1 timeslots.
The conversion or translation of T1 RBS (AB bits) to E1 CAS (ABCD bits) is
performed when T1 timeslots are directly cross-connected to E1 timeslots through
the 3600 MainStreet system. For example, conversion is used when a T1 timeslot
transporting an LGS LS channel is cross-connected to an E1 timeslot transporting
an LGE RE channel.
85
Product overview
Figure 2-40: International PCM voice conversion
(a)
T1
E1
CCM
Mu-law port side

T1/DS3 (RBS)
PRI (TS0)
Analog
E&M (type I, II, III)
LGS PLAR
E&M (type I, II, III)
LGS LS
LGS GS
LGE LS
LGE GS
(b)
T1
CCM
E1
PRI
E&M
LGS
LGE
LGE
LGS
3645 MainStreet node
PRI

E&M
Europe
T1/DS-3
North America
E1
Endpoint signalling pairs
A-law port side

E1 (CAS)
PRI (TS0)
Analog
E&M (type IV, V, V with filter)
LGS PLAR
R2D (E-1)
LGE RE
LGE EC
LGS RE
LGS EC
7573
The use of a CCM on either the T1 or E1 card provides Mu-law to A-law

companding conversion. Conversion is applied when T1 signaling devices are used
in networks that have E1 aggregate links (for example, in Mexico and Latin
America).
With the ability to program A-law voice cards for either T1 or E1 signaling, it is
possible to provide PCM voice conversion by directly cross-connecting an A-law
voice port to a T1 link. In addition, the ability of the 3600 MainStreet system to
support T1 signaling on E1 links enables direct cross-connection of Mu-law voice
ports to E1 links. Companding conversion will be performed in both cases when
the T1 or E1 cards have CCMs.
HCV can also be used for international voice signaling and companding
conversion applications. The Application Note International Voice Signaling
Applications (01NCN353), available from your Alcatel representative, provides
detailed configuration information on both PCM and HCV usage in international
networks.
The 3600 MainStreet system can also convert between the ITU-T ADI A-law PCM
output code format (generally used on 2.048 Mb/s E1 links) and the AT&T Mu-law
true-sign inverted magnitude PCM output code format (generally used on
1.544 Mb/s T1 links).
86
2. Applications
Analog interface
conversion
In addition to international voice signaling conversion, the 3600 MainStreet system

can provide signaling and interface conversion to enable cross-connections within
the following groups of voice circuits:
LGS Loop Start LGS PLAR E&M

LGS Ground Start LGS PLAR E&M
Voice conference bridging
The VCB application provides a simultaneous communication path between two

or more PCM voice channels (Hoot n Holler service). It is intended for nailed-up
or long-duration applications, such as brokerage dealer board applications. The
VCB application does not support signaling. It can be used to provide an
organization-wide voice conference facility. The VCB is a single DSP resource
application and is supported on DSP3 cards. A sample configuration is shown in
Figure 2-41.
Figure 2-41: Voice conference bridging
E&M, LGS, PLAR
PSTN
T1/E1
E&M/LGE
T1/E1
E&M/LGE
PBX
V.35/X.21
(HCV)
T1 (PCM)
3600
MainStreet
system
T1/E1
(PCM)
3624
MainStreet
ICB
3600
MainStreet
node
VCB
3612
MainStreet
NBM
to other equipment including:

VCBs
PBXs
other 3600 MainStreet nodes
telephone sets
7574
87
Product overview
Key features of VCB are:
up to 4 VCBs and 14 PCM conferees for each DSP resource; up to 5 VCBs can
be cascaded to form large bridges (see Figure 2-42)

companding conversion for conferees using different companding laws (A-law
and Mu-law)
input and output gains of 16 to +9 dB, in 0.1-dB increments configurable for
each conferee
listen-only and broadcast-only modes
optional side tone generation (16 to 0 dB, in 0.1-dB increments, or none)
low processing delay (500 s)
support for 2-wire voice channels with echo cancellation or terminating
devices that do not present an open circuit when the VCB is active, and 4-wire
voice channels (4-wire voice channels are recommended)
Figure 2-42: Cascading VCBs to form large voice conference bridges
Daisy chain
3600
MainStreet
system
3600
MainStreet
system
VCB
Hierarchical
City A
VCB
VCB
T1/E1
(PCM)
City B
3600
MainStreet
system
3600
MainStreet
system
3600
MainStreet
system
VCB
VCB
VCB
City C
City D
City E
7648
PCM connectivity is recommended between large, cascaded VCBs, particularly

when HCV is used to transport conferee channels. The distortion caused by
multiple voice compression/decompression hops may be acceptable for listen-only
conferees, but may prove unsatisfactory for actively broadcasting conferees.
Compressed voice channels must be converted to PCM before being connected to
a VCB.
88
2. Applications
Frame relay
switching
Frame relay is a service that statistically multiplexes individually addressed frames

onto a digital link. It differs from traditional packet services, such as X.25, by its
delegation of error correction and flow control responsibilities to the attached user
devices. (With X.25, these are network node-to-node responsibilities; with frame
relay, they are end-to-end user device responsibilities.) With less network
overhead, frame relay can focus network resources on the transmission of frames
from one end of the network to the other, at much higher transmission rates than
legacy packet networks.
These characteristics have made frame relay ideal for its traditional rolethe
interconnection of LANs where bursty, low-average bandwidth and
high-throughput usage is typical. But these same advantages have allowed frame
relay to evolve into the first truly universal packet WAN service offering data and
voice integration. Combining intrinsic statistical gains, low overhead, and its ability
to dynamically assign bandwidth, frame relay has become the protocol of choice for
transmitting packetized voice.
Alcatel frame relay

solution
On the 3600 MainStreet system, frame relay services are supported by the FRE, PE,
and FRS/SRIM cards. Each card is an independent frame relay switch, providing
frame routing, dynamic bandwidth allocation, congestion control, and frame error
checking. Up to eight FRS/SRIM cards, four FRE cards, or three PE cards can be
installed in any UCS in a 3600 MainStreet peripheral shelf. The cards can be easily
upgraded through software to add new features and functionality without affecting
the operation of the 3600 MainStreet system.
For existing 3600 MainStreet networks, the frame relay cards are the key elements
of a seamless, cost-effective migration path from circuit switching to advanced
packet- and cell-switched networks. In addition to investment protection, the
benefits of the Alcatel frame relay solution include:
integration of frame relay services into networks of any size or complexity

full compliance with the broadest possible range of international frame relay
standards
interoperability with the equipment of other vendors
seamless, single-platform management of all network equipment and services
through the Alcatel 5620 NM
integrated circuit and packet switching with guaranteed throughput and
advanced congestion management techniques
advanced support for voice and data integration over frame relay, including
toll-quality voice and end-to-end quality-of-service guarantees
RAPID protection for frame relay circuits
89
Product overview
Frame relay features
Frame relay features include:
fully standards-compliant frame routing, dynamic bandwidth allocation,
Integrated frame relay

circuit-switching hybrid
congestion control, and frame error checking

HDLC-based protocol encapsulation using widely accepted standards
support for CPSS over frame relay
advanced quality of service and frame fragmentation features for effective
switching of delay-sensitive traffic, such as VoFR
frame relay-to-X.25 and frame relay-to-ATM network and service
interworking
full network management by the Alcatel 5620 NM, and comprehensive node
management through the integrated NMTI (VT100)
redundancy for frame relay circuits provided by RAPID protection switching
or the Alcatel 5620 NM AAR
extensive maintenance and performance monitoring functions, including
alarms, statistics, and loopbacks
With the 3600 MainStreet system, frame relay technology can be easily phased into
existing circuit-switched networks to create an integrated, circuit- and
packet-switched backbone network. Frame relay and circuit-switched data can be
cross-connected to, and transported by, the same T1 or E1 link. Frame relay is
supported on any aggregate link, including T1, E1, DS-3 II, E3, X.21, and V.35
aggregate, data, voice, and application cards (including the frame relay cards).
On the 3600 MainStreet node, the switching shelf cross-connects frame streams
(from data, LAN, and aggregate cards) to frame relay cards, as well as
circuit-switched information between ports, aggregates, and DSP resources. For
packet data, the switching matrix circuit switches DS0 and super-rate frame
streams from aggregate, data, and LAN interfaces to FRS/SRIM, FRE, and PE cards.
The frame relay cards perform the frame switching.
Easy phase-in of frame

relay
Figure 2-43 shows how a backbone network based solely on circuit switching
requires dedicated WAN channels for each LAN-to-LAN interconnection and
dedicated LAN equipment to terminate each channel. With the addition of frame
relay cards, and the enabling of the LAN device FRAD capability, fewer WAN
channels and LAN devices are required.
In conventional circuit switching (without frame relay), each outlying LAN router
requires a dedicated channel and a dedicated router at the central site on the right
of the figure. With frame relay, the outlying LAN router traffic is funneled into
fewer links (only one connection is shown in Figure 2-43), which allocates the full
bandwidth of the link (or that portion of the DS1 that is configured as a frame
stream) to each router only when needed. At the central site, fewer routers are
necessary because the frame relay cards provide the required frame switching. The
actual number of WAN channels (frame streams) and routers necessary will
depend on the required frame throughput and the number of frames generated.
90
2. Applications
Figure 2-43: LAN interconnectivity with and without frame relay

With frame relay
Regional offices
2721
MainStreet
DTU
Corporate data center
3600 MainStreet
system
FRE
3600 MainStreet
system
Shared channel(s) for all

LAN-WAN-LAN interconnections
2721
MainStreet
DTU
2721
MainStreet
DTU
FRS
3600 MainStreet
system
Point-to-multipoint LAN
FRE
Without frame relay

Regional offices
Router
Corporate data center
3600 MainStreet
system
3600 MainStreet
system
Router
Dedicated channel for each

LAN-WAN-LAN interconnection
Router
3600 MainStreet
system
Point-to-point LAN
15157
Telephone companies and carriers can use frame relay cards to concentrate frame
relay traffic from multiple frame relay-compatible user devices. This achieves
greater bandwidth utilization on gateways to public CSSNA and frame relay
networks.
91
Product overview
Figure 2-44 shows the 3600 MainStreet system as a gateway node to circuit- and
packet-switched networks, and as an element in a high-speed public frame relay
network. The integrated access loop supports both circuit- and packet-switched
data in the same aggregate. The 3600 MainStreet system can be applied as
customer-premises equipment, either Telco or customer-owned.
Figure 2-44: Gateway concentrator to frame relay networks
High-speed
public
frame relay
network
PSTN
Central
office
Integrated
access loop
Customer Voice
premises
Circuit switched connections
PBX
Video
LAN
Private/hybrid
integrated
networks
FRS
card(s)
3600
MainStreet
system
Bridges
and
routers
Frame relay connection

Low-speed
data
Third-party
frame relay
terminal adapters
Packetswitched
network (1)
Metropolitan
area network (2)
Notes
1. Traditional low-speed (<64 kb/s) X.25 services with frame relay interfaces
2. MAN with DS1 frame relay interfaces
7558
Upgrades to a FASTbus
When the demands of frame relay switching expand to require multiple FRE or PE
cards, the FASTbus option (which includes a FIP and a minimum of two FRE or
PE cards) is a cost-efficient means of offloading the frame relay traffic. The
packet-switching FASTbus is particularly useful on large systems, providing a fully
redundant FDDI ring that provides 100 MB/s connectivity between up to 64 FRE
or PE cards.
For more details on the FASTbus option, see the MainStreet Frame Relay General
Information book.
Subrate frame relay
The FRS/SRIM processes data at subrate speeds that are not limited to multiples of
8 kb/s. Circuits that are not configured for the SRIM support only subrate speeds
that are multiples of 8 kb/s.
Table 2-6 lists the subrate speeds and rate adaption protocols supported by the
FRS/SRIM.
92
2. Applications
Table 2-6: Subrate speeds and rate adaption supported by the FRS/SRIM
Rate adaption protocols
Subrate speeds supported (kb/s)
DDS (DS0-A and DS0-B)
2.4
4.8
9.6
19.2
56 (DS0-A only)
HCM
1.2
2.4
4.8
9.6
14.4
19.2
38.4
X.50 (Div. 2, Div. 3, and Div. 5)
2.4
4.8
9.6
19.2
48 (X.50 bis)
Link management
protocols
Link management protocols are used to communicate PVC status information and
configuration changes between end-user devices, such as routers, and network
devices, such as the FRE and FRS/SRIM cards. The frame relay cards support the
three accepted protocols for communicating frame relay link status information:
LMI
Annex D of ANSI T1.617
Annex A of ITU-T Q.933
Congestion management
and recovery
The frame relay cards provide congestion management and recovery facilities that
detect the onset of congestion, limit the extent of congestion, and expedite the
recovery from severe congestion. Congestion is monitored at several levels,
including:
frame switch
processor
frame stream
User-configurable MCT, SCT, and ACT levels are used to limit and expedite the
recovery from congestion.
93
Product overview
Maintenance and
performance monitoring
The frame relay cards offer a range of maintenance and performance monitoring
functions:
alarms
The cards maintain separate alarm queues that are categorized according to
severity. Alarms can be read, acknowledged, logged, deleted, and monitored
through the Alcatel 5620 NM and the NMTI. Remote alarm logging through
CPSS is supported.
statistics
The cards collect a range of frame relay switch, frame stream, and data link
connection statistics. Statistics are viewed using an Alcatel 5620 NM or the
NMTI.
loopbacks
Loopbacks are supported on PVCs and frame streams.
For detailed information about the Alcatel frame relay service, refer to the
MainStreet Frame Relay General Information book.
X.25 switching
X.25 is an internationally accepted ITU-T standard that defines a communication

protocol between data terminal devices and packet-switched data networks. The
X.25 protocol facilitates the interworking of packet-switched data services across
geographically dispersed public and private networks.
X.25 is a virtual call service that allows network users to set up calls using standard
X.121 and E.164 addresses. The network establishes calls over virtual circuits,
which are logical connections between the originating and destination addresses.
Through the use of statistical multiplexing methods, X.25 can support multiple
virtual circuits over a single physical circuit, thus providing port sharing and
dynamic bandwidth allocation.
The X.25 protocol implements various error correction and flow control
techniques to ensure the reliable transfer of data across the network. Call
subscription options and facilities allow network users to individually customize
their service based on the application requirements.
MainStreet X.25 service
94
With the addition of a single PE card, a 3600 MainStreet system supports the
MainStreet X.25 service, a complete X.25 switching product suitable for public
switched data networks, large service provider networks and corporate data
networks. The MainStreet X.25 service addresses the requirements for high-speed
access and the need for integrated, cost-effective migration paths to advanced
packet- and cell-switching technologies.
2. Applications
The PE card provides a small footprint, high-performance X.25 switching

platform. The card can be installed in any UCS in a 3600 MainStreet system. The
PE card is suitable for networks that require high-capacity accounting.
Functioning as an independent packet and frame switch, the card can be easily
upgraded through software to add new features and functionality without affecting
the operation of the 3600 MainStreet system. Moreover, the card supports X.25
and frame relay services simultaneously, and offers both network interworking and
service interworking between X.25 and frame relay.
While the MainStreet X.25 service is a key component of a multiservice
3600 MainStreet system, it also takes advantage of the multiservices nature of the
system, supporting both subrate and super-rate X.25 access lines over TDM and/or
frame relay circuits, and incorporating a high-speed internal network using frame
relay PVCs as backbone trunks.
Figure 2-45 shows an example of a MainStreet X.25 network using
36110 MainStreet and 36111 MainStreet multiprotocol concentrators.
MainStreet X.25 features
MainStreet X.25 features include:
access speeds from 1.2 kb/s to 1984 kb/s using existing MainStreet access
devices and interface cards

X.25 access over frame relay based on widely accepted encapsulation standards
optimized X.25 performance in the network backbone using Alcatel frame
relay technology, operating at up to T3/E3 speeds in all 3600 MainStreet
systems except for the single-shelf configuration
dynamic routing and load balancing on a per-packet basis
full support for X.75 and X.35 gateways
full network management by the Alcatel 5620 NM
comprehensive node management through the integrated NMTI (VT100)
redundancy for access lines and backbone trunks provided by RAPID
protection switching or the Alcatel 5620 NM AAR
extensive maintenance and performance monitoring functions, including
alarms, statistics, and diagnostics
95
Product overview
Figure 2-45: Example of a MainStreet X.25 network

Subrate X.25 devices
(1.2 to 64 kb/s)
Public
X.25
network
DS0 or
ISDN 2B+D
IBM
DEC
BULL
X.75
X.25 (up to
E1 rate)
3600
MainStreet
system
Subrate X.25 devices

(1.2 to 64 kb/s)
Frame
relay
Frame
relay
36111
MainStreet
HMPC
IP
IPX
NetBIOS
SNA
X.25
gateway
3600
MainStreet
system
T1
Router
Private
X.25
network
X.75
E3
T1
E3
E1
3600
MainStreet
system
3600
MainStreet
system
T3
Alcatel
5620 NM
ISDN
X.25
IP
IPX
SNA
NetBIOS
3600
MainStreet
system
Frame
relay
36111
MainStreet
HMPC
36110
MainStreet
MPC
Frame
relay
X.25
36110
MainStreet
MPC
Frame
relay
X.25
3609 MainStreet
FRAD
36110
MainStreet
MPC
BSC
Async.
SDLC
HDLC
36110
MainStreet
MPC
IP
IPX
NetBIOS
SNA
IP
IPX
NetBIOS
SNA
9337
96
2. Applications
Standards-compliant X.25
and X.75
The MainStreet X.25 service fully supports the 1984, 1988, 1992, and 1996 versions
of ITU-T Recommendations X.25 and X.75. The link layer supports modulo 8 and
modulo 128 frame sequencing, and supports both direct LAPB access and access
over frame relay encapsulation circuits.
The network layer offers a choice of DCE or DTE modes and fully supports:
MainStreet X.25 network

components
network-wide call redirection

switch-wide and network-wide hunt groups
CUGs and ICUGs
X.25 PVCs and X.75 IPVCs
PVC and SVC accounting
NUI validation
The MainStreet X.25 service features a flexible and scalable architecture suitable for
compact and large networks. The modular design provides interfaces to external
systems and allows rapid development and delivery of future features and
enhancements.
Figure 2-46 shows the various components that make up the MainStreet X.25
network. The PE card is the key component. To support the full range of X.25
network services, Alcatel offers the following optional subsystems:
Alcatel Data Collector for accounting record collection and processing

NexusPASS NUI validation servers
NexusTRACE remote protocol monitoring software
Figure 2-46: MainStreet X.25 network architecture
Maintenance
tools
X.25
access device
Accounting and
statistics
data collection
CPSS over
X.25
MainStreet
X.25 network
X.75
internetwork
gateways
NUI database
and
user interface
NMTI and
Alcatel 5620
Network
Manager
X.25
frame relay service
internetworking
7320
97
Product overview
X.25-to-frame relay
service interworking
X.25-to-frame relay service interworking allows X.25 devices to communicate with

frame relay devices by converting X.25 data packets to frame relay frames.
For detailed information about the MainStreet X.25 service, refer to the
MainStreet X.25 Service General Information book.
98
A closer view
Design
This chapter provides a detailed architectural view of the 3600 MainStreet
Multiservice Bandwidth Manager.
This chapter includes descriptions of:
modular components
shelf types
single-shelf and dual-shelf system configurations
shelf architecture
single-bandwidth and double-bandwidth options
multishelf system configurations
switching shelves
peripheral shelves
high-speed peripheral shelves
power supplies
ringing generators
cooling equipment
distribution panels
data termination units
cables
system integrity
control redundancy
RAPID protection switching
Alcatel 5620 NM AAR
101
A closer view
Modular
components
ISDN leased-line protection

aggregate redundancy measures
fault signaling and trunk conditioning
Control Packet Switching System
node and network synchronization
The flexible system configuration and scalability described in chapters 1 and 2 are
possible as a result of the modular architecture used throughout the design of all
3600 MainStreet systems. Modularity is based on the use of common components
to build each of the three 3600 MainStreet basic systems:
single shelf
dual shelf
multishelf
A 3600 MainStreet system can be easily expanded and upgraded by adding
common shelves and shelf components. Existing shelves, cards, power supplies,
external equipment, and external interface cabling can be used in the expanded
system, but will require some reconfiguration.
The principles of modularity and flexibility were also applied to the universal card
slots in all shelves except the HSPS. Each shelf provides eight UCSs that
accommodate any combination of aggregate, voice interface, data interface, and
application cards.
The Expander card and its modules provide additional switching matrix resources.
Depending on which Expander card variant is used, it can either provide capacity
for an additional two cards, or it can enable double bandwidth for some
configurations.
Shelf types
All 3600 MainStreet shelves fit directly into standard 19-inch racks or, using
extender brackets, into 23-inch racks.
Four types of shelves are available for use in 3600 MainStreet systems:
102
Class A 19-inch shelf

Class B 19-inch shelf
23-inch shelf
HSPS
3. Design
Class A 19-inch shelf
The Class A shelf meets FCC rulings Part 15 (Class A) EMC specifications; it
supports one or two ac or dc power supplies mounted in a power tray. Figure 3-1
shows Class A shelf dimensions.
Figure 3-1: Class A shelf dimensions
48.3 cm
(19 in.)
Cable entrance
48.6 cm
(19.15 in.)
5.08 cm
(2 in.)
2.54 cm
(1 in.)
25.8 cm
(10.15 in.)
Front
Cable
entrances
Rear
Side
5464
Class B 19-inch shelf
The Class B shelf meets Class A and meets EN 55 022 (Class B) when provisioned
with Class B cards or a front cover, or both; it supports one or two ac or dc power
supplies mounted in a power tray. Figure 3-2 shows Class B shelf dimensions.
Figure 3-2: Class B shelf dimensions
48.3 cm (19 in.)
23.5 cm
(9.25 in.)
48.6 cm
(19.15 in.)
Fixed
filler plate
Front
Side
Rear
4699
103
A closer view
23-inch shelf
The 23-inch shelf meets Class A and Class B (when provisioned with Class B cards
or a front cover, or both); it supports one or two independently removable dc
power supply cards and an integrated heat deflector, and it has reduced vertical
height. Figure 3-3 shows 23-inch shelf dimensions.
Figure 3-3: 23-inch shelf dimensions
30.5 cm
(12 in.)
58.4 cm (23 in.)

Heat
deflector
Critical Alarm
3600 MainStreet
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
44.5 cm
(17.5 in.)
Power
Supply
card
slots
Fixed
filler plate
Front
Rear
Side
4751
High-speed peripheral
shelves
HSPSs support public carrier-compatible, high-order interface cards. The HSPS

supports DS-3 II cards, and the HSPS2 supports Single and Dual E3 cards, installed
singly or as fully redundant card pairs. Figure 3-4 shows HSPS dimensions.
Figure 3-4: HSPS dimensions
48.3 cm (19 in.)
23.5 cm
(9.25 in.)
48.6 cm
(19.5 in.)
Rear
Front
Side
4801
104
3. Design
Figure 3-5 shows HSPS2 dimensions.

Figure 3-5: HSPS2 dimensions
30.5 cm
(12 in.)
48.3 cm (19 in.)
Power
supply
card
slots
E3 card
cage
57.8 cm
(22.75 in.)
FIC
cage
Rear
Heat
deflector
Front
Side
4752
Shelf characteristics
Table 3-1 shows the characteristics of all 3600 MainStreet system shelf types.
Table 3-1: 3600 MainStreet shelves

Shelf
Description
Variant
Part no.
Part name
Characteristics
Class
Class A
90-0662-03
Switching shelf (Dual dc

input)
19-inch, ac feed or single or dual dc feed, rear

cable entry
Class A
Class B
90-0662-04
Switching shelf dc (Class B)
19-inch, single or dual dc feed, rear bulkhead cable

connection
Class A and B
90-0662-05
Switching shelf ac (Class B)
19-inch, ac feed, rear bulkhead cable connection
Class A and B
23-inch
90-0662-06
23-inch switching shelf dc

connection
Class A
Class A
90-0010-10
Single shelf (8 UCS) Dual

input
19-inch, ac or dual dc feed, rear cable entry
Class A
Class B
90-0010-13
Single shelf 8 UCS dc

(Class B)

connection
Class A and B
90-0010-14
Single shelf 8 UCS ac

(Class B)
19-inch, ac feed, rear bulkhead cable connection
Class A and B
23-inch
90-0010-15
Single shelf 8 UCS dc

(23-inch)

connection
Class A and B
HSPS
90-0652-01
HSPS
19-inch, ac feed or single or dual dc feed, rear

bulkhead cable connection
Class A
HSPS2
90-0652-02
HSPS2

connection
Class A and B
105
A closer view
All equipment is modular to simplify installation and expansion. Switching and

peripheral shelves provide standard TEP-1(E) or North American style alarm ports
to monitor external alarm inputs and report alarm status to external devices.
In some multiple racking or shelf configurations (or combinations of both),
cooling is required. In such circumstances, a passive heat deflector or a fan unit can
be installed between two shelves. Heat is drawn from the lower shelf and exhausted
toward the rear. Either unit requires 8.9 cm (3.5 in.) of vertical rack space. The
23-inch and HSPS2 shelf variants provide integral heat deflectors.
Single-shelf and
dual-shelf system
configurations
Single-shelf and dual-shelf systems are assembled using Class A, Class B, or 23-inch
shelves. Dual-shelf systems are connected using Balanced Transceiver cards, which
are half-height cards used in pairs with one card in each communicating shelf.
System cards comprise the SCC3 and the optional GFC2 and GFC3 maintenance
cards. In a single-shelf system, one SCC3 controls up to eight UCSs for any
combination of aggregate, voice, data, and application cards. The removal or
insertion of a UCS card does not affect its neighbors.
Single-shelf nonredundant
system
Figure 3-6 shows a single-shelf nonredundant system. One SCC3 controls up to six
(or, with an optional Expander card, eight) UCSs for interface and application
cards. The optional SS3(8+) card combines the functions of the SSC3 and the
Expander card, making up to eight UCSs available.
Figure 3-6: Single-shelf nonredundant 3600 MainStreet system
3600 MainStreet
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
SCC3 ((8+) optional)
(empty)
GFC2 or GFC3
9 10 11
12
Expander (optional)
UCS
PS2
5A
UCS
PS1
5A
Expander
card required
15057
106
3. Design
Single-shelf,
control-redundant system
To achieve redundancy in a single-shelf system, a second SCC3 or SCC3(8+) and

an SSR upgrade kit must be installed in the shelf. The SCC3s must be installed in
slots 9 and 11; an SSR upgrade kit must be installed in slot 10. Using a pair of
SCC3(8+)s also provides double bandwidth switching capacity.
Figure 3-7 shows a single-shelf, control-redundant system.
Figure 3-7: Single-shelf, control-redundant system
3600 MainStreet
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
GFC2 or GFC3
9 10 11
12
SSR
UCS
PS2
5A
UCS
PS1
5A
SCC3 (8+) required

15058
Dual-shelf nonredundant
system
A dual-shelf nonredundant system uses one SCC3 to control up to six (or, with an
optional Expander card, eight) UCSs in each of the two shelves. A pair of Balanced
Transceiver cards, one in each shelf, provides cabling capability for
communications between the shelves. Figure 3-8 illustrates a dual-shelf
nonredundant system.
107
A closer view
Figure 3-8: Dual-shelf nonredundant system
3600 MainStreet
PS2
5A
Upper
Balanced
Transceiver
card
GFC or GFC2
Expander (16+)
UCS
SCC3
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
PS1
5A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12
Shelf A
Intershelf
cable
3600 MainStreet
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
PS2
5A
(empty)
(empty)
(empty)
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
PS1
5A
12
Lower
Balanced
Transceiver
card
Shelf B
15059
108
3. Design
In a dual-shelf, control-redundant system, a second SCC3 and a second Expander

card are installed in the second shelf. If the first pair fails, the redundant pair takes
over system operation. Figure 3-9 illustrates a dual-shelf, control-redundant
system, with Balanced Transceiver cards providing intershelf connectivity.
Figure 3-9: Dual-shelf, control-redundant system
3600 MainStreet
PS2
5A
Upper
and Lower
Balanced
Transceiver
cards
GFC2
or GFC3
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
SCC3
Expander
PS1
5A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12
Shelf A
Two
intershelf
cables
3600 MainStreet
PS2
5A
(empty)
PS1
5A
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
SCC3
Expander
Dual-shelf,
control-redundant system
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12
Shelf B
Upper
and Lower
Balanced
Transceiver
cards
15060
109
A closer view
Shelf architecture
Single-shelf systems and dual-shelf systems support Class A, Class B, and 23-inch
shelves, utilizing the following shelf features:
interface section (slots 1 to 8)

common control section (slots 9 to 12)
power section
backplane architecture
backplane and equipment interface connectors
visual status indicators
Figure 3-10 shows the shelf architecture for Class A, Class B, and 23-inch shelves in
single-shelf and dual-shelf systems.
Figure 3-10: Shelf architecture, single-shelf and dual-shelf systems
Class A
Class B
Critical Alarm
3600 MainStreet
3600 MainStreet
Power
section
PS1
5A
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
PS2
5A
PS1
5A
PS2
5A
Alarm
Alarm
Power
Power
slots 1 to 8
9 to 12
slots 1 to 8
9 to 12
Interface
section
Common
control
section
Interface
section
Common
control
section
Power
section
23-inch
3600 MainStreet
Critical Alarm
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Power Supply
Card
0VR
- BATT
+5
-5
+ 12
- 12
GND
Alarm
Status
Power Supply
Card
Power
section
0VR
- BATT
+5
-5
+ 12
- 12
GND
Alarm
Status
slots 1 to 8
9 to 12
Interface
section
Common
control
section
15050
110
3. Design
Interface section
The interface section on each shelf comprises eight UCS slots (1 to 8), which
support any combination of aggregate, voice and data interface, and application
cards. The interface section also supports some system cards.
Table 3-2 lists the cards available for installation in the interface section of shelves
in single-shelf and dual-shelf systems.
Table 3-2: Cards available for the interface section in single-shelf and dual-shelf systems
Type
Card
Aggregate
4 Mb/s T1 ATM Services card

4 Mb/s E1 ATM Services card
1.544 Mb/s T1 card
Dual 1.544 Mb/s T1 card
Dual 1.544 Mb/s T1-2 card
2.048 Mb/s E1 card
Dual 2.048 Mb/s E1 card
Dual 2.048 Mb/s E1-2 card
Single Optical Extension card
Dual Optical Extension card
MPA
TTC2M
X.21 PRI card
X.21 ESI PRI card
V.35 PRI card
Voice
4WDX channel unit

4WTO line card
E&M card
LGE card
LGS card
E&M channel unit
LGE channel unit
LGS channel unit
MRD channel unit
2WMRD channel unit
111
A closer view
Type
Card
Data
BRI S/T card

RS-232 DCC
X.21 DCC
V.35 DCC
RS-422 DCC
2B1Q line card
27LC2 line card
27LC3 line card
28LC line card
64 kb/s Codirectional card
2B1Q channel unit
DS0-DP channel unit
OCU-DP channel unit
4WTO channel unit
Application
CPC
DSP card
IMC
DCP card
FRS/SRIM card
FRE card
PE card
System
Common Carrier card

Test card
Common control section
The common control section occupies four slots (9 through 12). Table 3-3 lists the
cards that can be used in the common control section.
Table 3-3: 3600 MainStreet cards for common control section
Type
Card
Control
SCC3
SCC3(8+)
Expander
Expander card variant
Balanced Transceiver
Upper or Lower
General Facilities
GFC2
GFC3
112
3. Design
System Control card 3 and System Control card 3 (8+)
The SCC3 and SCC3(8+) cards store system software for the current release in a
DMM. These cards provide all common control and node management functions
local to their shelf, including:
nonblocking, aggregation and communication of user data from 16 UCS cards

distribution of configuration information to UCS cards (voice, data, and
aggregate interface cards, and application cards)

maintenance of a DSP application library, including applications such as
subrate multiplexing and voice compression, which are downloaded to, and
executed by, DSP cards and modules at the request of the network operator
maintenance of a nonvolatile database describing the system configuration
system integrity activities including background maintenance, diagnostic and
fault isolation activities, and alarm and statistics gathering and reporting
activities
generation, termination, and routing of messages between network equipment
including:
network management products and the NMTI
3600 MainStreet systems
node elements with on-card HDLC such as ATM Services, FRS/SRIM,
DCP, CPC, Dual 1.544 Mb/s T1, Dual 1.544 Mb/s T1-2, Dual 2.048 Mb/s
E1 and Dual 2.048 Mb/s E1-2 cards, and DTUs
In addition to providing the common control and node management functions

listed above, the SCC3(8+) provides double-bandwidth switching capacity for
single-shelf, control-redundant system configurations.
Expander cards
The Expander card and its modules provide additional switching matrix resources.
Depending on which Expander card variant is used, it can either provide capacity
for an additional two cards, or it can enable double bandwidth for some
configurations. Each variant is built by adding an Expander module to the basic
Expander card (6+6). Expander modules are separately orderable.
For all configurations except single-shelf, control-redundant configurations, the
type of Expander card and network management product used determines
whether a UCS supports single or double bandwidth, and indicates the total
number of DS0s supported.
Table 3-4 lists the Expander cards and modules available to meet specific site
applications.
113
A closer view
Table 3-4: Expander cards

Description
Includes
Expander
module
Part
number
Number of
shelves
supported
Total
number of
UCSs
Double-bandwidth
UCSs
DX (Mb/s)
No Expander card
installed
12
Expander (6+6)
90-0035-01
12
24
Expander (6+6)
Class B
90-0035-08
12
24
Expander (6+2)
90-0074-01
90-0035-02
0 or 2 (1)
16 or 20 (2)
Expander (8+8)
90-0075-01
90-0035-03
16
0 or 4 (1)
32 or 40 (3)
Expander (16+) (4)
90-0075-02
90-0035-05
Expander (16+)
Class B (4)
90-0075-02
90-0035-09
64
16
16
64
64
16
16
64
Notes
1. All UCSs are single bandwidth if the Alcatel 5620 NM is used. UCS 7 and 8 provide double bandwidth if the Alcatel 5620 NM is not
used.
2. The DX matrix capacity is 16 Mb/s if the Alcatel 5620 NM is used and 20 Mb/s if the Alcatel 5620 NM is not used.
3. The DX matrix capacity is 32 Mb/s if the Alcatel 5620 NM is used and 40 Mb/s if the Alcatel 5620 NM is not used.
4. The Expander card (16+) is supported by SCC3 only.
Balanced Transceiver card
Balanced Transceiver cards are used in dual-shelf configurations to provide the link
between the common control cards in one shelf and the UCSs in the other.
Balanced Transceiver cards are half the height of other cards and are installed in
either the upper or lower position on a Balanced Transceiver Carrier card. The
Upper and Lower Balanced Transceiver cards can be installed and removed
independently using standard card ejectors. Figure 3-11 shows the Upper Balanced
Transceiver card designed for Class B and 23-inch shelves.
114
3. Design
Figure 3-11: Class B and 23-inch shelf Balanced Transceiver card
Upper
Transceiver
Upper Balanced
Transceiver card
Active
Status
Position for
Lower Balanced
Transceiver card
(not shown)
Balanced
Transceiver
Carrier card
6077
General Facilities cards
The optional GFC2 and GFC3 provide extensive maintenance and diagnostic
capabilities based on order wire, test port, and tone generator functionality. The
GFC2 and GFC3 provide both digital and metallic, and split and monitor test
access; the GFC3 also provides metallic test access, a digital and analog tone tester,
DS0 test access, and BER test access. Only one GFC2 or GFC3 is required in each
shelf or shelf pair.
Note: the GFC3R variant of the GFC3 (part number 90-3085-05) does not support
order wires.
Power section
In all Class A and EMC shelves, the power section is in front of the equipment
interface area and includes a removable power tray on which the ac or dc power
supplies, power distribution box, and circuit breakers are mounted. The power tray
accommodates two load-sharing power supplies for redundancy. Alternatively, the
power tray can accommodate one power supply and one internal ringing
generator. When closed, the power tray protects the cables in the equipment
interface area.
In 23-inch shelves, the power section has two slots for a single or redundant
load-sharing pair of dc power supply units. These power supply units are
immediately accessible from the front of the shelf and can be installed and removed
independently while the shelf power is on.
Updated April 2007
115
A closer view
Backplane architecture
Figure 3-12 shows the architecture of the 3600 MainStreet backplane in a dual-shelf
system (shelves A and B). Three bidirectional, 2 Mb/s serial links connect each UCS
with common control across the backplane. An additional three links connect each
UCS to the redundant common control cards.
With this multiple serial link approach, as opposed to the more common bus
architecture, there are no bus contention problems. Communication between UCS
cards and common control cards is nonblocking and is independent of other UCS
cards. For example, UCS cards can be removed and inserted while the system is
powered up, with no effect on adjacent cards.
Figure 3-12: Shelf backplane architecture on 3600 MainStreet single-shelf and dual-shelf
systems
Common
control
(shelf A)
Main
serial bus
System
control bus
Redundant
common
control
(shelf B)
Main
serial bus
Mate
serial bus
UCS
1
shelf
A
Mate
serial bus
UCS
2
shelf
B
UCS
8
shelf
A
UCS
9
shelf
B
UCS
15
shelf
A
UCS
16
shelf
B
Interface bus
(to external equipment connector)
11044
Backplane and equipment

interface connectors
The backplane electrically interconnects card slots and the external connectors in
the equipment interface area. On Class A shelves, equipment interface area
connectors are behind the power tray. On Class B and 23-inch equipment shelves,
equipment interface area connectors protrude through the rear of the shelf.
The equipment interface area includes connectors for the Dual Shelf Cable
Assembly or Balanced Transceiver connections, external equipment such as a PBX
or distribution panel, and two SCC3 or SCC3(8+) serial ports.
In the Class A shelf, the equipment interface section is behind the power tray, where
there are connectors for intershelf connections and connections to external
equipment. In the Class B and 23-inch shelf variants, the equipment interface
section is at the rear of the shelf, where all external connections can be made to
shielded connectors.
116
3. Design
Visual status indicators
All common control and UCS cards provide faceplate status LEDs. The Class B and
23-inch shelf variants also provide power supply status LEDs and system alarm
LEDs. These LEDs are driven by the Alarm module 2 installed on the GFC2.
Single-bandwidth
and
double-bandwidth
options
All 3600 MainStreet systems support double-bandwidth applications. This allows

for up to 62 DS0s of user data for each UCS, instead of 31 DS0s supported by each
UCS card on single-bandwidth systems.
Different UCS cards have different bandwidth requirements. For example, a 6-port
E&M card can never access more than six DS0 channels, while the Dual 2.048 Mb/s
E1 and Dual 2.048 Mb/s E1-2 cards can access up to 62 DS0s. Table 3-5 lists the
UCS cards that can access more than 31 DS0s.
Table 3-5: UCS cards that support double-bandwidth configuration
Double bandwidth for

single-shelf and dual-shelf
systems
Card
Number of DS0s accessible
28LC line card
61
2B1Q
43
ATM Services card (4 Mb/s)
60
DSP1, DSP2, DSP3, DSP4 (SRS application)
48
Dual 1.544 Mb/s T1
48
Dual 1.544 Mb/s T1-2
48
Dual 2.048 Mb/s E1
62
Dual 2.048 Mb/s E1-2
62
FRE
62
FRS/SRIM
62
PE
62
RS-422 DCC
62
Expander cards are required to achieve double bandwidth for some configurations.
Table 3-6 shows the card components for single- and double-bandwidth versions
for single-shelf and dual-shelf systems.
117
A closer view
Table 3-6: Single- and double-bandwidth configurations for single-shelf and dual-shelf systems
System
configuration
Control
redundant
Bandwidth
SCC3
SCC3(8+)
Balanced
Transceiver
card
Expander
card
Number of
UCSs
Single shelf
No
Single
None
6 single b/w
(6+2)
8 single b/w
(6+2)
6 single b/w and

2 double b/w
(16+)
8 double b/w
Double
Yes
Dual-shelf
No
Yes
8 double b/w
Single
6 single b/w
Double
8 double b/w
Single
(6+6)
12 single b/w
(8+8)
16 single b/w
Double
(16+)
16 double b/w
Single
(6+6)
12 single b/w
(8+8)
16 single b/w
(16+)
16 double b/w
Double
Multishelf system
configurations
A 3600 MainStreet multishelf system is built using the following shelves:
switching shelf
Switching shelves are available as Class A, Class B, and 23-inch variants.
peripheral shelf
Peripheral shelves are available as Class A, Class B, and 23-inch variants and are
the same shelf types as those used in single-shelf or dual-shelf systems. Shelves
from single-shelf or dual-shelf systems can be reconfigured as peripheral
shelves on a multishelf system.
high-speed peripheral shelves
HSPS and HSPS2 shelves support public carrier-compatible, high-order
interface cards.
Refer to Table 3-1 for details about shelf variants and characteristics.
A minimal 3600 MainStreet multishelf system consists of at least one switching
shelf and at least one peripheral shelf or one HSPS. A multishelf system can be
configured for up to eight peripheral shelf pairs, up to eight DS-3 II cards (or eight
redundant DS-3 II card pairs) in HSPSs, and up to eight Single or Dual E3 cards (or
eight redundant E3 card pairs) in HSPS2s.
118
3. Design
A 3600 MainStreet multishelf system may have both HSPSs and HSPS2s or neither
(if neither DS3 nor E3 links are required). When either HSPS is used, there are three
configuration options:
up to eight cards can be installed in a single HSPS

eight redundant card pairs can be installed in two HSPSs (four pairs in each
shelf)
each card (or redundant card pair) can be installed in an HSPS of its own to
provide power supply redundancy for each DS3 or E3 link
The switching shelf can be duplicated for redundancy, using a second shelf to
support control, aggregate interface, and power and ringing generator redundancy.
The peripheral shelf can be configured in one of three ways to match different
service requirements:
single-shelf
dual-shelf (peripheral shelf pair)
dual-shelf, control-redundant
Figure 3-13 shows nonredundant and fully redundant multishelf systems using a
HSPS DS3 interface. For E3 sites, the HSPS DS-3 II card would be replaced by an
HSPS2 E3 card.
Upgrades
Peripheral shelves in multishelf systems are identical to those used in single-shelf

and dual-shelf systems. Upgrades of existing installations are performed by
exchanging the Expander card with a Switching Interface card and installing new
firmware on the SCC3. All other common control, interface and application cards,
cables, and distribution panels remain unchanged.
With a minimum of two FRE or PE cards and the addition of the FASTbus,
a 3600 MainStreet multishelf system is easily upgraded for high-capacity frame
relay switching. The FASTbus is a fully redundant FDDI ring that provides
100 MB/s connectivity between up to 64 FRE or PE cards.
119
A closer view
Figure 3-13: Examples of 3600 MainStreet multishelf configurations

Fully redundant system:
3600 MainStreet
peripheral shelf
UU
CC
S S
1 2
...
3600 MainStreet
switching shelf (A)
U S S BG
CC I T F
S C
C
3
2
S S
W W
8 (a)(a)
1 2
Redundant
intershelf
cards & cables
9 10
DD
S S
3 3
S C
C L
CK
3
...
1 2
U S S B
CC I T
S C
3
. . . 16 (b)(b)
...
DS3 link:
interface protection (shown)
access protection capability
2 sets
3600 MainStreet
peripheral shelf
UU
CC
S S
3600 MainStreet
HSPS
3600 MainStreet
switching shelf (B)
S S
W W
1 2
Intershelf communication via

Clock cards and redundant
switching shelf cable
S C
C L
CK
3
...
Nonredundant system:
3600 MainStreet
peripheral shelf
UU
CC
S S
1 2
...
3600 MainStreet
switching shelf
U S S BG
CC I T F
S C
C
3
2
S S
W W
1 2
3600 MainStreet
peripheral shelf
UU
CC
S S
U
C
S
9 10
. . . 16
B
T
Peripheral shelf pair
3600 MainStreet
HSPS
D
S
3
S C
C L
CK
3
...
1 2
Switching
interface cable
up to 7.5 m (25 ft) long
Switching - DS3
interface cable
up to 7.5 m (25 ft) long
Intershelf communication via

Balanced Transceiver cards and
the dual shelf cable assembly
A/a = Active component

B/b = Backup component
...
BT
CLK
DS3
GFC2
SCC3
SI
SW
UCS
DS3
link
= Balanced Transceiver card

= Clock card
= DS-3 II card
= General Facilities card 2
= System Control card 3
= Switching Interface card
= Switching card
= Universal card slot
7927
120
3. Design
Switching shelves
In multishelf systems, the 3600 MainStreet switching matrix resides in a single

switching shelf. For redundancy, a second identically configured shelf can be
added. The switching shelf is divided into four functional sections:
common control
switching
power
equipment interface
Figure 3-14 shows the three switching shelf variants and identifies section locations.
Figure 3-14: Switching shelves available for 3600 MainStreet multishelf systems
Class A
Class B
Critical Alarm
Critical Alarm
3600 MainStreet
Power
section
3600 MainStreet
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
PS1
5A
PS2
5A
PS1
5A
PS2
5A
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Power
Power
Power
Power
slots 1 to 8
9 10
slots 1 to 8
9 10
Switching
section
Common
control
section
Switching
section
Common
control
section
Power
section
23-inch
Critical Alarm
3600 MainStreet
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Power Supply
Card
0VR
- BATT
+5
-5
+ 12
- 12
GND
Alarm
Status
Power Supply
Card
Power
section
0VR
- BATT
+5
-5
+ 12
- 12
GND
Alarm
Status
slots 1 to 8
9 10
Switching
section
Common
control
section
15145
121
A closer view
Slots 9 and 10 make up the common control section. Slot 9 is reserved for a Clock
card, and slot 10 is reserved for an SCC3.
The Clock card receives external and derived timing inputs from switching shelf
and peripheral shelf timing sources, and generates and distributes system timing
signals to all attached equipment.
The switching shelf SCC3 contains Generic C118 system software stored in a
DMM. This card provides all common control and node management functions.
Functions performed by the SCC3 include:
executing system software

managing the ANS and CPSS protocols
managing the configuration database
controlling system clocks
interfacing with a node or network manager
Switching section
The switching section is made up of eight slots (1 to 8) reserved for Switching cards.
Each peripheral shelf (Switching Interface card), HSPS (DS-3 II card), or HSPS2
(Single or Dual E3 card) is connected to a Switching card using switching interface
cables. Each Switching card provides a 64 Mb/s fully nonblocking DS0 DCS used
by the switching shelf SCC3 to provide all cross-connection services required by the
attached peripheral shelf, HSPS, or HSPS2.
Power section
In all 19-inch switching shelf variants, the power section is reserved for a power tray
equipped with a single or redundant load-sharing pair of ac or dc power supplies.
The power tray can be pulled out (while the shelf power is on) to allow the
replacement of a failed power supply and to provide access to the equipment
interface area (located behind the power tray in the Class A switching shelf). The
Class B switching shelf provides power supply status indicators on the faceplate of
the power tray.
In the 23-inch switching shelf, the power section is reserved for a single or
redundant load-sharing pair of dc power supply units. These power supply units
are immediately accessible from the front of the shelf and can be independently
installed and removed for quick field replacement while the shelf power is on.
Power status indicators are provided on the faceplate of each power supply unit.
Equipment interface
section
In the Class A switching shelf, external equipment and intershelf connections are
made to connectors located behind the power tray. In the Class B and 23-inch
switching shelf variants, all external connections can be made to shielded
connectors that protrude through a bulkhead at the rear of the shelf.
All common control and Switching cards provide faceplate status LEDs. The
Class B and 23-inch switching shelf variants also provide power supply status LEDs
and system alarm LEDs.
122
3. Design
Architecture
Figure 3-15 shows the architecture of the switching shelf. Each Switching card
writes data to one of the eight switching buses and reads data from all eight buses.
This flexible, nonblocking architecture has a transit delay of only one frame
(125 ms) and allows in-service switching upgrades (that is, additional Switching
cards can be added without interruption to existing services). The SCC3 maintains
a nonvolatile database containing the system switching configuration, and tells
each Switching card when to read from or write to each bus.
In addition to controlling the node switching matrix, the switching shelf SCC3 is
used to provide:
overall node control, timing, synchronization, and alarm logging

generation, termination, and routing of CPSS messages between peripheral
shelves, DS-3 II or E3 cards, and the switching shelfs two serial ports
switching shelf integrity activities including maintenance, diagnostic, and fault
isolation activities
Figure 3-15: Switching shelf backplane architecture of 3600 MainStreet multishelf systems
Switching shelf 2
Switching shelf 1
Common
control
(shelf 1)
Serial
bus
Switching
card
1
Switching
card
2
UCS
1
UCS
16
Peripheral shelf
(single or dual)
Switching
card
8
DS-3 II or
E3 card
(redundant
pair)
DS-3 II
or E3
card
Main
interface
(MX) bus
Mate
interface
(MX) bus
Switching
Interface
card
Switching
card
3
Switching
Interface
card
UCS
1
UCS
16
Peripheral shelf
(single or dual)
HSPS or HSPS2
4803
123
A closer view
Peripheral shelves
The peripheral shelf provides aggregate, voice, and data interfaces, and special
application functions. Peripheral shelves are divided into four functional sections:
common control
interface
power
equipment interface
Sites typically deploy peripheral shelves in pairs, since the common control section
can support 16 UCSs, with 8 UCSs in each shelf. Figure 3-16 shows the three
peripheral shelf variants and identifies the section locations.
Figure 3-16: Peripheral shelves
Class A
Class B
Critical Alarm
3600 MainStreet
3600 MainStreet
Power
section
PS1
5A
PS2
5A
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
PS1
5A
PS2
5A
Alarm
Alarm
Power
Power
slots 1 to 8
9 to 12
slots 1 to 8
9 to 12
Interface
section
Common
control
section
Interface
section
Common
control
section
Power
section
23-inch
3600 MainStreet
Critical Alarm
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Power Supply
Card
0VR
- BATT
+5
-5
+ 12
- 12
GND
Alarm
Status
Power Supply
Card
Power
section
0VR
- BATT
+5
-5
+ 12
- 12
GND
Alarm
Status
slots 1 to 8
9 to 12
Interface
section
Common
control
section
15146
124
3. Design
The common control section is made up of four slots (9 through 12) reserved for
an SCC3, Switching Interface card, Balanced Transceiver card, and GFC2 or GFC3,
respectively.
The SCC3, Balanced Transceiver card, GFC2, and GFC3 provide the same
functionality as when they are used in a single-shelf or dual-shelf system.
The Switching Interface card is connected to a switching shelf Switching card and
provides the link between the peripheral shelf and the switching shelf.
Interface section
The interface section on a peripheral shelf is made up of eight UCSs (slots 1 to 8).
Each peripheral shelf pair supports up to 16 UCSs reserved for any combination of
the same aggregate, voice interface, data interface, and application cards as those
used for single-shelf and dual-shelf systems (see Table 3-2).
Power section
In the Class A and Class B peripheral shelf variants, the power section is reserved
for a power tray equipped with a single or redundant load-sharing pair of ac or dc
power supplies. The power tray can be pulled out (while the shelf power is on) to
allow the replacement of a failed power supply and to provide access to the
equipment interface area, which is located behind the power tray in the Class A
peripheral shelf. The Class B peripheral shelf provides power supply status
indicators on the faceplate of the power tray.
In the 23-inch peripheral shelf, the power section is reserved for a single or
redundant load-sharing pair of dc power supply units. These power supply units
are accessible from the front of the shelf to facilitate quick field replacement. They
can be installed and removed independently while the shelf power is on. Power
status indicators are on the faceplate of each power supply unit.
Equipment interface
section
In the Class A peripheral shelf, the equipment interface section is behind the power
tray, where there are connectors for intershelf connections and connections to
external equipment.
In the Class B and 23-inch peripheral shelf variants, the equipment interface
section is at the rear of the shelf, where all external connections can be made to
shielded connectors that protrude through a bulkhead.
All common control and UCS cards provide faceplate status LEDs. The Class B and
23-inch peripheral shelf variants also provide power supply status LEDs and system
alarm LEDs. These LEDs are driven by the Alarm module 2 installed on the
Clock card.
125
A closer view
Architecture
Figure 3-17 shows the architecture of the peripheral shelf. Three bidirectional,
2 Mb/s serial links connect each UCS with common control across the backplane.
An additional three links connect each UCS to the redundant common control
cards.
With this multiple serial link approach, as opposed to the more common bus
architecture, there are no bus contention problems. Communication between UCS
cards and common control cards is nonblocking and is independent of other UCS
cards. For example, UCS cards can be removed and inserted while the system is
powered up, with no effect on adjacent cards.
Figure 3-17: Peripheral shelf backplane architecture, 3600 MainStreet multishelf system
Switching
shelf 1
Common
control
(shelf A)
Main
serial bus
Switching
interface
cables
System
control bus
Switching
shelf 2
Redundant
common
control
(shelf B)
Main
serial bus
Mate
serial bus
UCS
1
shelf
A
Mate
serial bus
UCS
2
shelf
B
UCS
8
shelf
A
UCS
9
shelf
B
UCS
15
shelf
A
UCS
16
shelf
B
Interface bus
(to external equipment connector)
4698
126
3. Design
High-speed
peripheral shelves
The HSPS provides an enclosure and power for up to eight 44.736 Mb/s
DS-3 II cards. The HSPS2 provides an enclosure and power for up to eight 34 Mb/s
Single or Dual E3 cards.
Common control is integral to DS-3 II and E3 cards; separate common control
cards are not required.
Multiple HSPSs or HSPS2s can be used in redundancy configurations. For
example, the eight E3 cards necessary to provide four fully redundant E3 interfaces
can reside in one HSPS2, or in up to four HSPS2s (that is, one redundant interface
in each shelf).
Each DS-3 II or E3 card, or redundant card pair, is connected to a switching shelf
Switching card by switching interface cables.
The HSPS and HSPS2 are divided into three functional sections:
interface
power
equipment interface
Figure 3-18 shows section locations in the HSPS and HSPS2.
Figure 3-18: High-speed peripheral shelves for use in 3600 MainStreet multishelf systems
Interface
section
Slots 1a, 1b to 4a, 4b
3600 MainStreet
1a
Power
section
4b
Power
section
Fibre card
slots
1a
4b
Integral
heat
deflector
Slots 1a, 1b to 4a, 4b
9 to 12
Slots 1 to 8
Interface
section
Reserved
for future use
Equipment
interface section (includes fiber)
HSPS
HSPS2
7652
127
A closer view
Interface section
In the HSPS and HSPS2, the interface section is made up of eight slots (1a, 1b to 4a,
4b), which are reserved for 44.736 Mb/s DS-3 II cards and 34 Mb/s E3 cards,
respectively. The interface section supports the following aggregate cards:
44.736 Mb/s DS-3 II card

34.368 Mb/s E3 card
Dual 34.368 Mb/s E3 card
Fibre card (on HSPS2 only)
For DS-3 II or E3 common control redundancy combined with access or interface

protection, two redundant DS-3 II or E3 cards must be placed side-by-side in
adjacent slot pairs (1a and 1b, 2a and 2b, 3a and 3b, or 4a and 4b). DS-3 II and E3
cards can use any interface section slot in their respective shelves for nonredundant
configurations.
Power section
In the HSPS, the power section is reserved for a power tray equipped with a single
or redundant load-sharing pair of ac or dc power supplies. The power tray can be
pulled out (while the shelf power is on) to allow the replacement of a failed power
supply and to provide access to the equipment interface area, which is located
behind the power tray in the HSPS.
In the HSPS2, the power section is reserved for a single or redundant load-sharing
pair of dc power supply units. These power supply units are immediately accessible
from the front of the shelf and can be independently installed and removed while
the shelf power is on for quick field replacement. Power status indicators are
provided on the faceplate of each power supply unit.
Equipment interface
section
In the HSPS, intershelf connections are made to connectors located behind the
power tray. DS3 trunk connections are made to shielded connectors that protrude
through a bulkhead at the rear of the shelf. The HSPS supports metallic trunk
access.
In the HSPS2, all external connections can be made to shielded connectors that
protrude through a bulkhead at the rear of the shelf. Single E3 cards support both
metallic and fiber trunk access. Dual E3 cards support metallic trunk access.
Metallic trunk access is provided by BNC connectors on the bulkhead.
For fiber trunk access, Fibre card slots are positioned below the interface section.
The Fibre card provides the interface between a Single E3 card and a fiber E3 trunk.
A Fibre card is installed below the appropriate Single E3 card.
128
All DS-3 II and E3 cards provide faceplate status LEDs. The HSPS2 also provides
power supply status LEDs and system alarm LEDs.
3. Design
Architecture
Figures 3-19 and 3-20 illustrate the architecture of the HSPS and HSPS2,
respectively.
DS3 and E3 switching interface cables connect each DS-3 II or E3 card with the
main and redundant switching shelf.
When configured as redundant card pairs in a 3600 MainStreet multishelf system,
the backplane connects each DS-3 II or E3 card to its mate. When a Single E3 card
on an HSPS2 is configured for fiber trunk access, the backplane connects the E3
card to its corresponding Fibre card. In a redundant card configuration, the
backplane also connects each Single E3 card to its mate Fibre card.
Figure 3-19: HSPS backplane architecture (3600 MainStreet multishelf system)
Common
control
(switching
shelf 1)
Main
interface
(MX) bus
Common
control
(switching
shelf 2)
Main
interface
(MX) bus
Mate
interface
(MX) bus
DS-3 II
card
1
Mate
interface
(MX) bus
DS-3 II
card
2
To external equipment
connectors
(BNC)
DS-3 II
card
3
DS-3 II
card
4
Mate DS-3 II card

serial bus
DS-3 II
card
7
DS-3 II
card
8
DS3
signal bus
4802
129
A closer view
Figure 3-20: HSPS2 backplane architecture (3600 MainStreet multishelf system)

Common
control
(switching
shelf 1)
Main
interface
(MX) bus
Common
control
(switching
shelf 2)
Main
interface
(MX) bus
Mate
interface
(MX) bus
DE3
or
SE3
card
1a
Mate
interface
(MX) bus
DE3
or
SE3
card
1b
DE3
signal
bus
DE3
or
SE3
card
2a
DE3
or
SE3
card
2b
Mate
E3 card
serial
bus
to external
equipment connectors
(bulkhead BNC for DE3 or SE3)
SE3
card
4a
SE3
card
4a
Main
control
bus
Main
signal
bus
Mate
control
bus
Mate
control
bus
Main
control
bus
Main
signal
bus
Mate
control
bus
Mate
control
bus
Fibre
card
Fibre
card
TX RX
fibre
TX RX
fibre
Note: SE3 and DE3 mean Single and Dual E3 cards.

7960
Power supplies
Although each shelf requires only one power supply to operate, each shelf can be
configured with a redundant pair of power supplies. Redundant power supplies
operate together in load-sharing mode, each one ready to power the shelf alone
should the other fail. Power supply alarms are supported.
Load-sharing ac power supplies are configured with single or dual input feeds. The
dc supplies, which support single- or dual-input feed configurations, are designed
to operate from CO or exchange station batteries. (For ac and dc power supply
input specifications, see chapter 12.)
There are two types of power supplies:
those installed in the power tray of a 19-inch shelf

those installed in special slots of the HSPS2 and 23-inch switching and
peripheral shelves
130
3. Design
Class A and Class B shelf

power supply trays
As shown in Figure 3-21, power supplies are mounted in a removable tray installed
in the power section of all 19-inch switching and peripheral shelf variants.
The power tray can be pulled out for service while the system is under power. In a
shelf with a single power supply, a second redundant power supply can be installed
without interrupting service. In a shelf with dual power supplies, a power supply
can be replaced without interrupting service.
Power trays (comprising one tray with one or two power supplies installed) and
power supply upgrade kits (comprising one individual power supply) are available
for both ac and dc inputs. Single power supply power trays can be provisioned with
a second redundant power supply or one internal ringing generator.
Figure 3-21: Class A and Class B shelf power supply trays
Equipment
interface area
Power tray
Power supply 2
Power supply 1
Power
distribution box
2584
131
A closer view
23-inch shelf and HSPS

Power Supply cards
The 23-inch shelf, HSPS, and HSPS2 support dc Power Supply cards packaged for
installation in special shelf slots. These Power Supply cards are immediately
accessible from the front of the shelf and can be independently installed and
removed while the shelf power is on for quick field replacement. In a shelf with a
single power supply, a second redundant Power Supply card can be installed
without interrupting service. In a shelf with dual power supplies, a Power Supply
card can be replaced without interrupting service. Figure 3-22 shows the Power
Supply card slots. Figure 3-23 shows the Power Supply card on the 23-inch shelf.
Figure 3-22: Position of power supply card slots on the HSPS2 and 23-inch shelves
HSPS2
23-inch
3600 MainStreet
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Power Supply
card slots
Power Supply
card slots
4713
Figure 3-23: Power Supply cards on the 23-inch shelf
3600 MainStreet
Power Supply
Card
0VR
- BATT
+5
-5
+ 12
- 12
GND
Alarm
Status
Upper
Transceiver
Activity
Status
Power Supply
Card
Activity
Status
0V
- BATT
+ 5V
- 5V
+ 12V
- 12V
GND
Alarm
Lower
Transceiver
Power
15052
132
3. Design
Ringing generators
All 3600 MainStreet systems use ringing generators to supply a high-power

alternating current to an LGS or MRD interface. This informs a connected device
(telephone, PBX, or key system) of an incoming call and drives the ringer on the
destination telephone.
Ringing voltage may be used by the same LGS or MRD interface (depending on the
site and the type of LGS interface) and is only required by peripheral shelves
equipped with LGS cards, or LGS or MRD channel units (see chapter 7). Ringing
voltage is not used on switching shelves, HSPSs, or HSPS2s. All peripheral shelf
variants (Class A, Class B, and 23-inch) support ringing voltage.
Ringing voltage can be supplied by an Alcatel ringing generator or by a non-Alcatel
CO or customer-premises ringing generator. Peripheral shelves provide
connectors to support non-Alcatel sources of ringing voltage.
The Alcatel ringing generator unit supplies 71 to 79 V rms (75 V rms, nominal)
ringing voltage at 16, 20, or 25 Hz (user-selectable). Typically, one unit can provide
ringing voltage for all the LGS and MRD interfaces installed in one shelf (up to eight
12-circuit LGS cards, 32 single-circuit LGS channel units, or 32 MRD channel
units). LGS and MRD interfaces are designed to accommodate a
customer-premises ringing voltage of 65 to 110 V rms from 15 to 25 Hz.
Ringing voltage is usually applied in a specific on-and-off pattern called the ringing
cadence. LGS interfaces follow the cadence specified in the signaling bits of the T1
or E1 CAS link.
When configured for PLAR signaling, LGS interface cadence is controlled by
system software and is set for 2 seconds on, 3 seconds off. MRD interfaces do not
have a set cadence because cadence is controlled by the calling party by adjusting a
button on the telephone set of the calling party. MRD interfaces incorporate a
safety feature that limits continuous ringing to 5 seconds; after 5 seconds of
continuous ringing, the MRD interface forces ringing off for 1 second.
LGS interfaces provide a ringing timeout to protect against link failures while in the
ringing state. The LGS interface will terminate ringing after 10 seconds if there is no
change in the ringing signaling bits.
The Alcatel ringing generator is available in two forms: internal and external.
Internal ringing
generators
As shown in Figure 3-24, an Alcatel ringing generator can be installed in a Class A

or Class B peripheral shelf with a single power supply. A non-Alcatel ringing
generator can be installed only in a Class B peripheral shelf.
Internal ringing generators are not supported in Class A and Class B locally
controlled shelves, peripheral shelves equipped with redundant power supplies, or
23-inch locally controlled peripheral shelves.
133
A closer view
Figure 3-24: Internal ringing generators
Ringing
generator
Ringing
generator
ground cable
4648
External ringing
generators
External ringing generators are required for systems with shelves that cannot
support internal ringing generators, or systems that require redundant ringing
generators. External ringing generators can be installed in dual power supply
systems.
An external Alcatel or non-Alcatel ringing generator can be connected to a Class A,
Class B, or 23-inch peripheral shelf. When installed externally, Alcatel ringing
generators can be configured in redundant pairs to equip shelves requiring
redundant ringing generators.
The Alcatel external ringing generator is a 19-inch, rack-mount assembly that
consists of up to four ringing generators (for use in redundant or nonredundant
configurations) installed in a rack-mounted enclosure complete with power
distribution, external connectors, and status LEDs. The Alcatel external ringing
generator provides:
input voltage operational range of 38 to 75 V dc

dual dc inputs for dc feed redundancy on a separate connector
customer-selectable ringing frequency and dc bias
pull-out tray from the front panel for easy access to ringing units
Figure 3-25 shows an Alcatel external ringing generator assembly, which can
accommodate up to four ringing generators.
134
3. Design
Figure 3-25: Alcatel external ringing generator assembly
Shelf A
Ringing
Gen. 1
Ringing
Gen. 2
Alarm
Shelf B
Ringing
Ringing
Gen. 1
Gen. 2
Alarm
7576
Cooling equipment
In some multiple rack and/or shelf configurations, cooling is required. For these
configurations, a passive heat deflector or a fan unit can be installed to provide
convection or forced air cooling.
Both heat deflectors and fan units require only 8.9 cm (3.5 in. or 2 RU) of vertical
rack space. The 23-inch switching and peripheral shelves and the HSPS2s provide
an integrated heat deflector. Fan units provide a front-accessed air filter and
integrated heat deflector. Fan tray power is supplied by the shelf through a
connector on the shelf backplane. Fan tray alarms are supported.
Figure 3-26 shows that a heat deflector installed above a shelf provides convection
cooling. The heat generated in the shelf rises, drawing ambient (cool) air behind it.
The heat deflector forces the hot air to the rear of the shelf where it is exhausted.
Figure 3-26: Convection cooling
Passive heat deflector
(built-in for a 23-inch shelf)
Heat
exhaust
Front
Rear
Shelf
Ambient
(cool)
air
6324
135
A closer view
Figure 3-27 shows that a heat deflector and a fan tray installed above and below a
shelf, respectively, provide forced air cooling. The fan tray draws ambient (cool) air
through its intake at the front, passes it through the air filter, and forces the air up
through the shelf where it is exhausted to the rear by the heat deflector.
Figure 3-27: Forced air cooling
Passive heat deflector
or fan tray
Heat
exhaust
Front
Rear
Shelf
Ambient
(cool)
air
Fan tray
Ambient air
intake
Integral
heat deflector
6325
Distribution panels
Distribution panels are optional rack-mounted units used to manage the physical
connection of external equipment to locally controlled shelves, peripheral shelves,
and HSPSs. Alcatel offers distribution panels for DCCs, Dual T1-2, Dual E1,
Dual E1-2, ATM Services and BRI S/T cards, and fiber trunk access on the HSPS2.
DCC distribution panels
Each peripheral shelf UCS is associated with a 25-pair connector in the shelf
bulkhead/equipment interface area. Its pin and signal assignment is determined by
the type of card installed in the corresponding UCS. When a multicircuit DCC is
installed, each circuit is assigned to certain wire pairs on this connector (and
sometimes to a DCC faceplate connector as well). DCC distribution panels are used
to break out individual circuits from the 25-pair equipment interface connector (or
DCC faceplate connector) and deliver these circuits to separate connectors of the
type specified by the data interface. For example, the RS-422 DCC uses the UDP
(see Figure 3-28), which accommodates any combination of up to four RS-530,
RS-449/V.36, V.35, and X.21 interface modules.
136
3. Design
Figure 3-28: RS-422 DCC and Universal Distribution Panel

Equipment interface
connector: circuits 1 to 2
RS-422
Card
RS-422
DCC
Ready 1
2
3
4
Status
Faceplate
connector:
circuits 3 to 4
Universal
Distribution Panel
RS-530 RS-449/V.36 X.21

circuit
circuit
circuit
1
2
3
V.35
circuit
4
6420
Table 3-7 lists the DCC distribution panels available. Installation instructions and
pin and signal information are included with each distribution panel.
Table 3-7: DCC distribution panels
Interface type
Number of
circuits
Connector type
TIA/EIA-232
Female DB25
X.21
Female DB15
V.35
Female DB25
Female M34
Male/female DB15, DB25, DB37,

and/or M34
TIA/EIA-422
137
A closer view
PRI RJ45 Distribution

Panel
PRI RJ45 Distribution Panels provide a means to connect NT devices to Dual T1-2,
Dual E1, Dual E1-2, and ATM Services cards (T1, 100 or E1, 120 ).
Figures 3-29 and 3-30 show the PRI RJ45 Distribution Panels. All connectors are
located on the rear of the distribution panels.
One PRI RJ45 Distribution Panel variant has one 25-pair I/O connector and eight
RJ45 connectors (see Figure 3-29). The other variants have two 25-pair I/O
connectors and eight RJ45 connectors (see Figure 3-30).
Each RJ45 connector corresponds to one T1 or E1 link and provides one transmit
and receive pair. The 25-pair I/O connectors connect the RJ45 connectors to UCSs.
Figure 3-29: PRI RJ45 Distribution Panel with one 25-pair I/O connector
PRI RJ45
Distribution Panel
Front
Chassis
Ground
I/O Connector
Rear
15053
Figure 3-30: PRI RJ45 Distribution Panel with two 25-pair I/O connectors
PRI RJ45
Distribution Panel
Front
Chassis
Ground
Port 1
Configuration A - 8 Port I/O (A1 - A8)
Port 2
Configuration A - Not Connected
Configuration B - 4 Port I/O (A1 - A4)
Configuration B - 4 Port I/O (B1 - B4)
Port 1
(A1-A8/A1-A4)
Port 2
(N.C./B1-B4)
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
B3
B4
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5/ A6/ A7/ A8/

B1 B2 B3 B4
Rear
15054
138
3. Design
Table 3-8 lists the PRI RJ45 Distribution Panel variants, and the cards and number
of NT devices they support.
Table 3-8: PRI RJ45 Distribution Panels
PRI BNC Distribution

Panels
Distribution Panel
variant
Cards supported
Number of NT
devices supported
90-2635-01
Dual T1-2, Dual E1, and Dual E1-2
90-6464-01
ATM Services (T1, 100 or E1, 120 )
4 or 8 (2 4)
The PRI BNC Distribution Panel provides a means to connect four or eight NT
devices to an ATM Services card (E1, 75 ).
Figure 3-31 shows the PRI BNC Distribution Panel. All connectors are located on
the rear of the distribution panel.
The rear of the panel has the following components:
two DB78 I/O connectors

eight pairs of BNC connectors
panel configuration switch
ground choice switch
shield ground switches
A pair of BNC connectors connects to an E1 link, providing one transmit and one
receive connector. The DB78 connectors connect the BNC connectors to the UCSs.
Figure 3-31: PRI BNC Distribution Panel
PRI BNC
Distribution Panel
Front
Chassis
Ground
Configuration 1
1 x Octal - Port 1 (A1-A8)
Port 1
Configuration 2
2 x Quad - Port 1 (A1-A4), Port 2 (B1-B4)
Port 2
Chassis
Ground
A1
Tx
A2
Tx
Gnd
Signal
Ground Rx
Rx
Gnd
Port 1
(A1-A8/A1-A4)
Chassis
ground
stud
Port 2
(N.C./B1-B4)
Panel
configuration
switch
A1
Ground
choice
switch
A3
A4
Tx
Gnd
Rx
Gnd
A2
A5/B1
Tx
Gnd
Rx
Gnd
A3
Tx
Gnd
Rx
Gnd
A6/B2
Tx
Gnd
Rx
Gnd
A7/B3
Tx
Gnd
Rx
Gnd
A8/B4
Tx
Gnd
Gnd
Rx
Gnd
Gnd
A4 A5/ A6/ A7/ A8/

B1 B2 B3 B4
Shield
ground
switches
Rear
15055
139
A closer view
S/T BRI Distribution Panel
The S/T BRI Distribution Panel (part number 90-2634-01) provides a means to
connect up to eight TE or NT devices (or a combination of both) to one BRI S/T
card.
As shown in Figure 3-32, the S/T BRI Distribution Panel has one 25-pair I/O
connector and eight circuits (each circuit has two RJ45 connectors) at the rear of
the panel; there are no connectors on the front panel.
Figure 3-32: S/T BRI Distribution Panel
S/T BRI
Distribution Panel
Front
Chassis
Ground
I/O Connector
1
TE
2
NT
TE
3
NT
TE
Rear
4
NT
TE
NT
TE
6
NT
TE
7
NT
TE
8
NT
TE
NT
15056
Each of the eight circuits on the distribution panel is broken out to a pair of RJ45
connectors to accommodate the two operation modes (TE and NT modes), which
are configurable for each of the eight circuits on the BRI S/T card. The 25-pair I/O
connector connects all eight circuits to one UCS in a peripheral shelf.
Fibre Patch Panel
The Fibre Patch Panel is used in 3600 MainStreet multishelf systems to provide
robust external connectorization for fiber trunk access on the HSPS2.
As shown in Figure 3-33, the Fibre Patch Panel physically minimizes the amount of
handling of the main trunk fiber by isolating it from the Fibre card and Single E3
card connections. Fibre cards and Single E3 cards can be installed and removed
without affecting the physical termination of the main trunk fiber. The Fibre Patch
Panel is intended to be mounted directly below the HSPS2.
140
3. Design
Figure 3-33: Fibre Patch Panel with HSPS2
E3
Card
Single E3 card
E-3 Alarm
E-1 Alarm
To E3
trunk
SI Alarm
S1
Active
Status
Fibre card
Transmit
Receive
Fibre Patch
Panel
4411
Data termination
units
DTUs provide desktop connectivity for data devices such as personal computers,
terminals, and modems. DTUs, together with 2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, or 28LC line
cards, or 2B1Q channel units, provide an interface between these data devices and
the 3600 MainStreet system. The line cards or channel units are installed in a
3600 MainStreet shelf, which can be located in a service-providers equipment
building, while the DTUs can be installed at the data device site. Figure 3-34 shows
data devices connected to DTU device ports.
Figure 3-34: Data termination unit installation
25-pair
connector
Line
connector
To data devices
Building
wiring

with 2B1Q interface
Punchdown
block
(Cross-connect
wiring)
Wall jack
(6-pin, RJ-series
female connector)
DTU
10849
141
A closer view
The DTU multiplexes the device ports onto an aggregate link (or line) that
provides:
a 2B+D (two 64 kb/s B channels and one 16 kb/s D channel) interface to the
2B1Q, 27LC2 or 27LC3 line card, or the 2B1Q channel unit, over a single
standard twisted-pair wire
a multirate HDSL interface to the 28LC line card over a single standard
twisted-pair or two standard twisted-pairs
The line cards or channel unit demultiplex the aggregate link into individual
circuits corresponding to each data device.
There are two DTU types:
2700 MainStreet series DTUs

2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU
For 2700 MainStreet series DTUs, the maximum loop length supported depends
on the type of copper cable used and its associated resistance factors. For example,
2700 MainStreet series DTUs support a loop length of up to 7.2 km (4.5 mi) using
24 AWG copper cable with a resistance of 84.14 /km.
For the 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU, the maximum loop length supported
depends on variations in cable characteristics, impedance variations, impulse
noise, electrical noise and crosstalk, and the presence of bridge taps. For example,
the 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU supports a loop length of up to 4.0 km (2.5 mi)
using 26 AWG cable with a data rate of 256 kb/s.
Parameters for the 2700 MainStreet series DTUs are configured through the 2B1Q,
27LC2, or 27LC3 line card, or the 2B1Q channel unit. Parameters for the
2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU are configured through the 28LC line card. For more
information about 2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, and 28LC line cards, and the 2B1Q
channel unit, see chapter 8.
When a data device circuit is configured at a 3600 MainStreet system node, the
configuration is automatically downloaded to the DTU.
DTUs can be installed on a hard, flat, horizontal surface (such as a table top), on a
wall, or in a rack.
142
3. Design
2700 MainStreet series

DTUs
The 2700 MainStreet series DTUs are designed for off-premises applications that
connect data devices to a 2B1Q line card, 27LC2 or 27LC3 line card, or a 2B1Q
channel unit. The 2700 MainStreet series DTUs support ANSI T1.601 Loop Tests
2 through 15, and the Null Loop Test.
All 2700 MainStreet series DTUs provide:
mechanical, electrical, and functional interfacing to external equipment

formatting of data traffic and of the control leads to the B channels
(rate adaption)
echo cancellation for the 2B1Q signal
D-channel CPSS message linking for control and status signals
data traffic and error statistics collection and reporting
line protectors on the 2B1Q transmission line for lightning and surge
protection
maintenance of sealing current (also known as a wet circuit) on the 2B1Q
transmission line
In addition, the 2751, 2752, and 2753 MainStreet DTUs provide:
H-bit signaling
dual ports and port redundancy
power fail detection
software downloading
integral DTU NMTI (maintenance of DTU system)
integral BERT
Table 3-9 lists the 2700 MainStreet series DTUs.

Table 3-9: 2700 MainStreet series DTUs
DTU
Type
Device ports
Number
Interface type
2704 MainStreet DTU
Full-duplex digital line driver
Synchronous or asynchronous with

V.110 rate adaption V.24/TIA/EIA-232
2720 MainStreet DTU
Fixed-link FRAD
Ethernet-attached IP
2721 MainStreet DTU
Fixed-link FRAD
Unlimited
Ethernet-attached IP and/or IPX
2751 MainStreet DTU
Full-duplex digital line driver with data

port redundancy
Synchronous or asynchronous
V.24/TIA/EIA-232
2752 MainStreet DTU

port redundancy
Synchronous or asynchronous
X.21/TIA/EIA-449
2753 MainStreet DTU

port redundancy
Synchronous V.35
143
A closer view
2801 MainStreet HDSL

DTU
The 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU is designed for off-premises applications that
connect a data device to a 28LC line card. The 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU
provides one user-configurable V.35, V.36/TIA/EIA-449, or X.21 serial interface
for 2- or 4-wire connection.
The 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU provides:
mechanical, electrical, and functional interfacing to external equipment

multirate HDSL frame format (data traffic)
echo cancellation for the multirate HDSL signal
software-configurable, speed-for-distance option for the multirate HDSL line
V.13 signaling
integral BERT
software downloading
integral DTU NMTI (configuration and maintenance of DTU system and data
ports)
data port control leads handling
Cables
In addition to external equipment cables, the 3600 MainStreet system uses the
following cables.
Switching interface cable
This cable is used to connect a Switching Interface card to a Switching card. One,
two, or four cables are used, depending on system redundancy. Cables are available
in 3, 5.5, and 7.5 m lengths (10, 18, and 25 ft).
Switching DS3 or E3
interface cable
This cable is used to connect a DS-3 II or E3 card to a Switching card. One, two, or
four cables are used for each logical DS3 or E3 link, depending on system and
interface redundancy options. Cables are available in 3, 5.5, and 7.5 m lengths
(10, 18, and 25 ft).
Dual Shelf Cable Assembly
The Dual Shelf Cable Assembly facilitates system communication between a

peripheral shelf pair. Each assembly includes a pair of half-height Balanced
Transceiver cards (one for each shelf) and cables to connect them. In redundant
common control configurations, a second assembly is required (for a total of four
half-height cards and redundant cables). Cable distance is sufficient to allow the
shelves to be rack-mounted vertically or side by side.
Redundant switching shelf

cable
This assembly consists of two cables that facilitate system communications between
redundant switching shelves. Cable distance is sufficient to allow the shelves to be
rack-mounted vertically or side by side.
144
3. Design
System integrity
All 3600 MainStreet systems support a comprehensive array of redundancy

options, from common control redundancy to the protection of individual circuit
paths. Options designed to protect against events that could lead to link or node
failures (or both) are:
full control redundancy, including all common control logic, core switching
facilities, and intershelf cables

power supply redundancy
circuit path protection at the node level (RAPID)
circuit path protection at the network level (Alcatel 5620 NM AAR)
ISDN leased-line protection (ISDN leased-line backup)
aggregate redundancy measures
fault signaling and trunk conditioning
Control
redundancy
Control redundancy is supported through the duplication of all common control

logic, switching cards, and intershelf cables. The manner in which control
redundancy is achieved depends on the system configuration.
Single-shelf system and

dual-shelf system
Common control cards are designed to perform activity switches with no impact
on data traffic through the node. If a disturbance occurs, it typically persists no
longer than 125 ms. Calls in progress are not dropped. Activity switches can also be
triggered manually by an Alcatel 5620 NM or the NMTI, or triggered automatically
on a daily or weekly basis. Common control redundancy can be set up for both
single-shelf and dual-shelf systems.
Single-shelf system
Two SCC3 cards and an SSR upgrade kit are required to achieve control
redundancy in a single-shelf system.
Dual-shelf system
One SCC3 and one Expander card are required in each shelf of a dual-shelf system
in order to achieve control redundancy. While the common control cards (SCC3
and Expander card) in one shelf control the node, the second (backup) set remains
in hot standby mode. A common control activity switch occurs when system
diagnostics report that problems are being experienced by the active common
control cards, but not by the redundant cards.
145
A closer view
Multishelf system
Switching shelves
At the switching shelf level, the entire shelf is duplicated, including all cards, power
supplies, and cables linking the shelf to peripheral shelves, DS-3 II cards, and E3
cards. While one switching shelf provides overall node control and switching, the
second shelf remains in hot standby mode, ready to assume control in the event of
an activity switch. An activity switch occurs when system diagnostics report that
problems are being experienced by the active shelf, but not by the redundant shelf.
In order of decreasing severity, events causing a switching shelf activity switch are:
the active SCC3 is absent

the active Clock card is absent
an active Switching card is absent, has failed, or has lost communication with
an active peripheral shelf, DS-3 II card, or E3 card
the system reports adverse diagnostics for the cards in the active switching shelf
Peripheral shelves
At the peripheral shelf level, control redundancy is configured by installing SCC3s

and Switching Interface cards in both shelves of a peripheral shelf pair. While the
common control cards in one shelf control the node, the second (backup) set
remains in hot standby mode. A common control activity switch occurs when
system diagnostics report that problems are being experienced by the active
common control cards, but not by the redundant cards.
In order of decreasing severity, the events that cause a peripheral shelf common
control activity switch are:
the active SCC3 is absent

the active Switching Interface card is absent, has failed, or has lost
communication with the active Switching card
the system reports adverse diagnostics for the active SCC3 or Switching
Interface card
Common control cards have been designed to perform activity switches without
any impact on data traffic through the node. If a disturbance should occur, it will
typically persist no longer than 125 s. Calls in progress are not dropped.
High-speed peripheral shelves
The DS-3 II, Single E3 and Dual E3 card integral common control is protected
against failure by redundant DS-3 II, Single E3, and Dual E3 cards, which also
provide access or interface protection. Activity switches can be triggered manually
by a network manager, or automatically on a daily or weekly basis.
146
3. Design
Power supply redundancy
All shelves can be configured with two power supplies that operate in a
load-sharing mode; when one supply fails, there is no disruption. This applies to all
19-inch and Class B shelf variant power supplies, all 23-inch shelf and HSPS2
Power Supply cards, and all power options, such as:
dc
120 V ac (60 Hz)
240 V ac (50 Hz)
When redundant inputs are provided (for example, by redundant CO batteries), dc
power supplies can also be configured for dual input feed.
RAPID protection
switching
RAPID is a node-level response to an out-of-service aggregate link or a resource

failure. RAPID allows a second, alternate cross-connection to be programmed into
the nodes switching database for use when the preferred path (DS0 or super-rate
channel) is unavailable. The Alcatel 5620 NM or the Alcatel Craft Interface Node
Manager can be used to configure RAPID.
When configured, use of the alternate path is automatic and continues until the
preferred path returns to service; intervention by a network manager is not
required at the time of failure. When alternate path bandwidth is routed over leased
lines, it can be used for low-priority connections during normal operation. When
RAPID is invoked, the low-priority connection is interrupted (bumped).
RAPID can also use ISDN as its alternate path. For more information, see ISDN
bandwidth on demand in chapter 2.
RAPID is intended for essential circuits that require immediate reconnection upon
link or resource failure. For circuits that require rerouting but not pre-assigned
alternate bandwidth, use of the Alcatel 5620 NM AAR is recommended.
Figure 3-35 shows RAPID protection for a typical network. An n 56 kb/s
super-rate data connection between San Francisco and New York is RAPID
protected by an alternate path through Dallas.
147
A closer view
Figure 3-35: RAPID path protection using an alternate leased line path
Preferred path
Red Alarm
declared
Fault
T1
OOS
3600
MainStreet
node
San Francisco
DS3
OOS
3600
MainStreet
node
Chicago
Alternate
path
OOS
T1
3600
MainStreet
node
New York
Alternate
path
3600
MainStreet
node
Dallas
10846
At both the San Francisco and New York nodes, the data channel is crossconnected to the aggregate link that travels through Chicago. To ensure availability
of service should a fault occur anywhere along this preferred route, the San
Francisco and New York nodes are programmed with a second network
cross-connection which, in this example, travels through Dallas (note that the
Dallas node must nail up this alternate paths cross-connection).
If the Chicago-New York link is completely severed, the New York and Chicago
nodes raise local alarms. Because the Chicago interface towards the San Francisco
node has been configured to invoke trunk conditioning when the link to which it
is cross-connected declares a Red Alarm, fault signaling codes are transmitted; in
this case, the code selected is the OOS code. When the San Francisco node detects
the incoming OOS codes, RAPID is invoked and the super-rate data channel now
travels end-to-end along the alternate path. RAPID would still work if the link
between the Chicago and New York node had only been severed in the New York
to Chicago direction. In this case, the Chicago node would raise a Red Alarm while
the New York node would detect OOS codes.
Note that while T1 and DS3 links are shown, a mixture of E1, T1, DS-3 II, V.35 PRI,
and X.21 PRI aggregates can also be used. In addition, had the end device been a
PBX that did not require RAPID, the San Francisco and New York nodes could be
programmed to transmit the seized signaling code towards their PBXs. This would
prevent each PBX from using the out-of-service aggregate link. Furthermore, if
ISDN were used for the alternate path, the San Francisco and New York nodes
would establish a call directly between them.
148
3. Design
Two conditions must be satisfied to ensure a proper RAPID configuration. First,

the switching matrix must support a second cross-connection destination for the
channel being protected. Second, the destination must be capable of raising an
alarm upon which RAPID can be invoked.
RAPID is not limited to voice or data ports connected to an aggregate link. RAPID
can also be applied to tandem aggregate connections such as DS3-to-T1, T1-to-T1,
or E1-to-X.21.
When a link failure occurs on a remote span, knowledge of the event can be
propagated through multiple tandem connections by special OOS signaling codes.
OOS codes are a user-selectable trunk conditioning option.
Single T1 and E1 cards and the Dual E1-2 card support a loopback detect feature
that prevents the use of a failed link when an external loopback is applied; this
feature is also supported on the TSM and DRM of Dual T1 and Dual T1-2 cards,
respectively. All aggregate cards support two-way trunk conditioning. T1, E1, ATM
Services, Optical Extension, MPA, TTC2M, X.21 PRI, and V.35 PRI aggregate
cards also support one-way trunk conditioning.
Alcatel 5620 NM
AAR
AAR is a comprehensive network level rerouting algorithm that uses the network
database in the Alcatel 5620 NM to dynamically reroute paths during network
failures. AAR reroutes paths first by locating idle bandwidth within the network,
and second by bumping paths of lower priority. An example of AAR in a network
is shown in Figure 3-36.
149
A closer view
Figure 3-36: Alcatel 5620 NM AAR

3645
MainStreet
node
3645
MainStreet
node
Ex
is
tin
g
pa
th
Alternate
path
Alternate
path
3645
MainStreet
node
3645
MainStreet
node
Alcatel 5620
Network Manager
PBX
15129
If a fault occurs along any path, the Alcatel 5620 NM automatically reroutes paths
by scanning its network-wide database for idle bandwidth, including
noncontiguous 800 b/s HCM elements.
ISDN leased-line
protection
The ISDN backup application provides RAPID-like protection of leased lines using
nondedicated connections through the PSTN. In situations in which out-of-band
signaling is not needed and the backup connection does not need to be extremely
fast, ISDN B-channel backup is more cost-effective than standard RAPID.
The leased lines can be protected by either 2B+D lines terminating on BRI S/T
cards, 23B+D lines terminating on Dual T1-cards, or 30B+D lines terminating on
Dual E1 cards.
In these backup applications, a protected channel normally transported by a leased
line uses a BRI interface as its alternative path. A one-to-one mapping of channels
from preferred to alternative paths is normally used. If a particular application
needs one ISDN interface to back up many channels, the network manager can
program ISDN backup using AAR. In these cases, the ISDN backup connection is
programmed as a preferred connection.
If a failure is detected at one endpoint node, the node immediately switches the
leased circuits to a BRI with the appropriate preprogrammed dialing information.
The answering node disconnects the specified channel from its preferred path and
connects it to the B channel specified by the network.
150
3. Design
Aggregate
redundancy
measures
In addition to RAPID and AAR, the following aggregate interface cards can be
duplicated within the same shelf to protect against card failure, or installed in
separate shelves to protect against card and shelf failure:
Single 2.048 Mb/s E1 cards

DS-3 II cards, and Single and Dual E3 cards (note that when aggregate interface
redundancy is configured for a Dual E3 card, it applies to both ports)

DS-3 II cards, and Single and Dual E3 card access protection
Single 1.544 Mb/s T1 cards using the T1 LIM
X.21 PRI and X.21 ESI PRI aggregate cards (56 kb/s and n 64 kb/s variants)
V.35 PRI aggregate cards (56 kb/s and n 64 kb/s variants)
aggregate power-loss bypass
Figure 3-37 shows two aggregate cards configured for interface redundancy. When
the cards disagree on the severity of an alarm, and the active card declares a more
severe error for at least 2 seconds, an activity switch occurs (the backup card takes
over). If after 3 minutes the faulty card continues to raise alarms, it is effectively
taken out of service, and aggregate redundancy for the link is unavailable until a
replacement card is provided. If the faulty card demonstrates normal operation,
fault processing terminates and the card resumes its backup role.
Figure 3-37: Aggregate interface redundancy
DS3 LAC
Aggregate
I/F (a)
Regular LAC
E/O
Aggregate
I/F (b)
Central
office
I/F
Protection LAC

PBX
Central
office
Customer
premises
Transmission
facilities
Public
network
7580
151
A closer view
2.048 Mb/s E1 card

redundancy
Events that cause an activity switch between two 2.048 Mb/s E1 cards configured
for interface redundancy include:
Severity 1 (highest)
loss of framing alignment on the E1 link
loss of incoming signal
the received data stream is all binary ones, indicating that the far-end E1
device has lost framing alignment
Severity 2
loss of multiframe alignment on the E1 link
an all ones alarm appears on the signaling channel, indicating an alarm at
the far end of the link
Severity 3
severely errored data is received for 10 consecutive seconds, indicating that
the far end may have been taken out of service
the tolerable framing error rate has been exceeded
Severity 4
the far end raises an alarm (other than an all ones alarm)
DS-3 II, Single E3, and Dual
E3 card interface
redundancy
DS3 and E3 interface protection provides one-to-one, card-level redundancy by

using two DS-3 II, Single E3 or Dual E3 cards to terminate/source each DS3 or E3
link. Two DS-3 II cards or two Single E3 or Dual E3 cards are installed side-by-side
in the HSPS or HSPS2 with their transmit and receive signals connected over the
backplane.
One of the two cards is initially programmed as redundant. This card monitors all
system and link activities, but its transmit drivers are held in a high impedance
state.
An activity switch can be forced from the Alcatel Craft Interface Node Manager or
Alcatel 5620 NM, or can occur when the active DS-3 II, Single E3, or Dual E3 card
is removed or reset, or loses communication with the switching shelf.
An activity switch can also occur when the number of accumulated demerit points
on the active card exceeds that for the backup card. Demerits are accumulated for
each DS-3 II, Single E3, or Dual E3 card when:
152
any power-up, background or directed diagnostic test fails

a DS3 or E3 alarm occurs
communication with its mate card fails
reconciliation is in progress (which occurs after an activity switch)
3. Design
DS-3 II, Single E3, and Dual

E3 card access protection
capability
DS-3 II, Single E3, and Dual E3 cards support APC. This feature protects against
both card and link failures and is implemented according to AT&T Publication
54014 A2.
Events that cause an activity switch include:
any event listed under DS-3 II, Single E3, and Dual E3 card interface
redundancy
failure of the active DS3 or E3 link
the active DS3 or E3 link has error rates of 10-6 over 3- or 10-second intervals,
or 10-4 over 2- or 6-second intervals
loss of framing alignment on the E1 link
the received data stream is all binary ones, indicating that the far-end E1
device has lost framing alignment
Severity 2
loss of multiframe alignment on the E1 link
an all ones alarm appears on the signaling channel, indicating an alarm at
the far end of the link
Severity 3
Severity 4
the far end raises an alarm (other than an all ones alarm)
Figure 3-38 shows an example of APC. Two DS-3 II, Single E3, or Dual E3 cards are
used to terminate and source two physical DS3 or E3 links. All cards transmit and
receive data over their respective links, but only the data received on the active card
is passed through the switching shelf. The far-end link equipment can be either a
3600 MainStreet system or a CO that supports the protection standard.
153
A closer view
Figure 3-38: DS3 and E3 access protection capability
DS3
LAC
DS3
I/F (a)
DS3
I/F (b)
Regular LAC
E/O
E/O
Central
office
Access protection
switch
Protection LAC

PBX
Customer premises
Central
office
7581
1.544 Mb/s T1 card

redundancy
Events that cause an activity switch between two 1.544 Mb/s T1 cards configured
for interface redundancy include:
loss of T1 framing synchronization (Red Alarm)
Severity 2
Severity 3
the far end cannot synchronize to the framing of the local T1 (Yellow
Alarm)
X.21 PRI and V.35 PRI
aggregate card
redundancy
Events that cause an activity switch between two X.21 or V.35 PRI aggregate cards
(56 kb/s and n 64 kb/s variants) configured for interface redundancy include:
loss of framing alignment
Severity 2
the far end raises an alarm
Aggregate power-loss
bypass
154
In the event of power loss, the 1.544 Mb/s T1 (with a T1 LIM) and 2.048 Mb/s E1
cards provide a link bypass relay that routes traffic around the faulty node to
prevent the total loss of traffic in drop and insert or tandem node configurations.
Aggregate card power-loss bypass and interface redundancy are mutually exclusive.
3. Design
Fault signaling and

trunk conditioning
Fault signaling is used to transmit predefined signaling and data information from
voice ports, OCU-DP channel units, 64 kb/s Codirectional card ports, and
aggregate links. Transmission of these codes occurs when the interface is not
cross-connected to anything, or when the UCS card to which it is cross-connected
is unavailable (for example, the UCS card is missing).
Fault signaling is also applied by trunk conditioning when a port or aggregate
timeslot is cross-connected to an aggregate card whose link is experiencing alarms
and/or high error rates. When trunk conditioning is invoked, the node breaks the
cross-connection between the interface and the faulty aggregate link in both
directions and inserts fault signaling and data codes. In addition, ATM Services, T1,
E1, Optical Extension, MPA, TTC2M, X.21 PRI, and V.35 PRI aggregate cards
support an optional one-way trunk conditioning mode. In this case, a link is viewed
as two unidirectional links, and trunk conditioning is applied only to the link
indicating a problem.
The events that invoke trunk conditioning on a port or tandem aggregate channel
depend on the type of aggregate to which the channel is cross-connected. For
example, the following fault conditions can be enabled to trigger trunk
conditioning:
T1 Red Alarms, Yellow Alarms, Failed State conditions, Framing Error State
conditions, and CSU loopbacks
E1, V.35 PRI and X.21 PRI aggregate Frame Alignment alarms, Multiframe
Alignment alarms, Distant alarms, Failed State conditions, and framing errors
(E1 only)
Signaling information is transmitted by CAS (TS16) for E1 links and E1s within an
E3 link, and by the supervisory channel for X.21 and V.35 PRI aggregate links. For
T1 links and DS1 signals within a DS3 link, signaling is transmitted by RBS. For
Dual T1 cards equipped with a TSM, signaling is transmitted in timeslot 24.
Signaling codes are propagated through tandem nodes, including crossconnections between different aggregate types (for example, T1-to-V.35 PRI,
T1-to-E1, E1-to-X.21 PRI).
Signaling codes are selectable on a port or timeslot basis. For analog voice ports, the
signaling options include:
idle, which is normally used at endpoint nodes where the port device is a PBX
connected over an incoming trunk
seized, which is normally used at endpoint nodes where the port device is a
PBX connected over a two-way or outgoing trunk
155
A closer view
Aggregate and 64 kb/s codirectional links also support idle and seized signaling
codes along with the following:
OOS-A, OOS-B, or OOS-C

These are normally used at tandem nodes to inform remote-end node ports
that an aggregate link on which they have been carried has failed. Ports that
receive this signal and have RAPID functionality configured automatically
switch to their protecting path (see Figure 3-35).
custom
Custom allows the user to specify two codes: the first is transmitted for
approximately 2.5 seconds, then the second code is transmitted until the fault
condition clears.
hold
Hold continues to transmit the signaling code present when the fault occurred.
In the data stream, voice ports transmit no voice frequency information; aggregate
channels and 64 kb/s codirectional links transmit either all ones or a user-defined
value. For DDS, the ASC and MOS codes are transmitted upstream and
downstream respectively.
Control Packet
Switching System
The CPSS protocol is a packet-switched system based on the confirmed datagram

service known as Fast Select, which is described in the ITU-T Red Book (1984),
under X.25 specifications. CPSS has built-in link integrity checking, and supports
message retransmission on initial failure and automatic rerouting on second
failure.
The 3600 MainStreet system uses CPSS to communicate:
NCI messages (for example, status and control information) to and from
network managers and the Alcatel Craft Interface Node Manager
ANS information to and from other network nodes
NCI messages between common control and those node elements with
on-card HDLC controllers (ATM Services, DS-3 II, Single and Dual E3, Dual
T1, Dual T1-2, Dual E1, Dual E1-2, FRS/SRIM, FRE, PE, and DCP cards, and
DTUs)
CPSS channels can be designated in several ways to accommodate a wide range of
network configurations. For communications with a locally connected
Alcatel 5620 NM or Alcatel Craft Interface Node Manager, the 3600 MainStreet
system designates a TIA/EIA-232 link for CPSS that can terminate on SCC3 serial
ports or DCP card serial ports.
156
3. Design
For communications with a remote Alcatel 5620 NM and for the exchange of ANS
information with other nodes, CPSS channels can be designated on a variety of
links, including:
timeslot 0 on E1 links (National Use Bits)

the FDL on T1 links using ESF framing
the supervisory channel on X.21 PRI and V.35 PRI aggregate cards (56 kb/s
and n 64 kb/s variants)

all or part of a 64 kb/s channel (DS0) on any aggregate or data link including
DS3 and E3 links (that is, they can be subrate multiplexed by I.460
(transparent) and HCM SRMs, one CPSS channel for each SRM aggregate)
SCC3 and DCP card serial port links over modem over the PSTN
NCI messages can also be communicated using CPSS over the UDP/IP. That is,
NCI messages can be transported in-band by IEEE 802.3/Ethernet LANs.
For communications involving node elements with on-card HDLC controllers, the
3600 MainStreet system architecture automatically configures appropriate CPSS
channels, which are transparent to the operation of the node. Other node elements
are controlled directly by the SCC3. Should a node ever become isolated from the
network, a backup CPSS route can be provided using modems and the PSTN.
The initial release of CPSS provided a distance vector routing algorithm (version 1)
and basic CPSS messaging and link costing options. CPSS v2, introduced with
Release 5.0, better accommodates large, complex networks. CPSS v2 features are:
an improved routing algorithm

This provides greater reliability, support for bigger networks, and a faster
healing time (the time required to update the routing tables in all CPSS routing
nodes after the failure of a CPSS link).
This allows for better error detection, larger-sized packets (for higher
throughput), and a new datagram service (for better performance).
CPSS subnetworking (domains)
CPSS v2 nodes can be organized into groups called domains, allowing a large
CPSS network to be divided into smaller subnetworks. All subnetworks can be
controlled by the same network manager, but each node need only know the
topology of its own subnetwork, reducing routing complexity and improving
performance and reliability.
157
A closer view
CPSS bandwidth between

nodes
CPSS channels between nodes, or between a node and its locally connected
network manager or NMTI, can be 4 kb/s or n 8 kb/s, up to 64 kb/s. The
bandwidth dedicated to CPSS varies according to the node size and network
configuration.
Generally, 4 kb/s is sufficient between feeder nodes and hubs, while 16 kb/s is
sufficient between backbone nodes in medium-sized networks. In 3600 MainStreet
systems, the SCC3, SCC3(8+), and DCP card provide routing, sourcing, and
termination of CPSS channels.
The SCC3, SCC3(8+), and DCP card CPSS channels at 4 kb/s use a special
4 kb/s transparent subrate data format. These channels are converted to an HCM
format when they are multiplexed by an HCM or transparent SRM (located on a
DPM2, a DSP2 card, or a DSP3 card), or switched by a DS0 port on an SRS.
Alternatively, a 4 kb/s CPSS channel can be cross-connected to the FDL channel on
a T1 link. Larger networks can employ several DCP cards. Consult your Alcatel
representative for the configuration information appropriate to your network
application.
Support for CPSS channels is provided by cards with HDLC controllers, as follows:
CPSS channels supported by the SCC3 and SSC3(8+)

two shared HDLC controllers that work together to support
158
approximately 6 CPSS channels operating at 4, 8, or 16 kb/s

four dedicated HDLC controllers, each supporting one CPSS channel
operating at 4, 8, 16, 24, ... 64 kb/s
CPSS channels supported by the DCP card
31 dedicated HDLC controllers, each supporting one CPSS channel
operating at 8, 16, 24, ... 64 kb/s
23 dedicated HDLC controllers, each supporting one CPSS channel
operating at 8, 16, 24, ... 64 kb/s, and 8 HDLC controllers, each supporting
one CPSS operating at 4 kb/s
CPSS channels supported by the DS-3 II card
one dedicated HDLC controller supporting one CPSS channel operating
at 8, 16, 48, or 56 kb/s
CPSS channels supported by the Single E3 card
one dedicated HDLC controller supporting one CPSS channel operating
at 8, 16, 48, or 56 kb/s
CPSS channels supported by the Dual E3 card
one dedicated HDLC controller (on one port only) supporting one CPSS
channel operating at 8, 16, 48, or 56 kb/s
3. Design
Node and network

synchronization
This section describes the range of synchronization options supported by

3600 MainStreet systems.
Node timing sources
The task of synchronizing a 3600 MainStreet system to a network is performed by

the ISSU on the SCC3 or SCC3(8+).
The timing source that drives the ISSU is selected from the programmable timing
sources available to the system (or the Stratum-3 4.6 ppm system clock can be
allowed to free-run). The 3600 MainStreet system can have up to eight
programmable timing sources.
Each programmable timing source can be configured as shown in Figure 3-39.
Figure 3-39: Node timing sources
Station clock
Via backplane
connector
OR
8 kHz
2.048 MHz
Aggregate
card
Data in
External
clock
Clock
extraction
Via GFC2
8/64 kHz (composite)
1.544 MHz
SCC3 & Clock

card
System
timing
Stratum-3
Direct
Connect
card
5625
External
Timing is derived from an external device connected to a backplane/bulkhead

connector (only one external source may be configured for each node).
Derived
Timing is derived from any aggregate link (ATM Services, T1, E1, Optical
Extension, MPA, X.21 PRI, or V.35 PRI) or DCC circuit.
External sources of timing can be connected to backplane/bulkhead connectors on
the switching shelf or on any of the peripheral shelves connected to it. Table 3-10
lists the external timing inputs and outputs supported by the 3600 MainStreet
system.
159
A closer view
Table 3-10: 3600 MainStreet system external timing inputs and outputs
External timing frequencies
Inputs
Switching shelf
Single or peripheral
shelf
Class A
Class B/
23-inch
Class A
Class B/
23-inch
8 kHz
2.048 MHz
(1)
(1)
64 kb/s AMI
1.544 Mb/s AMI

Outputs
1.544 MHz
2.048 MHz
(2)
(2)
8 kHz
(2)
(2)
(1)
(1)
64 kb/s AMI
Notes
1. Requires a GFC2 (NA).
2. Peripheral shelves require a GFC2 (NA). If a 64 kb/s or 1.544 kb/s AMI timing source is
connected to a peripheral shelf with a GFC2 (NA), the peripheral shelf will generate an 8 kHz
output derived from the 64 kb/s or 1.544 Mb/s AMI timing source.
Peripheral shelves can be configured to pass timing signals derived from an external
source to the switching shelf, but it is still the switching shelf that processes these
signals and supplies system timing to all peripheral and high-speed peripheral
shelves.
The 3600 MainStreet system has an excellent tolerance for jitter. Short changes in
phase are common when clocking is derived from an aggregate link.
In digital networks, where nodes are interconnected by digital links, it is important
to ensure that all timing sources used throughout the network run at the same
frequency (averaged over some period of time) to avoid the occurrence of frame
slips. This is accomplished in some networks by installing high-precision clock
generators at each node.
For example, nodes installed in COs have ready access to the local BITS or network
clocking, which can easily be connected to the 3600 MainStreet system backplane.
Nodes installed at the customer premises are in turn slaves to the digital link
connecting them to the CO.
In either case, the 3600 MainStreet system provides node-based synchronization
priority tables. These tables allow the 3600 MainStreet system to identify and
prioritize all synchronization sources to ensure that the source with the highest
priority is always selected.
160
3. Design
The single-shelf or dual-shelf systems support up to four sources. In multishelf

systems, the switching shelf supports up to eight sources, and each peripheral shelf
supports up to four sources.
For private networks, high-precision clocks can also be used at each node.
However, a more practical and less expensive solution is to ensure that all nodes
synchronize to a common frequency source. This source is extracted from digital
links connecting individual nodes directly, or through intermediate nodes, to a
common reference node. The 3600 MainStreet system provides an ANS option to
facilitate this task.
Automatic network
synchronization
ANS is a mechanism that ensures all nodes in a network are using the same timing
source, whether the source is local or remote. Key features of ANS are its ability to
prioritize up to 16 timing sources, tolerate plesiochronous network configurations,
and eliminate timing loops in large networks.
ANS v2 better accommodates large complex networks. ANS v2 features are:
independence from the CPSS network

ANS v2 uses CPSS to transport synchronization information between ANS
nodes. However, changes in the CPSS network are transparent to the ANS
network. When the CPSS network heals itself after the failure of a CPSS link,
there is no change in synchronization sources.
flexible ANS link options
Previously, all ANS links had to be configured with exactly one CPSS channel.
With CPSS v2 and ANS v2, the user is free to configure any valid link as an ANS
link regardless of the links CPSS configuration. A valid ANS link may carry no
CPSS channels, one CPSS channel, or more than one CPSS channel.
ANS v2 can take advantage of all the improved network layer CPSS packet
transmission services provided by CPSS v2, including better error detection,
larger-sized packets (for higher throughput), and a new datagram service (for
better performance).
ANS subnetworking (zones)
ANS v2 nodes can be organized into independently synchronized groups
called zones, allowing a large ANS network to be divided into smaller
subnetworks to improve performance and reliability, and to provide better
support for plesiochronous networks.
In a network of Alcatel products running ANS v2, any number of timing sources
can be identified, but only one timing source provides network timing at any
instant within a sector. This timing source is referred to as the current timing
source of the sector.
161
A closer view
The key to implementing ANS v2 is to specify which timing source is preferred as

the current source. Next, determine which source should take over in case the first
source fails, which source should take over in case both the first and second sources
fail, and so on. Several failure scenarios should be considered.
Once the network source preferences are identified, a class number (1 to 15) is
assigned to each: the higher the preference, the lower the class number. Preference
may be determined by the accuracy or reliability of a source, or some other factor
or combination of factors, depending upon the network and the timing sources
available.
Timing sources can be assigned the same class number provided they can be traced
back to the same source along identical paths (that is, paths that provide no or
equivalent degradation of the timing signal).
When the timing sources have been configured and ANS v2 has been enabled, each
multi-aggregate Alcatel product in the network automatically generates a map of all
network timing sources. Each time a configuration change occurs, the map is
updated (for example, when a new 3600 MainStreet system is brought online or
when a timing source is reconfigured).
From this map, nodes automatically select the synchronization source with the
lowest class number as their timing source. If the best timing source is accessible
from a number of nodes, the node selects the source that is the fewest number of
hops away (a hop is a link between two pieces of network equipment). ANS v2
information is communicated between nodes using CPSS.
Plesiochronous networks
It may be desirable or necessary to define network sectors that have independent

timing hierarchies. For example, an international network may have a
North American sector synchronized to the Bell System Reference Frequency, a
European sector synchronized to the British Standard Clock, and an Asia/Pacific
sector synchronized to the local PTT clock. Networks designed with this
configuration are called plesiochronous networks.
Because two or more synchronization sources are in use at the same time, frame
slips can occur on aggregate links joining different sectors. With this in mind,
3600 MainStreet systems were designed to behave in a controlled and predictable
manner when used in plesiochronous networks. For example, all aggregate cards
contain slip buffers, and when a slip occurs, the disruption is limited to the loss or
duplication of a single frame at only one node. Frame synchronization is also
maintained during a controlled slip.
Table 3-11 provides information on ITU-T plesiochronous network performance
categories. Table 3-12 provides statistical information on the expected rate of
frame slips based on various node and network synchronization timing sources.
It shows the acceptable slip performance for an international network.
162
3. Design
Table 3-11: ITU-T performance category for international networks

Performance
category
Mean slip rate (MSR) (1)
Percentage of time
stated MSR is
achieved
< 5 slips in 24 hours
> 98.9%
> 5 slips in 24 hours and < 30 slips in

1 hour
< 1.0%
> 30 slips in 1 hour
< 0.1%
Note
1. Averaged over one or more years.
Table 3-12: Probability of slips in plesiochronous networks

Clock
Tolerance
Stratum-1
Stratum-2
Stratum-3
Stratum-4
British
Standard
ITU-T
G.703
SCC3
freerun
Stratum-1 (1)
72.3 d
2.2 h
27.2 s
3.9 s
34.4 h
2.5 s
5.0 s
2.2 h
65.1 min
27.1 s
3.9 s
2.0 h
2.5 s
5.0 s
Stratum-3 (3)
27.2 s
27.1 s
13.6 s
3.4 s
27.2 s
2.3 s
4.2 s
Stratum-4 (4)
3.9 s
3.9 s
3.4 s
2.0 s
3.9 s
1.5 s
2.2 s
British
Standard (5)
34.4 h
2.0 h
27.2 s
3.9 s
17.4 h
2.5 s
5.0 s
ITU-T G.703 (6)
2.5 s
2.5 s
2.3 s
1.5 s
2.5 s
1.2 s
1.7 s
SCC3
free-run (7)
5.0 s
5.0 s
4.2 s
2.2 s
5.0 s
1.7 s
2.5 s
Stratum-2
(2)
Notes
1. Stratum-1 clock tolerance 1.0 x 10-11
5. British Standard clock tolerance 1.0 x 10-9
6. ITU-T G.703 clock tolerance 5.0 x 10-5
7. SCC3 free-run clock tolerance 2.5 x 10-5
The performance categories have been recommended for both voice and data
connections. These values cover all sources of slips, such as temporary loss of
timing control at an intermediate node and slips due to plesiochronous operation.
Tables 3-11 and 3-12 show that only the Stratum-1 and British Clock Tolerance
would meet the ITU-T performance objectives for an end-to-end connection
involving one plesiochronously operated link (a link between two Stratum-1 clocks
provides an MSR of one slip every 72.3 days; a link between Stratum-1 and British
Standard clocks provides an MSR of one slip every 34.4 hours). Slip performance
would be reduced if more links were used, involving further subnetworks.
163
A closer view
164
Network and external equipment

connections
This chapter describes 3600 MainStreet system connectors.
Network
connectors
The 3600 MainStreet system connectors provide the interfaces between voice and
data equipment and the aggregate network. Table 4-1 lists the types and locations
of voice interface connectors, all of which are located on the peripheral shelf.
Table 4-1: Voice interface connectors on peripheral shelf

Interface type
Card or channel unit (1)
Connector location (2)
4WTO
4WTO line card
Backplane or bulkhead
4WDX channel unit
E&M card
E&M channel unit
LGE card
LGE channel unit
LGS card
LGS channel unit
MRD channel unit
2WMRD channel unit
E&M
LGE
LGS
MRD
Notes
1. The connector location and type listed in this table are those of the Common Carrier card. All channel units are installed on the
Common Carrier card.
2. All connectors are the 25-pair type.
165
A closer view
Table 4-2 lists the types and locations of data interface connectors, all of which are
located on the peripheral shelf.
Table 4-2: Data interface connectors on the peripheral shelf
Interface type
Card (1) and shelf
Connector location (2)
2B+D
27LC2 line card
27LC3 line card
2B1Q line card
2B1Q channel unit
BRI S/T card
4-wire DSU/CSU
OCU-DP channel unit
4-wire no signaling
4WTO channel unit
DSX-0
DS0-DP channel unit
Full duplex synchronous (G.703)
Multirate HDSL
28LC line card
TIA/EIA-232/V.24
RS-232 DCC
Faceplate
TIA/EIA-449/V.36
RS-422 DCC
Faceplate
TIA/EIA/X.21
RS-422 DCC
Faceplate
X.21 DCC
Faceplate (3)
TIA/EIA-530-A
RS-422 DCC
Faceplate
V.35
RS-422 DCC
Faceplate
V.35 DCC
Faceplate (3)
Notes
1. The connector location and type listed in this table are those of the Common Carrier card. All channel units are installed on the
Common Carrier card.
2. All connectors are the 25-pair type.
3. Available on the 6-circuit version only.
Table 4-3 lists the types and locations of aggregate interface connectors.
166
4. Network and external equipment connections
Table 4-3: Aggregate interface connectors

Interface type
Card and shelf
Connector location
Connector type
ATM
ATM Services
25-pair
DS3 (T3)
DS-3 II (HSPS)
Bulkhead
BNC
E1
Dual Optical Extension (PS)
Faceplate
Single mode FC optical
25-pair
Single Optical Extension (PS)
Dual E1-2 (PS)
Dual E1 (PS)
TIA/EIA-530-A
TIA/EIA-449
T1
BNC
25-pair
25-pair
Faceplate
BNC
25-pair
DE3 (HSPS2)
Bulkhead
BNC
SE3 (HSPS2)
Bulkhead
BNC
Fibre (HSPS2)
Faceplate
Single mode FC
MPA
MPA
Dual T1-2 (PS)
TTC2M (PS)
MPA
V.35 PRI (PS)
X.21/V.11
Faceplate
BNC
Single T1 (PS)
V.35
25-pair
Faceplate
Dual T1 (PS)
TTC2M
Single mode FC optical
Single E1 (PS)
E3
Faceplate
MPA
X.21 PRI card (PS)
X.21 ESI PRI card (PS)
Faceplate
25-pair
25-pair
Faceplate
25-pair
25-pair
Faceplate
RJ48C
25-pair
Faceplate
RJ48C
25-pair
Faceplate
RJ48C
25-pair
Faceplate
DB15
25-pair
Faceplate
25-pair
25-pair
Faceplate
DB25
25-pair
Faceplate
25-pair
25-pair
Faceplate
DB25
25-pair
Faceplate
DB25
25-pair
Legend
PS = Peripheral shelf
167
A closer view
External
equipment
connectors
Table 4-4 lists the shelf connectors that provide access to power supplies or external
equipment.
Table 4-4: Power supply and external equipment connectors

Power supply or external
equipment
Class/shelf type
Location
Connector type
External alarm source
Class A (SS, PS)
Backplane
2 x 13 IDC
Class B or 23-inch (SS, PS)
Bulkhead
DB25
HSPS2
FPP
HSPS2
Fibre card
Single mode FC
FIP
Class A, Class B or
23-inch (PS)
25-pair
Node management
Class A (SS, PS)
Backplane or SCC3
faceplate
RJ45
Class B or 23-inch (SS, PS)
SCC3 faceplate
RJ45
Class A, Class B, or
23-inch (PS)
FRE, FRS/SRIM, and PE

card faceplate
RJ45
Class A or Class B (SS, PS)
1 or 2 power supplies
located in the shelf power
tray
Terminal block (for 1 or

2 dc feeds) or ac socket
23-inch (SS, PS)
1 or 2 Power Supply cards

in reserved power slots
Terminal block (for 1 or

2 dc feeds)
Class A (PS)
Power tray distribution box
5-pin socket
DB25
23-inch (PS)
Bulkhead
DB25
Class B or 23-inch (PS)
Bulkhead
Wire-wrap posts
Power supply (1)
HSPS
HSPS2
Alcatel ringing generator
(2)
Class B (PS)
Non-Alcatel ringing generator
(4)
(3)
Legend
PS = Peripheral shelf
SS = Switching shelf
Notes
1. Power supplies are available for 48/60 V dc, 120 V ac or 240 V ac feeds.
2. Internal ringing generators can be mounted in Class A or Class B peripheral shelves that are equipped with one power supply.
3. The backplane connector is used when the shelf is equipped with an internal ringing generator. The bulkhead connector is used
for connection to an external ringing generator.
4. Not supplied by Alcatel.
168
System cards
System cards perform high-level functions, such as:
DS0-based switching for all circuits

maintaining a nonvolatile database of all system connections and
configurations
generation, termination, and routing of CPSS management protocol messages
maintenance and diagnostic functions
System card faceplates are shown in Figure 5-1.
169
A closer view
Figure 5-1: System cards
Control
Card
Switching
Card
Expander
Card
Upper
Transceiver
Clock
Card
Switching
Interface
Card
S1
Active
Status
Display
S1
Serial Port 1
Loop Back
DCE
Los Clock B
Los Clock A
Port B
L1
Active
Port A
Activity
L2
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Lower
Transceiver
Order Wire Receive
SI
Attention
Receive
Attention
Alarm
Release
Receive
Attention
Order
Wire
L1
L2
Alarm
Test Port
Test
Port Rx
DS0
Tx
DS0
Rx
DS0
Tx
DS0
Rx
Rec.
Att.
Test
Port Rx
DS0
Rx
Tip/Ring
MTA
Tip/Ring
Return
E/M
Receive
Status
WARNING:
Connect only
apparatus
complying with
BS 6301 to this port
DS0 Tx Clock
Status
+5V
-5V
+12V
-12V
-VBatt
RVAC
GND
+5V
-5V
+12V
-12V
-VBatt
RVAC
GND
DS0 Tx Clock
Status
DS0 Tx Clock
DS0 Rx Clock
DS0 Rx Clock
CLEI Label
CLEI Label
Status
Tx Rx
Status
WARNING:
Connect only
apparatus
complying with
CLEI Label
GFC2
(UK)
Fac.
Eqp.
Fac.
Eqp.
+5V
-5V
+12V
-12V
-VBatt
RVAC
GND
DS0 Rx Clock
GFC2
(NA)
Tip/Ring
Return
Fac. Equip
A
C
Test
Port Tx
DS0
Tx
E/M
+5V
-5V
+12V
-12V
-48V
90V
GND
Alarm
Release
Tip/Ring
Send
Status
WARNING:
Connect only
apparatus
complying with
Receive
Attention
Test
Card
Order
Wire
Test
Port Tx
Test
Test
Release
Test
Port Rx
MTA
RX TX
+5V
-5V
+12V
-12V
-48V
90V
GND
Alarm
Test
Port Tx
Order
Wire
Test
Port
General
Facilities
Card 3R
General
Facilities
Card 3
General
Facilities
Card 3
Clock
card
Switching
Interface card
Tx Clock
General
Facilities
Card
Switching
card
Rx Clock
General
Facilities
Card
Expander
card
DS0
System Control
Class B/23-inch
card 3
Balanced Transceiver
cards
Class A
Class B
Class B
Test
card
GFC3
19053
170
Updated April 2007
5. System cards
System Control
card 3
The SCC3 provides all common control and node management facilities for the
system. This includes provisions for:
interfacing with the node manager

control of the configuration database and system clocks
coordination of the network synchronization signals
the running of system software
System Control
card 3 (8+)
The SCC3(8+) card provides the equivalent functionality of the SCC3 and
Expander (16+) card combined. In addition, when installed in pairs and used in
conjunction with the SSR upgrade kit, it provides double-bandwidth switching
capacity and control redundancy.
Balanced
Transceiver card
Balanced Transceiver cards interconnect two peripheral shelves in a dual or

control-redundant configuration. The cards and their associated intershelf cabling
effectively extend the UCS backplane bus from one shelf to another, allowing data
and control signals to be sent from one shelf to the other. Balanced Transceiver
cards have no configurable options.
Class A shelves use the Balanced Transceiver cards. Class B and 23-inch shelves use
the Balanced Transceiver 2 cards. The functionality of both variants is the same, but
the Balanced Transceiver 2 cards are needed to meet the EMC requirements of the
Class B and 23-inch shelves.
Balanced Transceiver cards are shipped in pairs consisting of an Upper Control
card and a Lower Interface card (the names refer to the positions in which the cards
are installed in the shelf).
In a dual-shelf system, the Upper Control card passes signals from the SCC3 in its
shelf to the interface card slots in the mate shelf. The Lower Interface card passes
signals from the interface card slots in its shelf to the SCC3 in the mate shelf.
In a control-redundant system, the Upper Control card passes signals from the
active SCC3 to the interface card slots in the inactive shelf. The Lower Interface card
passes signals from the interface card slots in the inactive shelf to the SCC3 in the
active shelf.
171
A closer view
Expander card
Expander cards are used to increase the DX capacity of the SCC3 on a single-shelf
or dual-shelf system. The type of Expander card determines the number of UCSs
accessible to the SCC3 and the number of UCSs that support double bandwidth
(62 DS0s).
Expander card (6+2) provides access to eight UCSs, two of which

(slots 7 and 8) are double bandwidth.
Expander card (6+6) provides access to 12 UCSs (six UCSs in each of
two shelves).
Expander card (8+8) provides access to 16 UCSs (eight UCSs in each of two
shelves, with slots 7 and 8 of each shelf providing double bandwidth).
Expander card (16+) provides access to 16 UCSs (eight UCSs in each of two
shelves, all of which provide double bandwidth).
Clock card
The Clock card is an integral part of a switching shelf controlled system and is
installed in slot 9 of the switching shelf. If the card is not present when the system
is powered up, the seven-segment display LED on the switching shelf SCC3 flashes
a C and L until the card is installed. The Clock card provides the switching and
peripheral shelves, HSPSs, and HSPS2s with:
clocking and frame pulse

general facilities functions
General Facilities
card 2
The GFC2 provides extensive maintenance and diagnostic capabilities with the
integral order wire, test port, and tone generator. The following features are
supported:
audio monitor provides a nonintrusive audio monitor of any voice circuit

LGS interface provides a fully functional 2-wire LGS interface
passive voice connection provides a passive communication link (no
172
signaling) to any voice circuit

test port monitor connects the order wire to the test port send terminal
tone generator monitor connects the order wire to the tone generator
test port provides an interface between transmission test equipment and any
analog circuit
tone generator and order wire provides a 1-kHz tone at 0 dBm to any analog
circuit and connects the audio output of the circuit to the order wire; the tone
generator and test port provides the same tone, but connects the output to the
receive terminal of the test port
5. System cards
General Facilities
card 3
The GFC3 provides all the functionality of the GFC2, as well as:
metallic test access

DS0 test access
tone test
BERT
Note: the GFC3R variant of the GFC3 (part number 90-3085-05) does not support
order wires. The audio monitor, LGS interface, and passive voice connection
functionality is available through the split and monitor connections. See chapter 11
for information on these diagnostics.
Switching card
The Switching card, installed in the switching shelf, receives all data and signaling
information from the peripheral shelf (Switching Interface card), HSPS (DS-3 II
card), or HSPS2 (E3 card). The data and signaling are transmitted over switching
interface cables, which connect the shelves.
The Switching card makes the connections required by the Switching Interface
card, DS-3 II card, or E3 card.
Switching
Interface card
The Switching Interface card, installed in the peripheral shelf, is the interface
between the peripheral shelf and the switching shelf. It multiplexes and
demultiplexes all data and signaling information that is transmitted (over the
switching interface cables) between the interface cards and switching shelf.
The Switching Interface card receives system timing signals from the switching
shelf, which it uses to derive timing signals for the peripheral shelf.
Test card
The Test card provides test access to voice and data circuits. The Test card provides:
digital access (on the DS0 level) between digital test equipment and any
primary rate card, the 64 kb/s Codirectional card, or the OCU-DP channel unit
metallic access to the tip and ring pairs of the voice channel units
metallic access to the signaling leads of the E&M channel unit
Test card digital functionality may be applied to cards in any shelf in the node;
metallic functionality can only be applied to cards in the same shelf as the Test card.
Test module
The Test module, which is installed on the Test card, provides analog and digital
tone tests. The module generates an analog or digital sinusoidal test tone that has a
configurable frequency and output level.
The Test module monitors the quality of digital data links, and can be used to
conduct frequency and amplitude tests on cabling connections, external
equipment, channel units, and local digital components.
Updated April 2007
173
A closer view
Common Carrier
card
The Common Carrier card acts like an extension of the peripheral shelf backplane,
enabling the installation of up to four single-circuit channel units. The Common
Carrier card is transparent to the operation of the system and the channel units, and
can be installed in any of the eight shelf UCSs. The signals are transmitted over two
control serial buses and one data serial bus.
Figure 5-2 shows the four channel unit positions on a Common Carrier card.
Figure 5-2: Common Carrier card
Common
Carrier card
(has four channel
unit positions)
15037
Configurable
parameters
Tables 5-1 to 5-5 list the software-configurable parameters for the GFC2, GFC3,
Test card, Test module, and Switching card, respectively.
Table 5-1: GFC2 configurable parameters
Parameter
Level
E1 signaling type
Circuit (order wire)
Options
CBW
EC
LCDC
PLAR
RE
Rx TLP
T1 signaling type
6 to +1 dB
E&M
GS
GS E&M
LS E&M
PLAR
Tx TLP
174
3 to +4 dB
5. System cards
Table 5-2: GFC3 configurable parameters

Parameter
Options
Card operation
Card slot
GFC
Companding law
Mu-law
A-law
DS1/composite clock termination
Enabled
Disabled
GFC type
GFC
GFC3
NRZ clock termination
Enabled
Disabled
Ringback tone
Mu-law
A-law
Tone generator companding law
Mu-law
A-law
Order wire
(1)
E1 signaling type
PLAR
CBW
LCDC
EC
RE
PCM companding law
Mu-law
A-law
Ringing bias
48 V
0V
T1 signaling type
PLAR
PLAR D3
LS
LS to E&M conversion
GS
GS to E&M conversion
TLP
Tx: 3 to +4 dB in 1-dB increments

Rx: 6 to +1 dB in 1-dB increments
Test port
PCM companding law
Mu-law
A-law
TLP
16.0 to +8.0 dB in 0.1-dB increments
Updated April 2007
175
A closer view
Parameter
Options
Tone tester
Line impedance
600
900
PCM companding law
Mu-law
A-law
Transmission mode
2-wire
4-wire
BERT
Data position
F0-B6 to F7-B0
Error correction for DDS rate adaption
Disabled
Enabled
Rate adaption method
HCM
Transparent
DDS DS0-A
Signaling
Enabled
Disabled
Transport bandwidth
1 to 8
Transport position
B0 to B7
DS0 port
Error correction
Enabled
Disabled
Fault signaling code
A hexadecimal number: 00 to FF
Interface speed
2.4 kb/s
4.8 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
19.2 kb/s
56 kb/s
64 kb/s
Tone tester maintenance

Analog tone test amplitude
40 to +10 dBm in 1-dBm increments
Analog tone test direction
Equipment
Facility
Digital tone test amplitude
40 to 0 dBm in 1-dBm increments
Loopback
Loopback C
Tone frequency
200 to 3400 Hz in 1-Hz increments
Tone tester test
Enabled
Disabled
Tone type
Single tone
White tone
Quiet tone
176
5. System cards
Parameter
Options
BERT maintenance
Audible error bell
Enable
Disable
BERT pattern
n, where n is an integer corresponding to

a BERT pattern
BERT statistics
Clear statistics
BER test
Enable
Disable
DDS control code
n, where n is an integer corresponding to

a DDS control code
DDS control code parameters
Show status of last eight MJUs

Show last eight Tx DDS codes
Show last eight Rx DDS codes
Inject BER
None
1.00E-1
1.00E-2
1.00E-3
1.00E-4
1.00E-5
1.00E-6
1.00E-7
Inject ERR
Inject an error
Loopback
Loopback C
Round trip delay measurement
Run a round trip delay measurement
Note
1. Not supported on the GFC3R variant of the GFC3 (part number 90-3085-05).
Updated April 2007
177
A closer view
Table 5-3: Test card configurable parameters

Parameter
Options
Card operation
Card slot
Test card
Digital DS0 circuit configuration

25-pair connector
Enabled (faceplate connectors disabled)

Disabled (faceplate connectors enabled)
Error correction
Enabled
Disabled
Fault signaling code
A hexadecimal number: 00 to FF
Interface speed
2.4 kb/s
4.8 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
19.2 kb/s
56 kb/s
64 kb/s
Metallic test access connections

25-pair connector
Enabled (faceplate connectors disabled)

Disabled (faceplate connectors enabled)
Metallic test access connections
Direct monitor
High-impedance monitor
Split access
4-wire loopback
178
5. System cards
Table 5-4: Test module configurable parameters

Parameter
Options
Card operation
Card module
Test module
No module
Tone tester
Companding law
Mu-law
A-law
Line impedance
600
900
Transmission mode
2-wire
4-wire
BERT
Data position
F0-B6 to F7-B0
HCM
Transparent
DDS
Signaling
Enabled
Disabled
Transport position
B0 to B7
Transport bandwidth
1 to 8
Tone tester maintenance

Analog tone test amplitude
Analog tone test direction
40 to +10 dBm in 1-dB increments

Equipment
Facility
Digital tone test amplitude
40 to 0 dBm in 1-dBm increments
Loopback
Loopback C
Tone frequency
200 to 3400 Hz in 1-Hz increments
Tone tester test
Enabled
Disabled
Tone type
Single tone
White noise
Quiet tone
179
A closer view
Parameter
Options
BERT maintenance
Audible error bell
Enable
Disable
BERT pattern
n, where n is an integer corresponding to a

BERT pattern
BERT statistics
Clear statistics
BER test
Enable
Disable
DDS control code
n, where n is an integer corresponding to a

DDS control code
DDS control code parameters
Show status of last eight MJUs

Show last eight Tx DDS codes
Show last eight Rx DDS codes
Inject BER
None
1.00E-1
1.00E-2
1.00E-3
1.00E-4
1.00E-5
1.00E-6
1.00E-7
Inject ERR
Inject an error
Loopback
Loopback C
Round trip delay measurement
Run a round trip delay measurement
Table 5-5: Switching card configurable parameters

Parameter
Level
Card operation
Slot
Options
Enabled
Disabled
Node number
180
Slot
1 to 999
Aggregate cards
Aggregate cards provide an interface for aggregate links that can be leased from
service providers in n 64 kb/s increments. Alcatel offers aggregate cards that
support the following interfaces:
ATM
DS3
E1
E3
Optical fiber
T1
TIA/EIA-449
TIA/EIA-530-A
V.35
X.21
Figure 6-1 shows the faceplate of each aggregate card.
181
A closer view
Figure 6-1: Aggregate cards
ATM SC
DS-3 II
Card
Dual E1
Card 2
Dual
E1
Card
2.048
Mbps
E1
Card
Line 1
Port 1
TX
Out
Port 2
Port 3
RX
In
RX
In
Port 4
E-3 Alarm 2
Losync
E-1 Alarm 2
Error
E-3 Alarm
E-3 Alarm 1
E-1 Alarm
E-1 Alarm 1
SI Alarm
SI Alarm
S1
S1
Active
Active
Status
Status
Error
BP
TX
Line 2
S1
BP
RX
DS-1 Alm
SI Alm
Dual E-3
Card
RX
In
Losync
DS-3 Alm
E-3
Card
Line 1
TX
Out
TX
Out
Losync
Activity
Activity
Error
Status
Status
Status
Line 2
TX
Out
TX
Out
RX
In
RX
In
Fibre
Card
Active
Losync
Losync
Error
Status
Error
Status
Status
Rx
Tx
ATM
Services
card
Multiport
Aggregate
Card
DS-3 II card
(HSA)
E1 card
Dual
Optical
Extension
Card
Optical
Extension
Card
Dual
E1 card
1.544
Mb/s
T1
Card
E3 card
(HSA)
Dual E1-2
card
Dual
1.544
Mb/s
T1
Card
V.35
PRI
Card
Dual T1
Card 2
Dual
E3 card
Fibre
card
X.21/
PRI
Card
X.21
ESI
PRI
Card
Line
Line
Losync
LoSync
Status
Status
Line 1
In Out
Line
Port 1
Line 1
Mon
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Red Alarm
Monitor
LN
Ylw Alarm
EQ
Losync
Line 1
LoSync
LoSync
Error
Error
RX TX
Error
Red Yel
Losync Error
Line 2
Losync
In Out
Line 2
Line 2
Bypass
LoSync
Status
MPA
card
LoSync
Error
Error
Status
Status
Single
Optical
Extension
card
Dual
Optical
Extension
card
Mon
Red Alarm
Red Alarm
LN
Ylw Alarm
Ylw Alarm
EQ
Losync
Losync
Line
Red Yel
Losync Error
Error
Error
Status
Status
T1 card
Dual
T1 card
Status
Status
Dual
T1-2 card
V.35 PRI
card
X.21 PRI
card
X.21 ESI
PRI card
7608
182
6. Aggregate cards
ATM Services card
The ATM Services card is a 4-port card that adapts n 64 kb/s circuit-switched and
m n 8 kb/s packet-switched data for transmission over aggregate links. The
ATM Services card provides three main functions:
inverse multiplexing over ATM

circuit emulation service using AAL1 adaptation (including signaling
conversion between E1 and T1)
HDLC service using AAL5 adaptation (UBR and nrt-VBR)
For more information about these functions and how the ATM Services card uses
and distributes bandwidth, see chapter 2.
The 3600 MainStreet system supports 4 Mb/s E1 AAL1 and AAL1/5 variants, and
4 Mb/s T1 AAL1 and AAL1/5 variants. Each variant:
supports software downloading (two Flash banks)

allows link quality monitoring
supports up to 1024 AAL5 connections per slot
supports up to 250 AAL5 connections per FSC
supports network and service (both translated and transparent) interworking
for AAL5
supports signaling multiframe lengths of 16 and 24 frames, when AAL1adapting E1 and T1 circuits, respectively
complies with relevant sections of ITU-T Q.933 Annex A and ANSI T1.617
Annex D
The E1 ATM Services card variants:
provide four 2.048 Mb/s digital trunk interfaces

provide one logical ATM interface composed of up to four physical E1
interfaces, providing a UNI to an ATM network
support R2D for E&M
provide a software-configurable E1 termination impedance (75
asymmetrical and 120 symmetrical), which provides a high-impedance
monitoring function
The T1 ATM Services card variants:
provide four DS1 digital trunk interfaces, with D4 or ESF formats

provide one logical ATM interface composed of up to four physical T1
interfaces, providing a UNI to an ATM network
provide software-configurable line length (DSX-1 or DS1 options)
183
A closer view
DS-3 II card
The DS-3 II card is designed for installation in an HSPS in a multishelf system. Each
DS-3 II card operates at a bandwidth equivalent to one regular peripheral shelf,
providing 28 DS1 compatible channels, each containing 24 DS0s, for a total of
672 DS0s. The 28 DS1 channels are bundled together into one DS3-compatible
digital trunk interface, which conforms to AT&T Pub 54014, at 44.736 Mb/s.
Each of the 672 DS0s can be configured independently for D4-compatible robbed
bit signaling and clear channel signaling. Jam bit 7 or transparent zero code
operation are software-selectable at the DS1 level, and are fully compatible with the
SF format and ESF. CRC error checking and link quality control can be monitored
at DS1 and DS3 levels.
The DS-3 II card:
provides an interface to the Switching shelf

provides a DS3 line interface
performs activity processing for redundant configurations
performs DS3 multiplexing and demultiplexing
performs DS-3 II card processing
The DS-3 II card can be installed in any slot in the HSPS.
E1 cards
This section describes Single E1, Dual E1, and Dual E1-2 cards. These cards can be
installed in any of the eight UCSs.
Single E1 card
The Single E1 card conforms to ITU-T G.703, G.704, and G.732 specifications.
The card:
provides one channelized, 32-channel, 2.048 Mb/s DS1 digital trunk interface
with CAS, CCS, or 31-channel formats
supports R2D for E&M
accesses both network services and CPE such as digital PBXs
The Single E1 card supports these modules:
E1 LIM (75 asymmetrical and 120 symmetrical), which provides a

short-distance E1 interface and a high-impedance monitoring function that
supports one-to-one interface redundancy
NTI module, which provides a short-distance E1 interface
CCM, which provides A-law and Mu-law companding conversion
The Single E1 card supports the following connections:
bidirectional
straight-through transparent
bypass
184
6. Aggregate cards
Dual E1 card
The Dual E1 card conforms to ITU-T G.703 and G.732 specifications at

2.048 Mb/s. The card:
provides two channelized, 32-channel, 2.048 Mb/s E1 digital trunk interfaces
with CAS, CCS, 31-channel, or 30B+D ISDN formats

connects 64 kb/s voice or data channels (or both) at the DS0 level
accesses both network services and CPE, such as digital PBXs
supports unidirectional (one-way and broadcast) and bidirectional
connections
The Dual E1 card supports these modules:
E1 LIM (75 asymmetrical and 120 symmetrical), which provides a

short-distance E1 interface and a high-impedance monitoring function that
supports one-to-one interface redundancy
E1 HDSL LIM, which provides a primary rate interface at the DS1 level and
increases the distance allowed between midspan repeaters in a CSA
The Dual E1 card supports these optional application modules:
VCM3, which has a full M60 ADPCM transcoder with bundled, delta signaling
channel
IFM, which provides the Layer 1 frame alignment enhancements necessary to
conform to the I-CTR-4 ISDN PRI CRC multiframe alignment standard
The Dual E1 card supports the following connections:
simple and broadcast unidirectional

bidirectional
straight-through transparent
bypass
compressed voice channels, when equipped with a VCM3
185
A closer view
Dual E1-2 card
The Dual E1-2 card conforms to ITU-T G.703 and G.732 specifications at
2.048 Mb/s. The card:
provides two channelized, 32-channel, 2.048 Mb/s E1 digital trunk interfaces
with CAS, CCS, 31-channel, or 30B+D ISDN formats

connects 64 kb/s voice or data channels (or both) at the DS0 level
supports loopback detection
accesses both network services and CPE, such as digital PBXs
supports software downloading
provides errored second and performance threshold alarms
allows link availability monitoring
supports a cross-connection to an SSC3 card or a DCP card that terminates
National Use Bits configured to carry CPSS
connections
supports the E1 LIM (75 asymmetrical and 120 symmetrical), which
provides a short-distance E1 interface and a high-impedance monitoring
function that supports one-to-one interface redundancy
supports the optional FAM, which provides F-AIS detection on the E1 link
E3 cards
This section describes the Single and Dual E3 cards. These cards can be installed in
any slot in the interface section of the HSPS2 in a multishelf system.
Single E3 card
The Single E3 card supports one 34.368 Mb/s E3 interface, which provides
connections for 64 kb/s voice or data channels (or both) at the DS0 level. It can
provide fiber trunk access using the Fibre card or metallic trunk access using coaxial
connectors on the bulkhead. One Single E3 card operates at a bandwidth
equivalent to one entire regular peripheral shelf.
Dual E3 card
The Dual E3 card has two 34.368 Mb/s E3 interfaces, each providing connections
for 64 kb/s voice or data channels (or both) at the DS0 level. The Dual E3 card
provides metallic trunk access through coaxial connectors on the bulkhead.
186
6. Aggregate cards
Fibre card
The Fibre card provides the interface between an HSPS2 Single E3 and a fiber E3
trunk. The Fibre card provides both the transmit and receive optical paths for one
Single E3. The Fibre card receives the transmit line clock timing signal from the
shelf backplane. The receive timing synchronization is extracted from the received
optical signal.
The transmit device consists of a 1310 nm laser diode. Transmit circuitry includes
a photodiode (used to monitor the output power), and an APC circuit to ensure
that the output power remains constant.
The receive device consists of a 1.1 m to 1.6 m InGaAs PIN photodetector.
The Fibre card may be installed in any HSPS2 Fibre card slot. There is one Fibre
card slot beneath each HSPS2 interface card slot.
Multiport
Aggregate card
The MPA card provides four primary rate circuits that can be configured through
software to be DCE or DTE, and to support either TIA/EIA-530-A, TIA/EIA-449,
X.21, or V.35 interfaces. The card has two alarm contacts that indicate an
out-of-sync condition on the X.21 interface, making it X.21 ESI-compatible.
The MPA card can connect to a total of 60 DS0s for data transport. Each interface
supports n 48, n 56, or n 64 kb/s channels (where n = 1 to 30).
A supervisory channel, TS0, is available on each circuit, and is used to carry CPSS.
Channelization (framing and signaling) is maintained by an Alcatel proprietary
scheme, which also handles alarm messaging and internode communications.
The MPA card can be installed in any of the eight shelf UCSs.
Optical Extension
cards
Single and Dual Optical Extension cards:
provide two channelized, 2.048 Mb/s E1 interfaces, which conform to ITU-T

G.703 and G.732 specifications, and are used for connecting 64 kb/s data or
voice circuits
provide one or two factory-installed IOTUs, which convert electrical signals to
optical signals for transmission over long distances (up to 18 km [11 mi])
support a cross-connection to either an SCC3 or DCP card that terminates
National Use Bits configured to carry CPSS
The Optical Extension cards support the E1 HDSL LIM, an interface module that
provides a primary rate interface at the DS1 level and increases the distance allowed
between midspan repeaters in a CSA. The cards must have two installed, working
LIMs to operate properly.
187
A closer view
The Optical Extension cards support these optional application modules:
channel
IFM, which provides the Layer 1 frame alignment enhancements necessary to
conform to the I-CTR-4 ISDN PRI CRC multiframe alignment standard
There are four Optical Extension card variants:
Single Optical Extension card, Class B (part number 90-0565-09)

Single Optical Extension card, Class A (part number 90-0565-11)
Dual Optical Extension card, Class B (part number 90-0565-10)
Dual Optical Extension card, Class A (part number 90-0565-12)
T1 cards
This section describes Single T1, Dual T1, and Dual T1-2 cards. These cards can be
installed in any of the eight shelf UCSs.
Single T1 card
The Single T1 card conforms to the relevant sections of AT&T Channel Bank
specifications Pub 43801 and Pub 62411 at 1.544 Mb/s. The card:
provides one channelized, 24-channel DS1 digital trunk interface with D4 or

ESF formats
accesses both fractional and full T1 network services and CPE
provides metallic test access through faceplate bantam jacks
The Single T1 card supports these modules:
T1 LIM, which provides a primary rate interface at the DSX-1 level

DSX-1 or CSU-2, which provide a primary rate interface at the DS1 level
CCM, which provides A-law and Mu-law companding conversion
When equipped with a T1 LIM or CSU-2 module, the card provides a
high-impedance monitoring function that supports one-to-one interface
redundancy.
Dual T1 card
The Dual T1 card conforms to the relevant sections of AT&T Channel Bank
provides two channelized, 24-channel DS1 digital trunk interfaces with D4 or

ESF formats, 24-hour Error Free Seconds alarm, and user-configurable SES
definition
cross-connects the 64 kb/s voice or data channels (or both) on each link at the
DS0 level
188
6. Aggregate cards
The Dual T1 card supports these modules:

CSU-2, which provides a primary rate interface at the DS1 level
The Dual T1 card supports these optional modules:
channel
TSM, which dedicates timeslot 24 to pass signaling for the other 23 circuits on
the T1 link, providing 64 kb/s clear channels
Dual T1-2 card
The Dual T1-2 card conforms to the relevant sections of AT&T Channel Bank
provides two channelized, 24-channel DS1 digital trunk interfaces with D4 or
ESF formats, 24-hour Error Free Seconds alarm, and user-configurable SES
definition
cross-connects the 64 kb/s voice or data channels (or both) on each link at the
DS0 level
provides metallic test access through faceplate bantam jacks
supports ANSI TI.403 and AT&T 54016 performance monitoring and
loopbacks
is used for customer-premises leased line and 23B+D ISDN applications
The Dual T1-2 cards support these modules:

CSU-2, which provides a primary rate interface at the DS1 level
The Dual T1-2 card supports these optional modules:
DRM, which dedicates timeslot 24 to pass signaling for the other 23 circuits on
the T1 link, providing 64 kb/s clear channels; supports loopback detection on
timeslot 24; provides RAPID protection for 24 DS0 super-rate circuits
FT1 module, which generates and detects fractional T1 loopback activation
and detection codes according to Annex B ANSI T1.403
189
A closer view
V.35 PRI card
The V.35 PRI card presents a V.35 interface at the customer premises that provides
n 64 kb/s (where n = 1 to 30) or 56 kb/s. Channelization (framing and signaling)
is maintained by an Alcatel proprietary scheme, which also handles alarm
messaging and internode communications.
There are two V.35 PRI card variants:
V.35 PRI card (part number 90-0669-01), which provides 1 to 30 circuits and
an aggregate bandwidth of 64 to 1920 kb/s
V.35 PRI card (part number 90-0669-03), which provides a single 56 kb/s
circuit and provides RAPID support between MainStreet nodes
X.21 PRI and

X.21 ESI PRI cards
The X.21 PRI and X.21 ESI PRI cards present an X.21/V.11 interface at the
customer premises that provides n 64 kb/s (where n = 1 to 30). Channelization
(framing and signaling) is maintained by an Alcatel proprietary scheme, which also
handles alarm messaging and internode communications.
The X.21 PRI card and the X.21 ESI PRI card each provide 1 to 30 circuits and
accommodate an aggregate bandwidth of 64 to 1920 kb/s.
The X.21 ESI PRI card is an X.21 PRI card with an interface lead directly connected
to the cards supervisory channel HCM synchronization status. This can be used to
provide synchronization loss information to the external devices.
190
6. Aggregate cards
Configurable
parameters
Table 6-1 lists the software-configurable parameters on the ATM Services card, and
indicates which card variant supports the parameter.
Table 6-1: Software-configurable parameters on the ATM Services card

Parameter
Level
Options
AAL1
card
variant
AAL1/5
card
variant
ACT
FSC
0 to 60000 ms
IMA group (logical port)
1 to 2000 kbytes
Physical port
1 to 2000 kbytes
Activation timeout
1 to 10000 ms
Alarm clear time
Physical port
1 to 60 s
Alarm declare time
Physical port
1 to 60 s
ASC circuit assignment
FSC
Assign
Unassign
Bc
PVC (frame relay parameter)
0 to 4294 kb
Be
0 to 4294 kb
CAC level
Static
Dynamic
Card adaption type
Slot
AAL1
AAL1/5
Card backplane
Slot
16 Mb/s
4 Mb/s
Card type
Slot
ATM SC
Card variant
Slot
E1
T1
Cell delay variation tolerance
Circuit (ATM parameter)
0.1 to 32.0 ms (for signaling

multiframe length = 16)
0.1 to 24.0 ms (for signaling
multiframe length = 24)
Cell fill level
2 to 47 bytes
Cell payload scrambling
Physical port
Enabled
Disabled
CIR
0 to 1984 kb/s
CIR rate enforcement
Enabled
Disabled
CLP mapping
PVC (frame relay and ATM

interworking parameter)
CLP=DE
CLP=0
CLP=1
191
A closer view
Parameter
Level
Options
AAL1
card
variant
AAL1/5
card
variant
Congestion clear time
Slot
1 to 255 s
Congestion raise time
Slot
1 to 255 s
CRC4 reframing (E1 only)
Physical port
Enabled
Disabled
Custom trunk conditioning,
ABCD bits
Circuit (TDM parameter)
4-digit code, E&M (0000 to 1111)
Custom trunk conditioning,

data
8-digit code, primary rate

(00000000 to 11111111)
De-activation timeout
1 to 10000 ms
DE mapping

DE=CLP
DE=FR-SCCS
DE=0
DE=1
E1 signaling types
Transparent (SIG)
Clear channel (NoSIG)

E&M
Continuous E&M
LGS RE
LGS EC
LGS PLAR
LGE RE
LGE EC
EFCI mapping
Fault class

EFCI=FECN
Physical port
Red/frame off or on
EFCI=0
Yellow/distant off or on
Failed off or on
Error off or on
Fault signaling
Seized
Idle
OOS-A
OOS-B
None
Flags between frames
FSC
1 to 10
Framing (T1 only)
Physical port
ESF
D4
FSC application
FSC
Transparent HDLC
Frame relay
Heartbeat polling interval
192
FSC
5 to 30 s
6. Aggregate cards
Parameter
Level
Options
AAL1
card
variant
AAL1/5
card
variant
HEC correction
Physical port
Enabled
Disabled
Interworking mode

Network
Service (transparent)
Service (translated)
Inversion
None
All bits
Alternate bits
Line build-out (T1 only)
Physical port
DS1: 0.0 dB, 7.5 dB, 15.0 dB,

or 22.5 dB
DSX-1: 0.6 dB, 1.2 dB, 1.8 dB,
2.4 dB, or 3.0 dB
Line length (T1 only)
Physical port
DS1
DSX-1
Link quality monitoring

(E1 only)
Physical port
HDB3
Maximum burst size
PVC (ATM parameter)
0 to 65535 cells
Maximum differential delay
0 to 50 ms
Maximum frame size
FSC
16 to 4472 octets
MCT
FSC
0 to 60000 ms
0 to 100%
Physical port
0 to 100%
Slot
0 to 100%
Minimum number of active

links in an IMA group
1 to 4
MIR
PVC (ATM parameter)
0 to 2147483 kb/s
Network DLCI
16 to 1023
NU bits (E1 only)
Physical port
Default bit patterns (Tx = 11111)
CRC4
Custom
Number of CAC links
1 to 4
PIR
PVC (ATM parameter)
0 to 2147483 kb/s
Port selection
Physical port (P1 to P4)
Logical port (IMA group) (L1)

None
193
A closer view
Parameter
Level
Options
Protocol type
FSC
LMI: User, Network, or Network

Extended
AAL1
card
variant
AAL1/5
card
variant
Annex A: User, Network, or

Bidirectional
Annex D: User, Network, or
Bidirectional
No protocol
Auto discovery
PVC management

Enabled
R2 signaling type
R2 digital signaling
Scaling factor
1 to 10000%
Physical port
1 to 10000%
FSC
0 to 60000 ms
0 to 100%
Physical port
0 to 100%
Slot
0 to 100%
Nonreal-time variable bit rate
SCT
Service category
PVC (ATM parameter)
Disabled
Unspecified bit rate

Signaling multiframe length
Slot
16 frame signaling
24 frame signaling
Signaling transport
Circuit group
Enabled
Disabled
SIR
PVC (ATM parameter)
96 to 2147483 kb/s (T1)

120 to 2147483 kb/s (E1)
Status enquiry message

timeout
FSC
5 to 35 s (1)
Status message rate
FSC
1 to 255
Structured 64 kb/s mode
Unstructured 64 kb/s
Structured 64 kb/s
Super-rate formats
Contiguous
Noncontiguous
Equidistant
194
6. Aggregate cards
Parameter
Level
T1 signaling types
Options
AAL1
card
variant
AAL1/5
card
variant
Transparent (SIG)
Clear channel (NoSiG)

E&M
LGS LS
LGS GS
LGS PLAR
LGS PLAR D3
LGE LS
LGE GS
Termination impedance
(E1 only)
Slot
Transmit clock
75
120
Common transmit clock
Independent transmit clock
Transmit timing
Physical port
Loop
System
Transport bandwidth
FSC
n 8 kb/s, n = 1 to 8
Transport position
FSC
Bn, n = 0 to 7
Trunk conditioning
Physical port
One-way or two-way
Virtual channel
vpi/vci (vpi = 0 to 31, vci = 32 to

65535)
VP shaping
PVC (ATM parameter)
Enabled
Disabled
Zero code suppression
(T1 only)
Physical port
Transparent
B8ZS
Note
1. This option is not configurable when the auto-discovery protocol is used.
Table 6-2 lists the software-configurable parameters of all the other aggregate cards,
and indicates which card supports the parameter and (if necessary) which module
is required.
195
A closer view
Table 6-2: Aggregate card configurable parameters

Parameter
Level
Options
Card (1)
Alarm time
Slot or
circuit
Declare: 0.1 to 60 s
E1
Clear: 0.1 to 60 s
MPA
T1
OEC
V.35
X.21
Application
Slot
Non-ISDN
Dual E1-2
ISDN
Dual E1
Dual T1-2
OEC
Application module
Slot
No module
Dual E1-2
Voice compression
Dual E1
FAM (for Dual E1-2 card)
Dual T1-2
ISDN frame (for Dual E1 card)
Dual T1
TS24 signaling (for Dual T1 card)
OEC
DRM (for Dual T1-2 card)

FT1 module (for Dual T1-2 card)
Bandwidth
Slot
1 to 30 (64 to 1920 kb/s)
V.35
X.21
Bit error rate
Link
Enabled
Dual E1-2
Disabled
Dual E1
OEC
Bit error rate alarm
Link
Enabled
Dual E1-2
Disabled
Dual E1
SA4 bit on
OEC
SA4 bit off

Buffering for jitter
and wander
Slot
Card type
Card
0.5 bits per 1 kb/s of bandwidth
V.35
1.0 bits per 1 kb/s of bandwidth
X.21
Dual E1-2
E1
Dual E1
OEC
E1
Dual T1-2
T1
Dual T1
Single T1
CCM
Channel type
Card
Circuit
MPA
MPA
Enabled
Single E1
Disabled
Single T1
Voice
MPA
Data
Clock inversion
Slot
Invert
Normal
196
X.21
6. Aggregate cards
Parameter
Level
Options
Card (1)
Clocking source
Slot
Service provider
V.35
MainStreet node
X.21
Transparent
T1
Code suppression
types
Link or
Slot
Binary 8-zero suppression

Jam bit 7
Companding
conversion
Circuit
Compressed voice
subframe type
Link
Conversion
Single E1
No conversion
Single T1
32 kb/s ADPCM
Dual E1-2
32 kb/s ADPCM for G3 fax
Dual E1
Dual T1-2
Dual T1
OEC
Control leads
(TIA/EIA-530-A,
TIA/EIA-449, X.21,
V.35)
Circuit
Control lead
conditioning OOS
Circuit
Forced on
MPA
Forced off
On
MPA
Off
None
Control lead initiated

local loopback
Circuit
CPSS
Circuit
Enable
MPA
Disable
Disable
MPA
8 kb/s
16 kb/s
CRC4 reframing
Link
Enabled
Dual E1-2
Disabled
Dual E1
OEC
CSU loopback
detect (2)
Slot
Enabled
Dual T1
Disabled
Single T1
None
Dual T1-2
Through CPSS
Through TS24
On fault
Custom trunk
conditioning, ABCD
bits
Circuit
4-digit code (0000 to 1111)
E1
T1
MPA
V.35
X.21
OEC
197
A closer view
Parameter
Level
Options
Card (1)
Custom trunk
conditioning, data
Circuit
8-digit code (00000000 to 11111111)
E1
MPA
T1
V.35
X.21
OEC
DGM limit
Circuit
Doppler buffer
Circuit
1 to 60
MPA
Enable
MPA
Disable
E-bits option
Link
Enabled
Dual E1-2
Disabled
Dual E1
OEC
E1 signaling types
Circuit
Transparent
E1
Clear channel
V.35
E&M
X.21
Continuous E&M
OEC
LGS RE
LGS EC
LGS PLAR
LGS PLAR D3 (3)
LGE RE
LGE EC
Transparent
MPA
Clear channel
E&M
LGS RE
LGS EC
LGS GS
LGS LS
LGS PLAR
LGE RE
LGE EC
LGE GS
LGE LS
Errored seconds
Circuit
1 to 255
Dual T1-2
Dual T1
F-AIS detection (4)
198
Link or
Slot
On
Off
Dual E1-2
6. Aggregate cards
Parameter
Level
Options
Card (1)
Fault classes
Slot
Frame off or on
V.35
Distant off or on
X.21
Failed off or on
Link or
Slot
Frame off or on
E1
Distant off or on
OEC
Failed off or on
Error off or on
Red off or on
T1
Yellow off or on
Failed off or on
Error off or on
CSU loopback off or on (5)
Circuit
Frame off or on
MPA
Distant off or on
Failed off or on
Loopback off or on
Fault signaling
Circuit
Seized
E1
Idle
MPA
OOS-A
T1
OOS-B
V.35
OOS-C
X.21
Custom
OEC
No trunk conditioning
Framing
Link or
Slot
D4 framing format
T1
ESF
CAS
E1
CCS
OEC
31 channels
X.21 NTU
Circuit
HCM1
MPA
HCM2
HCM3
HCM4
HCM5
Framing type
Link or
Slot
Gender (clocking
source)
Circuit
DCE
HCM frame width
Slot
X.21
2
MPA
DTE
B1, B3, B5, B7
V.35
X.21
199
A closer view
Parameter
Level
Options
Card (1)
Interface type
Circuit
RS-530-A
MPA
RS-449
X.21
X.21 ESI
V.35
Inversion
Circuit
Inverted
E1
Not inverted
MPA
T1
V.35
X.21
OEC
Line build-out with a

CSU-2 module
Link or
Slot
15 dB
T1
7.5 dB
0 dB
Line length with a

DSX-1 module or
T1 LIM
Link or
Slot
0 to 46 m (0 to 150 ft)
T1
46 to 137 m (150 to 450 ft)

137 to 200 m (450 to 655 ft)
Link availability
monitoring
Circuit
Enabled
Dual E1-2
Disabled
Dual T1-2
Dual T1
Loopback detection
Slot
None
E1
Through CPSS
T1
Through TS24
OEC
On-fault
Circuit
None
MPA
CPSS
In-band
Nu bit
Slot
Enabled
Dual E1
Disabled
Dual E1-2
Number of circuits
Circuit
1 to 30 (48 to 1920 kb/s)
MPA
Number of signaling
channels
Slot
0 to 29
V.35
R2 signaling type
Circuit
R2 digital E&M
MPA
RAI
Slot
On loss of frame alignment
Dual E1-2
X.21
On BER enable
On BER disable
Robbed bit signaling
Circuit
Enabled
T1
Disabled
SAM
Slot
No module
Single E1
Normal (installed, not used)
Single T1
Circuit order
Timeslot order
200
6. Aggregate cards
Parameter
Level
Options
Card (1)
Severely errored
seconds (6)
Circuit
10-7
Dual E1-2
10-6
Dual E1
5 10-6
Dual T1-2
10-5
Dual T1
10-4
OEC
10-3
Severely errored
seconds limit
Circuit
10-3
MPA
10-4
10-5
10-6
5 10-5
Shield grounding
Link or
Slot
Chassis
E1
Rx shield grounding
Rx shield floating
Tx shield grounding
Tx shield floating
For master operation, set card to
Tx shield floating
OEC
For slave operation, set card to Tx shield

grounding
For maintenance, set card to Rx shield
grounding
Slip buffer
Circuit
10 to 39 frames
MPA
Slip by 10 to 39 frames
SRM HCM data in
TS0
Circuit
Unused bit positions to the right of

framing bits in TS0
MPA
Statistics type
Slot
CRC4
E1
HDB3
Super-rate formats
Circuit
Contiguous
E1
Noncontiguous
MPA
Equidistant
T1
V.35
X.21
OEC
Supervisory channel
framing bit
Circuit
Any unused bit position
MPA
Supervisory channel
number of circuits
with signaling
Circuit
0 to 29
MPA
201
A closer view
Parameter
Level
Options
Card (1)
T1 signaling types
Circuit
Transparent
E1
Clear channel
T1
E&M
V.35
LGS LS
X.21
LGS GS
OEC
LGS PLAR
LGS PLAR D3
LGE LS
LGE GS
R2 digital signaling (7)
Terminate (8)
Transparent
MPA
Clear channel
E&M
LGS LS
LGS GS
LGS PLAR
LGE LS
LGE GS
Timeslot 24
signaling
Card
Transport
bandwidth
Circuit
Timeslot 24 signaling
Dual T1-2
No timeslot 24 signaling
Dual T1
48 kb/s
MPA
56 kb/s
64 kb/s
Trunk conditioning
Slot
Two-way
E1
One-way
MPA
T1
V.35
X.21
OEC
Voice compression
Card
Delta
Dual E1-2
Delta G3 fax
Dual E1
Transitional
Dual T1-2
Transitional G3 fax
Dual T1
OEC
Notes
1. E1 means Single E1, Dual E1, and Dual E1-2 cards; OEC means Single and Dual Optical
Extension cards; T1 means Single T1, Dual T1, and Dual T1-2 cards; X.21 means X.21 PRI
and X.21 ESI PRI cards.
2. Requires a CSU-2 module for the T1 card and Dual T1 card.
3. Does not apply to E1 cards.
4. Requires a FAM for the Dual E1-2 card.
5. Applies to Single T1 and Dual T1 cards only.
6. Options 10-7 and 10-6 do not apply to the Dual E1 card.
7. Does not apply to T1 cards.
8. Applies to E1 and T1 cards only.
202
Voice interface cards and

channel units
Voice interface cards and channel units provide an interface between voice circuits
and a digital network. Voice interface cards are intended for on-premises,
short-loop applications that require high port densities. Voice interface channel
units are intended for off-premises, CO applications that require long-loop and
individual-circuit modularity.
Alcatel offers voice cards and channel units that support 4WDX, 4WTO, E&M,
LGE, LGS, and MRD interfaces.
The cards can be installed in any of the eight shelf UCSs. The channel units can be
installed on the Common Carrier card when the power is on or off. Up to four
channel units can be installed on each Common Carrier card. For more
information on the Common Carrier card, refer to chapter 5.
Figure 7-1 shows the faceplate of each voice interface card and channel unit.
203
A closer view
Figure 7-1: Voice interface cards and channel units
4WTO
Circuit
E&M
Card
LGE
Card
LGS
Card
Line 1
Line 1
Line 1
Line 2
Line 2
Line 2
Line 3
Line 3
Line 3
Line 4
Line 4
Line 4
Line 5
Line 5
Line 5
Line 6
Line 6
Line 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Line 7
Busy
Status
Line 8
Line 9
4WDX
9
Line 10
10
90-2769-01
Line 11
11
Line 12
12
Status
Status
Status
Status
4WT0 card
E&M card
LGE
LGE card
MRD
Busy
Busy
Busy
Ringing
Status
Status
Status
Status
E&M
LGS
90-1229-01
E&M channel unit
LGE channel unit
90-1755-01
LGS channel unit
Ringing
Status
2WMRD
90-1228-0X-00
International
90-1230-0X-00
International
LGS card
MRD channel unit
90-1755-02
4WDX channel unit

occupies two positions
on Common Carrier card
2WMRD channel unit

7613
204
7. Voice interface cards and channel units
4WDX channel unit
The 4WDX channel unit complies with signaling state requirements contained in
PUB 43801 and applicable sections in Bellcore TR-NWT-000057 Issue 2.
The channel unit:
provides a 4-wire transmission line with bidirectional on- and off-hook

signaling
provides an interface to devices that convert DX signaling to E&M signaling
allows configuration of line impedance resistance (150, 600, or 1200 )
The 4WDX channel unit is a dual-height channel unit that occupies two positions
on the Common Carrier card. It can be installed in any one of the first three
channel unit positions on the Common Carrier card.
4WTO line card
The 4WTO line card complies with applicable sections in PUB 43801 and in
Bellcore TR-NWT-000057. The card:
provides 12 circuits with bidirectional, 600 line impedance

is designed for use in on-premises, 4-wire applications with no signaling
requirement
E&M interfaces
E&M is a signaling arrangement characterized by the use of separate paths for

control and voice signals.
E&M card
The E&M card:
provides six short-loop E&M circuit interfaces

offers a choice of Mu-law or A-law companding, 2- or 4-wire, Type I, II, III or
V signaling, complex or resistive line impedances, and a wide range of TLPs
E&M channel unit
The E&M channel unit can be configured to function as an E&M trunk or a PLR
trunk. For both trunk types, signaling is performed on separate leads from the
audio transmission paths. The channel unit:
provides one CO-compliant, long-loop E&M circuit interface

supports a configurable 2- or 4-wire transmission line interface
supports E&M Type I, II, III, IV, V, and V with filter signaling, or PLR
functionality with Type I or II signaling (SG and SB apply only to E&M
signaling types II, III, and IV, and to PLR signaling type II)
can be configured to support Mu-law companding
offers a wide range of TLPs
205
A closer view
LGE interfaces
LGE interfaces are designed to interface to CO subscriber trunks or PBX lines. LGE
interfaces detect ringing current from the public exchange on an incoming call and
also provide outgoing calling conditions (loop/ground) to the public exchange.
LGE card
The LGE card:
provides six short-loop, exchange-end, FXO-compatible circuit interfaces

supports a variety of T1 and E1 signaling types
provides battery and tip supervision, ringing detection and ring ground
capability
offers a choice of Mu-law or A-law companding, complex line or resistive
impedances, and a wide range of TLPs
LGE channel unit
The LGE channel unit:
provides one long-loop, exchange-end, FXO-compatible circuit interface

offers Mu-law companding, 2-wire, 900 or 600 complex impedances
supports a variety of T1 and E1 signaling types
LGS interfaces
LGS interfaces are designed to interface with PBX trunks or standard phones. Each
LGS subscriber interface separates the incoming analog signal into two
streamsone stream for the voice message (information) and another for the
signaling (control). When an LGS card is installed in a 3600 MainStreet shelf, a
ringing generator also must be installed.
LGS card
The LGS card:
provides 12 subscriber-end, FXS-compatible circuit interfaces

offers a choice of Mu-law or A-law companding, complex line impedances,
and a wide range of TLPs
supports LS to LGS conversion, and a variety of T1 and E1 signaling types
LGS channel unit
The LGS channel unit:
provides one CO-compliant, long-loop, subscriber-end, FXS-compatible

circuit interface
supports LS and GS to E&M conversion, and a variety of T1 and E1 signaling
types
206
MRD interfaces
The MRD channel units support permanent hard-wired connections between two
telephones over a T1 network. A conversion device, such as a PBX or a key system,
is the interface between a telephone and an MRD channel unit.
MRD channel unit
The MRD channel unit is used in on-premises applications. The channel unit:
2WMRD channel unit
The 2WMRD channel unit is used in on-premises or off-premises applications.

The channel unit:
Configurable
parameters
provides one CO-compliant, long-loop, subscriber-end, MRD circuit interface

neither sources nor sinks dc power
supports T1 signaling
provides one CO-compliant, long-loop, subscriber-end, MRD circuit interface

supports continuous adapt balance impedance
neither sources nor sinks dc power
supports T1 signaling
Table 7-1 lists all the software-configurable parameters for voice interface cards and
channel units, and indicates which card or channel unit (or both) supports each
parameter.
Table 7-1: Voice interface card and channel unit configurable parameters
Parameter
Level
Options
Card and/or
channel unit (1)
Audio transmission
mode
Slot
2-wire
E&M
Card type
Slot
4-wire
On-premises 2-wire
MRD channel unit
Off-premises 2-wire
Companding
algorithm
Card
Mu-law
E&M
A-law (2)
LGE
LGS
E&M signaling
Circuit
Type I
Type II
E&M channel unit

(E&M trunks)
Type III
Type IV
Type V
Type V with filter
207
A closer view
Parameter
Level
Options
Card and/or
channel unit (1)
E1 signaling
Circuit
CBW
LGS card
EC
LGE
LGS
LCDC
LGE
LGS
PLAR
RE
LGS
LGE
LGS
Fault signaling
Circuit
RE with central battery working
LGS channel unit
Seized
4WDX channel unit
Idle
E&M
LGE
LGS
Line balance
Circuit
< 200
LGE card
> 200
Nominal
E&M card
< 220
> 383
Nominal
LGS card
< 800 // (100 + 50 nF)

Adapt and freeze
LGE channel unit
Continuous adapt
MRD channel unit
Fixed, short loop

Fixed, long loop
Adapt and freeze
E&M channel unit
Fixed, short loop
(90-1230-01, 02, 03)
Fixed, long loop

Nominal
(90-1230-04, 07)
Alternate
Continuous adapt
Adapt and freeze
Nominal
208
(90-1230-05, 06)
Parameter
Level
Line balance
(continued)
Circuit
Options
Card and/or
channel unit (1)
Adapt and freeze
LGS channel unit
Fixed, short loop
(90-1228-02, 03)
Fixed, long loop

Nominal
(90-1228-04, 07)
Alternate
Continuous adapt
Adapt and freeze
Line impedance
Slot
Nominal
(90-1228-05, 06)
See individual descriptions of

voice cards and channel units
in chapter 13.
E&M
LGE
LGS
Loop balance
Circuit
Midpoint capacitor
enable/disable
4WDX channel unit
Build-out capacitance
Build-out resistance
On-hook Tx mute (3)
Circuit
Enabled
4WDX channel unit
Disabled
E&M channel unit

LGE channel unit
LGS channel unit
PLR signaling
Circuit
Type I
Type II
Signaling for A-law

cards
Slot
Signaling for Mu-law

cards
Slot
Type IV
E&M channel unit

(PLR trunks)
E&M card
Type V
Type I
E&M card
Type II
Type III
Signaling mode
Circuit
E&M
E&M channel unit
Pulse link repeater

Transmission only
Normal polarity
4WDX channel unit
Reverse polarity
Fixed bias
Switched bias
209
A closer view
Parameter
Level
Options
Card and/or
channel unit (1)
T1 signaling
Circuit
DPO
LGS channel unit
DPT
LGE card
LGS card
GS
LGE
LGS
GS to E&M conversion
LS
LGS channel unit

LGE
LGS
Transmission level
points
Circuit
LS to E&M conversion
LGS channel unit
LS to LGS conversion
LGS card
PLAR
LGS
PLAR with D3 framing
LGS channel unit
Reverse battery signaling
LGE channel unit
See individual descriptions of

voice cards and channel units
in chapter 13.
4WDX channel unit

4WTO card
E&M
LGE
LGS
MRD channel unit
Transmit path
equalization
Circuit
Enable/disable
4WDX channel unit
Loaded/nonloaded
Slope
Height
Bandwidth
Notes
1. E&M refers to both E&M cards and channel units; LGE to both LGE cards and channel units;
LGS to both LGS cards and channel units; and MRD to both MRD and 2WMRD channel units.
2. A-law companding is not supported on the LGE channel unit.
3. Restrictions:
- To prevent audio path singing, Tx mute must be enabled on the called circuit.
- While Tx mute is enabled, on-hook line up and test procedures cannot be performed (that is,
on-hook transmission is disabled).
210
Data interface cards and

channel units
Data interface cards and channel units provide an interface between local and
remote data devices and a digital network. Alcatel offers data cards and channel
units that support the following interfaces:
2B+D
4-wire DSU/CSU
4-wire no signaling
DSX-0
full-duplex synchronous (G.703)
multirate HDSL
TIA/EIA-449/V.36
TIA/EIA-449/X.21
TIA/EIA-530-A
V.24/RS-232
V.35
The cards can be installed in any of the eight shelf UCSs. Channel units can be
installed in any position on the Common Carrier card when the power is on or off.
For more information on the Common Carrier card, refer to chapter 5.
Data interface card and channel unit faceplates are shown in Figure 8-1.
211
A closer view
Figure 8-1: Data interface cards and channel units
2B1Q
Card
27LC2
Card
Line 1
Line 1
Line 2
Line 2
Line 3
Line 3
Line 4
Line 4
Line 5
Line 5
Line 6
Line 6
27LC3
Card
Line 1
Line 2
28LC
Card
64 Kb/s
Line 1
Line 1
Line 2
Line 2
Line 3
Line 3
Line 4
Line 4
Basic
Rate S/T
Interface
Card
Codirectional
Card
Line 3
Line 4
Active
Line 1
Line 2
Line 5
Line 5
Line 6
Line 3
Line 4
Line 6
Line 5
2
Line 7
Test
Acc.
Line 8
Line 9
Line 10
Line 6
Line 7
Line 8
Line 11
Loop
Back
Status
Line 12
Status
Status
Status
Status
2B1Q
line card
27LC2
line card
V.24/
RS232
Card
4W TO
Active
Status
90-1232-01-00-A
28LC
line card
RS-422
Card
64 kb/s
Codirectional
card
BRI S/T
card
V.35
Card
X.21/
RS449
Card
Ready
1
2
3
4
5
6
Ready
1
2
3
4
Status
Status
Status
2B1Q
2B1Q
channel unit
27LC3
line card
Status
90-1452-01
Ready
1
2
3
4
5
6
Ready 1
2
3
4
4WTO
channel unit
OCU-DP
Synch
Status
Status
90-1233-01
DS0-DP
Status
Status
90-1231-01
OCU-DP
channel unit
DS0-DP
channel unit
RS-232
DCC
RS-422
DCC
V.35
DCC
X.21
DCC
7610
212
8. Data interface cards and channel units
2B1Q line card
The 2B1Q line card connects the 3600 MainStreet system to a data device through
a 2700 MainStreet series DTU, using up to 13.9 km (8.7 mi) of standard
twisted-pair wire. Each circuit on a 2B1Q line card supports one DTU, which
provides two data interfaces. The card:
provides six 2-wire, 2B+D interface terminations for extended range,
2B1Q channel unit
off-premises applications
supports power-failure detection and line open/short detection
provides 2B1Q (ISDN U-interface) line coding, sealing current, and lightning
protection
supports optional DPM1 and DPM2 modules, which perform super-rate and
subrate multiplexing, transparent or HCM rate adaption, and DDS or X.50
rate adaption, and multidrop data bridging
supports data port redundancy on 2751, 2752, and 2753 MainStreet DTUs
The 2B1Q channel unit provides an ISDN U-interface, which meets standards set
out in ANSI T1.601. The channel unit:
provides a bidirectional BRI over STP for a distance of up to 5.5 km (3.4 mi)
provides 2700 MainStreet series DTU termination
supports ISDN loop extension applications
27LC2 line card
The 27LC2 line card connects the 3600 MainStreet system to a data device through
a 2700 MainStreet series DTU, using up to 13.9 km (8.7 mi) of standard
twisted-pair wire. Each circuit on a 27LC2 line card supports one DTU, which
provides two data interfaces. The 27LC2 line card:
provides six 2-wire, 2B+D interface terminations for extended range,
off-premises applications
supports power-failure detection and line open/short detection
provides 2B1Q (ISDN U-interface) line coding, sealing current, and lightning
protection
supports super-rate speeds
supports optional DPM1 and DPM2 modules, which perform subrate
multiplexing, transparent or HCM rate adaption, and DDS or X.50 rate
adaption, and multidrop data bridging
supports data port redundancy on 2751, 2752, and 2753 MainStreet DTUs
213
A closer view
27LC3 line card
The 27LC3 line card provides all the functionality of the 27LC2 line card, and offers
12 ports for 2B+D connections. In addition, the 27LC3 line card supports:
subrate multiplexing for all 12 ports when the DPM3 module is installed on the
card
off-card multiplexing
dedicated CPSS to DTUs that support CPSS
The DPM3 supports HCM, and is orderable separately for customers requiring
subrate multiplexing.
28LC line card
The 28LC line card connects the 3600 MainStreet system to a data device through
a 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU, using standard twisted-pair wire. Multirate HDSL
connections allow the card to support various bandwidths for different line lengths.
Each circuit on a 28LC line card supports one DTU, which provides one data
interface.
The 28LC line card supports both the 2-wire (1 Mb/s) 2801 MainStreet HDSL
DTU and the 4-wire (2 Mb/s) 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU. The 4-wire version of
the 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU can be configured to run in either 2-wire or
4-wire mode.
The 28LC line card has six multirate HDSL interfaces, which can support up to six
2-wire or three 4-wire multi-rate connections. The 28LC line card is supported
only in a double-bandwidth system.
In a 2-wire configuration, each multirate HDSL interface on the 28LC line card
supports n 64 kb/s data rates up to 1024 kb/s, where n 16 DS0s or HDSL
interfaces, or a combination of both.
In a 4-wire configuration, three line speeds are supported (line speed in 4-wire
mode refers to the total speed of both lines):
512 kb/s (allowing n 64 kb/s, where n 8 DS0s)

There are two connection modes: 2-line mode and 6-line mode.
When the 2-line mode is selected, the 28LC line card supports two lines at any
given time, with each line supporting up to 31 DS0s.
When the 6-line mode is selected, the 28LC line card supports connections on
all six lines up to a total of 61 DS0s. The first four lines cannot exceed a
combined total of 32 DS0s, with no more than 31 DS0s allocated to each line.
The remaining 29 DS0s are available for allocation to the other two lines.
214
4WTO channel unit
The 4WTO channel unit can be used in any 4-wire application where there is no
signaling required. The audio line circuitry is configured to match a 600 line
impedance in both transmit and receive directions. The channel unit:
provides one CO-compliant, long-loop, 4-wire TO interface

offers Mu-law companding and 7 mA sealing current (at maximum loop
length)
DS0-DP channel
unit
The DS0-DP channel unit complies with Bellcore recommendations

TA-TSY-000077 and TR-TSY-000458. The DS0-DP channel unit allows
communication between DS1 and DDS equipment. The channel unit:
provides an on-premises 135 DSX-0 interface

supports interface speeds of 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 56, and 64 kb/s
BRI S/T card
The BRI S/T card provides an ISDN S/T interface, which meets standards set out in
ITU-T I.430. The card:
provides four or eight 4-wire BRIs

supports 2B+D bandwidth two 64 kb/s B channels and one 16 kb/s
D channel
provides both nailed-up and semi-permanent 64 kb/s channels for ISDN
bandwidth-on-demand applications
64 kb/s
Codirectional card
The 64 kb/s Codirectional card conforms to ITU-T specification G.703. The card:
provides four G.703 compatible, 64 kb/s codirectional circuit interfaces with

AIS detection
connections
OCU-DP channel
unit
The OCU-DP channel unit provides a single user interface between an incoming
DS0-A stream to a 4-wire synchronous digital data customer loop. The OCU-DP
channel unit allows interconnection of customer-premises DSU/CSUs to the
switched network. The channel unit:
provides one CO-compliant, long-loop OCU-DP interface

supports standard DDS and Switched 56 Special Access
The OCU-DP channel unit is compatible with any DSU/CSU that meets
PUB 62310 and ANSI T1.403, and is compliant with Bellcore recommendations
TA-TSY-00077 and TA-TSY-00083. The channel unit is also compatible with any
Switched 56 kb/s service provider-approved DSU/CSU.
215
A closer view
RS-232 DCC
The RS-232 DCC meets or exceeds TIA/EIA-232C and ITU-T V.24 electrical
specifications. The card:
provides six TIA/EIA-232C and ITU-T V.24 interfaces

supports data rates up to 64 kb/s
RS-422 DCC
The RS-422 DCC provides four full-duplex interfaces. Each interface can be
independently configured as TIA/EIA-530-A, TIA/EIA-449 (V.36), X.21, or V.35.
The TIA/EIA-530-A and TIA/EIA-449 interfaces meet or exceed TIA/EIA-422-A
(for category I signals) and TIA/EIA-423-A (for category II signals) electrical
specifications, and V.24 functional specifications. The X.21 interface meets or
exceeds V.11 electrical specifications and X.24 functional specifications. The V.35
interface meets or exceeds V.11/V.10 electrical specifications and V.24 functional
specifications.
The RS-422 DCC:
can be connected to a UDP

provides 3968 kb/s total bandwidth for each card with individual circuit data
rates up to 1984 kb/s
The RS-422 DCC can be provisioned with a Slip Buffer module, which provides
each RS-422 DCC interface with a bidirectional buffer. Each buffer can be
independently configured as 0, 2, 4, 8, or 16 bytes deep. The Slip Buffer module is
typically used for satellite tail circuits and plesiochronous applications.
V.35 DCC
The V.35 DCC meets or exceeds ITU-T V.35 electrical specifications. The card:
provides three or six ITU-T V.35 interfaces

X.21 DCC
The X.21 DCC meets or exceeds ITU-T X.21 electrical specifications and meets a
subset of TIA/EIA-449. The card:
provides four or six ITU-T X.21/V.11 interfaces

Configurable
parameters
Table 8-1 lists the software-configurable parameters for data interface cards and
channel units. A full range of options is listed for each parameter, although not all
options apply to every card or channel unit on which the parameter can be
configured.
Tables 8-2 to 8-4 list the control signal classifications, interface speeds, and rate
adaption requirements.
216
Table 8-1: Data interface card and channel unit configurable parameters
Parameter
Level
Options
Card and/or channel unit (1)
8 kHz timing
signal
Circuit
Continuous
AIS signal
Circuit
Interrupted (when circuit

is connected)
Enabled (when circuit is
not connected)
Disabled
AQA
Circuit
Master
V.35
Slave
Disabled
B-channel
inversion type
Circuit
(nonISDN)
No inversion
BRI S/T
Mu-law
A-law
Bus type
Slot
(nonISDN)
Point-to-point
BRI S/T
Point-to-multipoint
Short bus
Extended bus
Card operation
Slot
Channel unit
application
Slot
Character
length
(asynchronous
only)
Circuit
V.35
SRM operation
X.21
DTU
2B1Q channel unit
Loop extension
Circuit
bandwidth
Circuit
Clocking
source
dependence
(synchronous
only)
Circuit
Clocking
source type
(synchronous
only)
Circuit
Composite
inputs
Super-rate operation
5 bits
2B1Q
6 bits
27LC2
7 bits
27LC3
8 bits
DCC
0 to 31 DS0s (limited by
line speed and
backplane bandwidth)
28LC
Independent
2B1Q
Locked
27LC2
27LC3
DCC
Circuit
(branch)
Internal
2B1Q
External
27LC2
Slave
27LC3
Special (DCE external;

slip buffer not present) (2)
DCC
Composite
2B1Q
Not composite
27LC2
27LC3
Continuity
checking
Circuit
(SRM)
Enabled
2B1Q
Disabled
27LC2
27LC3
217
A closer view
Parameter
Level
Options
Control signals
(see Table 8-2)
Circuit
High, low, end-to-end
2B1Q
27LC2
27LC3
DCC
Custom trunk
conditioning,
ABCD bits
Circuit
4-digit code (0000 to

1111)
Custom trunk
conditioning,
data
Circuit
8-digit code (00000000

to 11111111)
D-channel
transport mode
Circuit
3DS0 enabled
BRI S/T
3DS0 disabled
B1 to B7
Data position
(HCM)
Circuit
(5DS0)
Low nibble
Circuit
(SRM)
F0-B7 to F9-B0
2B1Q channel unit
High nibble
2B1Q
27LC2
27LC3
DCC
DDS multidrop
slave branch ID
Circuit
(branch)
0 to 4
2B1Q
Device gender
Circuit
DCE
2B1Q
DTE
27LC2
27LC2
27LC3
DCC
Device mode
Circuit
Asynchronous
2B1Q
Synchronous
27LC2
27LC3
DCC
Duplex method
Circuit
Full duplex
2B1Q
Half duplex
27LC2
27LC3
DCC
E1 signaling
Circuit
Transparent
Clear channel
E&M
LGS RE
LGS EC
LGS PLAR
LGE RE
LGE EC
Error correction
218
Circuit
Enabled
OCU-DP
Disabled
DS0-DP
Parameter
Level
Options
Fault signaling
Circuit
None
Idle
OCU-DP
OOS-A
OOS-B
Seized
OCU-DP
MOS
DS0-DP
CMI
FRC active
HCM frame
bandwidth
Slot
(ISDN)
Enabled
Circuit
(SRM)
1 to 8 (8 kb/s to 64 kb/s)
BRI S/T
Disabled
2B1Q
27LC2
27LC3
DCC
HCM frame
bandwidth
position
Circuit
(SRM)
B7 to B0
2B1Q
27LC2
27LC3
DCC
Hub ID
Input
specification
Slot
(branch)
2-digit octal number
2B1Q
(00 to 77)
27LC2
Circuit
(branch)
System
2B1Q
User
27LC2
27LC3
Interface
mode (3)
Slot
TE
BRI S/T
NT
LULT
2B1Q channel unit
LUNT
Interface
speeds (kb/s)
Circuit
See Table 8-3 for

individual data card and
channel unit rate
adaption interface
speeds.
2B1Q
2.4
OCU-DP
27LC2
27LC3
DCC
4.8
9.6
19.2
56
64
219
A closer view
Parameter
Level
Options
Interface type
Slot
RS-499/V.36
RS-422
RS-530-A
X.21
V.35
ISDN
BRI S/T
Non-ISDN
Inversion
Circuit
Enabled
RS-422
Disabled
Layer 1 type
Line alarm
Slot
(ISDN)
Line
I.430/ANSI
BRI S/T
ETSI
Enabled
28LC
Disabled
Line
impedance
Line speed
Line
600
4WTO
4 DS0s (256 kb/s)
28LC
8 DS0s (512 kb/s)

16 DS0s (1024 kb/s)
31 DS0s (2048 kb/s)
Module type
Slot
None
2B1Q
DPM
27LC2
DPM2
27LC3
DPM3
Multidrop data
bridges
Circuit
Master
2B1Q
Slave
27LC2
Disabled
NIC
DCC
Number of
interfaces
Slot
Number of
tandem
super-rate
circuits
(preferred or
level 2)
Circuit
BRI S/T
8
B1
BRI S/T
B2
B1 and B2
B1 and D
B2 and D
B1, B2 and D
OOS control
lead output
state
Circuit
Forced off
RS-422
Forced on
Maintains current state
OOS data lead

output signal
Circuit
Custom
Mark
Space
220
RS-422
Parameter
Level
Options
Parity
(asynchronous
only)
Circuit
Even
2B1Q
Mark
27LC2
No parity
27LC3
Odd
DCC
Space
Performance
monitoring
Circuit
(3DS0)
Rate adaption
Enabled
2B1Q channel unit
Disabled
See Table 8-4 for
individual data card and
channel unit rate
adaption methods.
2B1Q
27LC2
27LC3
DCC
Receive clock
(synchronous
only)
Circuit
RTS/CTS delay
Circuit
Inverted
RS-422
Normal
0 to 1250 ms
2B1Q
27LC2
27LC3
DCC
Sealing current
Circuit
Enabled
4WTO
Disabled
Secondary
channel
operation
Circuit
Signaling
Circuit
Enabled
OCU-DP
Disabled
Switched off
2B1Q (circuit or branch)
Switched on
27LC2 (circuit or branch)

DCC
Slip buffer
depth
Circuit
0 bytes (buffer disabled)
RS-422
2 bytes
4 bytes
8 bytes
16 bytes
Stop bits
(asynchronous
only)
Circuit
1 bit
2B1Q
2 bits
27LC2
27LC3
DCC
Subframe
position (for
DDS or X.50
rate adaption)
Circuit
Switched
56 kb/s
operation
Circuit
1 to 20

DCC
Enabled
OCU-DP
Disabled
221
A closer view
Parameter
Level
Options
T1 signaling
Circuit
Clear channel
E&M
LGE GS
LGE LS
LGS GS
LGS LS
LGS PLAR
Transparent
T3 timer
Slot
(ISDN)
1 to 30 s
BRI S/T
Termination
resistor
Slot
(ISDN)
Enabled
BRI S/T
TLPs
Circuit
RX: 16.0 to +8.0 dB
Disabled
4WTO
TX: 17.0 to +13.0 dB

Transport
bandwidth
Circuit
(SRM,
branch)
1 to 8 (8 to 64 kb/s)
2B1Q
27LC2
27LC3
DCC
Transport
mode
Slot
Transport
position
Circuit
3DS0
2B1Q channel unit
5DS0
B7 to B0

DCC
Trunk
conditioning
Slot
Zero byte
substitution
Circuit
(3DS0)
One-way
Two-way
Enabled
2B1Q channel unit
Disabled
Notes
1. 2B1Q means both 2B1Q line cards and 2B1Q channel units; DCC means RS-232, RS-422,
X.21, and V.35 DCCs.
2. This option applies to RS-422 DCCs only.
3. This parameter applies only to non-ISDN applications (for example, loop extensions).
222
Table 8-2: Data interface card and channel unit control signals
Control
signal
DCE
classification
DTE
classification
ALB
Input
Output
2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, RS-232, V.35
Input
Output
RS-422, X.21
CTS
Output
Input
2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, RS-232, V.35
DCD
Output
Input
2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, RS-232, V.35
DSR
Output
Input
2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, RS-232, V.35
DTR
Input
Output
2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, RS-232, V.35
Output
Input
RS-422, X.21
LL
Input
Output
RS-422
RDL
Input
Output
2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, RS-232, V.35
RI
Output
Input
2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, RS-232, V.35
RL
Input
Output
RS-422
RTS
Input
Output
2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, RS-232, V.35
TM
Output
Input
RS-422
Note
1. 2B1Q means both 2B1Q line cards and 2B1Q channel units.
Table 8-3: Data interface card and channel unit interface speeds
Rate adaption
method
Interface speed (b/s)
HCM (sync)
800
1200
1600
2400
4000
4800
7200
8000
9600
1200
14400
16000
16800
19200 24000
28800
32000
38400
HCM (async)

RS-232
800
1200
1600
2400
4000
4800
7200
8000
9600
1200
14400
16000
16800
19200
24000
28800
32000
38400
40000
48000
56000
57600
150
300
600
1200
2400
4800
7200
9600
14400
19200
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
RS-232
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
2B1Q, 27LC2, RS-422,

V.35, X.21
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
RS-232
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
2B1Q, 27LC2, RS-422,

V.35, X.21
2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3,

RS-422, V.35, X.21
2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3,

RS-232, RS-422, X.21,
V.35
38400
DDS (sync)
56000
DDS (async)
48000
223
A closer view
Rate adaption
method
Interface speed (b/s)
X.50 (sync)
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
RS-232
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
2B1Q, 27LC2, RS-422,

V.35, X.21
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
16
24
32
40
48
56
64
48000
Super-rates
(kb/s)
(2)
n x m, where
n=
m=
RS-422, V.35, X.21
n 64 kb/s up to 256, 512, 1024, or 2048,

depending on line speed
28LC
Notes
1. 2B1Q means both 2B1Q line cards and 2B1Q channel units.
2. Odd super-rate speeds are available for the V.35, X.21, and RS-422 DCCs with gate array
revision 2.
Table 8-4: Data interface card and channel unit rate adaption requirements
Level
Configuration
requirements
Slot
HCM/Transparent
2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3
Requires DPM2 or
DPM3
DDS
2B1Q, 27LC2, DCC
None
Enhanced transparent
RS-422
None
HCM
2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3,

DCC
None
Transparent
2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3,

28LC, DCC
None
X.50
2B1Q, 27LC2, DCC
None
DDS DS0-A
2B1Q, 27LC2, DCC
Composite inputs only
DDS DS0-B
2B1Q, 27LC2, DCC
Composite inputs only
HCM
2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3,

DCC
None
Transparent
2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3,

DCC
None
DDS
DDS Access
X.50
X.50 Telco
Circuit
Circuit
Branch
224
Level
Configuration
requirements
SRM
DDS DS0-A
2B1Q, 27LC2
With DPM2 and

configured (slot level)
for DDS or DDS Access
DDS DS0-B
2B1Q, 27LC2
With DPM2 and

DDS-HCM
2B1Q, 27LC2
With DPM
With DPM2 and
for HCM or transparent
DCC
None
HCM
2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3
With DPM2 or DPM3

and configured (slot
level) for HCM
MJU
2B1Q, 27LC2
With DPM2 and

and (SRM level) for
DS0-A
Transparent
2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3
Requires DPM
With DPM2 or DPM3
and configured (slot
level) for HCM or
transparent
DCC
None
Note
1. 2B1Q means both 2B1Q line cards and 2B1Q channel units; DCC means RS-232, RS-422,
X.21, and V.35 DCCs.
225
A closer view
226
Application and packet switching

cards
Application and packet switching cards are used in conjunction with the aggregate
cards, and with voice and data interface cards and channel units, to provide
additional specialized functionality. You can install these cards in any of the eight
shelf UCSs.
Figure 9-1 shows the faceplate of each application and packet switching card.
227
A closer view
Figure 9-1: Application and packet switching cards
Call
Processing
Card
Data
Com
Proc'r
Card
Serial Port 1
DSP
Card
DSP4
Card
DSP 5
Card
Circuit 1
Serial Port 1
DSP 1
Circuit 2
DSP 2
Circuit 3
DSP 3
Circuit 4
DSP 4
Circuit 5
DSP 5
Serial Port 2
Serial Port 2
Circuit 6
DSP 6
DSP 7
DSP 8
Mode
DSP 9
DSP 10
Data
Activity
Status
CPC
IMC
Status
DCP
card
Frame
Relay
Engine
Serial Port
Processor
Status
DSP, DSP2,
DSP3 card
FRS
Card
Serial Port 1
FASTbus A
Data
DSP4
card
DSP5, DSP5H
card
Packet
Engine
Serial Port
Data
Fault
Fault
FASTbus B
FASTbus B
Data
Data
Fault
Fault
Data
Data
Status
Status
Status
FRE
card
Status
FASTbus A
Serial Port 2
Processor
IMC
card
Status
FRS/SRIM
card
Data
Status
PE
card
7681
228
9. Application and packet switching cards
Call Processing
card
The CPC supports the ISDN backup application, which provides RAPID
protection for leased lines using ISDN alternate paths. The CPC provides backup
for 2 (basic rate), 23 (T1 primary rate), or 30 (E1 primary rate) 64 kb/s B channels.
The card:
provides Layer 2 and 3 call processing functions for National ISDN,

EUROISDN, and INS 64/1500 ISDN
supports 2B+D, 23B+D, and 30B+D when used in conjunction with the
BRI S/T, Dual T1-2, and Dual E1 cards, respectively
provides HDLC termination for up to 31 D channels
supports software upgrading
Data
Communications
Processor card
The DCP card is a general-purpose platform that provides high-capacity HDLC

switching capability. The DCP card is typically used in large networks, in nodes
with high CPSS traffic, in networks with large numbers of 3612 MainStreet
Narrow-band Multiplexers (using 4 kb/s CPSS), and for CPSS over satellite links.
The card:
augments inherent CPSS routing facilities of common control with additional

high-speed CPSS routing for up to 31 channels
supports CPSS channels with long transmission delays, for example, CPSS
links over satellite links
When used for high-speed CPSS routing, the DCP card maintains a separate
switching table and removes most of the CPSS messaging burden from the SCC3.
When configured for 4 kb/s CPSS, eight circuits are set aside (circuits 23 through
31) for 4 kb/s use; the remaining 23 circuits are available for n 8 kb/s CPSS,
where n 8.
Digital Signal
Processing cards
and modules, and
Inverse
Multiplexing cards
The DSP cards and the IMC process DSP-based applications for interface cards.
The DSP-based applications are maintained in a library and are downloaded to the
DSP circuits on DSP cards and on the IMC to process inputs from interface cards.
The SCC3 holds the library from which the DSP cards and the IMC download the
applications.
DSP modules provide additional DSP links for the cards on which they are
installed. The Fax/HCV module provides combined G3 fax and HCV voice
compression.
There are six DSP card variants, two DSP module variants, and one IMC variant,
each variant providing different levels of processing power.
229
A closer view
The DSP cards and modules support the following applications:
subrate switching (DSP4 card)

subrate multiplexing
transparent rate adaption, HCM rate adaption, and multidrop data
FRE card
bridging (DSP, DSP2, and DSP3 cards)

X.50 rate adaption and DDS rate adaptionDDS, DDS Access and
DDS Core (DSP2 and DSP3 cards)
PCM bridging (DSP, DSP2, and DSP3 cards)
voice conference bridging (DSP3 card)
HCV compression (DSP3, DSP4, DSP5, and DSP5H cards)
A-CELP (G.729 and G.729A) and LD-CELP (G.728) voice compression
(DSP5 card)
G3 fax signal demodulation/modulation (DSP4, DSP5, and DSP5H cards)
super-tandem operation (DSP4, DSP5, and DSP5H cards)
voice over frame relay with CS-A-CELP voice compression (DSP5 card)
inverse multiplexing (IMC)
echo cancellation (DSP, DSP2, DSP3, DSP4, DSP5, and DSP5H cards)
V.32 modem relay (DSP5 card)
The FRE card provides the ability to switch the output of frame relay interfaces
offered by end-user devices over any primary rate or data link. The FRE card
switches frames arriving on an incoming logical data link to an outgoing logical
data link (over the backplane bus), according to user-configured DLCs. The FRE
card supports:
industry standards-compliant frame routing, dynamic bandwidth allocation,
230
congestion control, and frame error checking for up to 62 DS0s and super-rate
n 56 or n 64 kb/s frame streams
8500 fps aggregate switching performance (64-byte frames over two 1536-kb/s
frame streams), combined bandwidth of 3968 kb/s, 992 PVCs for each frame
stream with up to 1984 PVCs total for each card
DLCI multiplexingthe merging of voice, data, and fax inputs in accordance
with standards set out in FRF.11
frame stream protection switching (LMI-triggered RAPID)
HDLC-based protocol encapsulation according to these standards:
RFC 1490 and ANSI T1.617a Annex F
ANSI T1.617a Annex G
transparent HDLC encapsulation using the Annex G frame format,
including support for CPSS over frame relay
QoS and frame fragmentation/reassembly features to support delay-sensitive
traffic, such as VoFR
software upgrading
FRS/SRIM card
The FRS/SRIM card provides the ability to switch the output of the frame relay
interfaces offered by end-user devices over any primary rate or data link. The
FRS/SRIM card switches frames arriving on an incoming logical data link to an
outgoing logical data link (over the backplane bus), according to user-configured
DLCs.
The FRS/SRIM card:
provides industry standards-compliant frame routing, dynamic bandwidth
PE card
allocation, congestion control, and frame error checking for up to 31 DS0s and
super-rate n 56 or n 64 kb/s frame streams
supports 2000 fps aggregate switching performance (64-byte frames over one
1920 kb/s frame stream), combined bandwidth of 1920 kb/s, 992 PVCs for
each frame stream with up to 1024 PVCs total for each card
processes data at subrate speeds (in HCM, DDS, or X.50 format) that are not
limited to multiples of 8 kb/s
supports HDLC-based protocol encapsulation according to these standards:
RFC 1490 and ANSI T1.617a Annex F
ANSI T1.617a Annex G
transparent HDLC encapsulation using the Annex G frame format,
including support for CPSS over frame relay
supports software upgrading
The PE card provides complete, standards-compliant X.25 switching capabilities,

and supports most of the features available on the FRE card for frame relay
switching.
For information about X.25 software-configurable parameters supported on the
PE card, see the MainStreet X.25 Service General Information book.
Configurable
parameters
Tables 9-1 (CPC), 9-2 (DCP card), 9-3 (DSP cards and IMC), and 9-4 (FRS/SRIM,
FRE, and PE cards) list all of the application and packet switching card
software-configurable parameters. Table 9-5 lists the SRIM software-configurable
parameters.
231
A closer view
Table 9-1: CPC configurable parameters

Parameter
Level
Options
B-channel inversion type
Circuit
No inversion
Mu-law
A-law
B-channel search
Circuit
Channel search high

Channel search low
Backplane communication
Slot
Shared
Dedicated
Bearer capability
Circuit (index)
Speech
Clear 64 kb/s
Rate adaption
3.1 kHz
Bearer service
Circuit
H0 enable
H0 disable
Nx64 enable
Nx64 disable
BRI initialization
Circuit
Fixed TEI
Auto TEI
SPID 1
SPID 2
Bus configuration
Bus configuration type
Circuit
Point-to-point
Point-to-multipoint
Call status information reporting
Circuit
Report off
Report on
Dial delay
Circuit (index)
First (0 to 60 s)
Subsequent (5 to 60 s)
Dial/nondial
Circuit (index)
Enable
Disable
Interface speed (serial ports 1 and 2)
Slot
9600 b/s
1200 b/s
Interface standard
Circuit
NTT
EUROISDN
NI-1
NI-2
Interface type
Circuit
None
BRI
E1 PRI
T1 PRI
232
Parameter
Level
Local number
Circuit
Directory number
Options
None
Local
National
International
Unknown
Subaddress
None
1 to 7 characters
Number of B channels
Circuit
BRI
1 or 2
T1 PRI
1 to 23
E1 PRI
1 to 30
Number of B channels
Circuit (index)
1 to 30
Auto
PCM encoding
Circuit
A-law
Mu-law
Auto
Remote number
Circuit (index)
Directory number
1 to 25 digits
Subaddress
None
1 to 7 characters
Retries
Circuit (index)
0 to 12
Infinite
Verify/nonverify (incoming call)
Circuit (index)
Enable
Disable
Table 9-2: DCP card configurable parameters

Parameter
Level
Options
4 kb/s CPSS
Card
Enabled
Disabled
CPSS cost
Circuit
Bias against
Bias towards
Normal
Satellite delay
Circuit
Accept the delay time

Accept no delay time
Serial port CPSS cost
Card
Bias against
Bias towards
Normal
233
A closer view
Parameter
Level
Options
Serial port interface speed
Card
300 b/s
600 b/s
1200 b/s
2400 b/s
4800 b/s
9600 b/s
19200 b/s
Serial port protocol
Card
CPSS
VT100
Transport bandwidth
Circuit
8 to 64 kb/s
Table 9-3: DSP card and IMC configurable parameters

Parameter
Level
6 dB attenuation pad
Circuit
Options
Card
Enabled
DSP3
Disabled
DSP4
DSP5
DSP5H
AC15 tone detection
Circuit
Enabled
DSP3
Disabled
DSP4
DSP5
DSP5H
ADI
Circuit (branch)
Enabled
DSP1
Disabled
DSP2
DSP3
Antistreaming
Circuit (branch)
Enabled
DSP1
Disabled
DSP2
DSP3
Antistreaming timeout
Circuit (SRM)
1 to 255 s
DSP1
DSP2
DSP3
Automatic gain control
Bearer rate
Circuit
Circuit
Enabled
DSP5
Disabled
DSP5H
56 kb/s
IMC
64 kb/s
Bit rate
(1)
Circuit
8 kb/s
DSP5
9.6 kb/s
DSP5H
12.8 kb/s
16 kb/s
Break timer
Circuit (VoFR)
80 ms to 30 s
DSP5
Broadcaster
Circuit (bridge)
Enabled
DSP3
Disabled
234
Parameter
Level
Broadcast mode
Circuit (bridge)
Options
Card
Enabled
DSP3
Disabled
Card circuits
Slot
2 cct
DSP1
6 cct
DSP2
DSP3
Card operation
Slot
Delta signaling
DSP1
HCVD
DSP2
DDS core
DSP3
G3 fax relay
DSP4
Subrate switching
G3 fax or super-tandem,
or combined G3 fax and
super-tandem
Application number
DSP5
HCV/Fax
LD-CELP
A-CELP
AVoFR
Application number
DSP5H
HCV
Companding law
Circuit (input for

VCBs, SRM for
PCM bridges,
HCV
compression)
A-law
Mu-law
Automatic
DSP1 (PCM
bridging)
DSP2 (PCM
bridging)
DSP3 (VCBs, PCM
bridging, HCV
compression)
DSP4
DSP5
DSP5H
Composite inputs for

SRM branch channels
Circuit (SRM)
Composite
DSP1
Not composite
DSP2
DSP3
DSP4
Compression
Data position for HCM
Circuit
Circuit
16 kb/s
DSP3
8 kb/s
DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
F0-B6 to F9-B0
DSP3
DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
DLCI assignment
Circuit (VoFR)
DS0 port interface

speeds for DDS
DS0-A rate-adapted
subrate sets
Circuit (SRS)
16 to 1007
DSP5
2.4 kb/s
DSP4
4.8 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
19.2 kb/s
48 kb/s
56 kb/s
235
A closer view
Parameter
Level
DS0 port interface

speeds for DDS
DS0-B rate-adapted
subrate sets
Circuit (SRS)
DS0 port interface

speeds for X.50
rate-adapted subrate
sets
Circuit (SRS)
Options
Card
2.4 kb/s
DSP4
4.8 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
2.4 kb/s
DSP4
4.8 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
19.2 kb/s
48 kb/s
DS0 port HCM

bandwidth
Circuit (SRS)
1 to 8 (8 to 64 kb/s)
DSP4
DS0 port HCM F-bit

position
Circuit (SRS)
B7 to B0
DSP4
DSP resources
Slot
1 10
DSP5
2 10
DTMF tone detection
Circuit (VoFR)
(2)
2 10
DSP5H
Enabled
DSP5
Disabled
DTMF tone
regeneration
Circuit (VoFR)
E1 signaling type
Circuit
Enabled
DSP5
Disabled
Transparent
DSP3
Clear channel
DSP4
E&M
DSP5
Continuous E&M
DSP5H
LGS remote extension

LGS earth calling
LGS PLAR
LGE remote extension
LGE earth calling
Echo cancellation for
HCV circuit
Circuit
Enabled
DSP3
Disabled
DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
DSP5
DSP5H
Echo cancellation
return loss threshold
Circuit
3 dB
DSP3
6 dB
DSP4
0 dB to 12 dB
DSP5
DSP5H
Echo clipping for HCV

circuit
Circuit
Enabled
DSP3
Disabled
DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
DSP5
DSP5H
Echo clipping
threshold
236
Circuit
10 to 50 dBm0
DSP5
DSP5H
Parameter
Level
Fax transmission
Circuit
Options
Card
Enabled
DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
Disabled
DSP5
DSP5H
Forced super-tandem
Circuit
Enabled
DSP4
Disabled
Hub identification
Slot
2-digit BCD octal number

(00 to 77)
DSP1
DSP2
DSP3
Input gain
Circuit (input)
16 to +9 dB
DSP3
LD-CELP post-filter
Circuit
Enabled
DSP5
Disabled
Listen-only mode
Circuit (input)
Enabled
DSP3
Disabled
Mode
Circuit
Mode 1
IMC
Mode 3
Multidrop data bridge
branch channel or
circuit devices
Circuit (SRM)
Master
DSP1
Slave
DSP2
DSP3
Nonstandard facilities
frame handling
Circuit
All messages transmitted

and received
DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
NSF messages blocked

Output gain
Circuit (input)
16 dB to +9 dB
DSP3
Rate adaption
methods (HCV)
Circuit
Transparent
DSP3
HCM
DSP4
DSP5
DSP5H
Rate adaption
methods (SRS circuit
or DS0 port)
Circuit (SRS)
Transparent
DSP4
HCM
DDS X.50
4 kb/s CPSS
Rx and Tx gain range
Circuit
12 to +12 dB
DSP5
DSP5H
SCID assignment
Circuit (VoFR)
4 to 255
DSP5
Set identifier X.50

SRS
Circuit (SRS)
1 to 20 (at 2.4 kb/s)
DSP4
1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15,

17, 19 (at 4.8 kb/s)
1, 5, 9, 13, 17
(at 9.6 kb/s)
5, 13, or 1, 9
(at 19.2 kb/s)
1 (at 48 kb/s)
Sidetone gain
Circuit (input)
Enabled
DSP3
Disabled
237
A closer view
Parameter
Level
Signaling jitter buffer
Circuit (VoFR)
Options
Card
Auto
DSP5
Off
Signaling type
Circuit
E1
DSP3
T1
DSP4
DSP5
DSP5H
Silence detection
Circuit (VoFR)
Enabled
DSP5
Disabled
Silence detection
threshold
Circuit (VoFR)
Subframe type
Slot
80 to 30 dBm0
DSP5
M44
DSP1
SIG16S
DSP2
SIG16L
DSP3
SIG32
Super-tandem
operation (3)
Circuit
Enabled
DSP4
Disabled
DSP5
DSP5H
Super-tandem
synchronization time
Circuit
0.1 to 3.1 s
DSP4
(0.1-s increments)
Synchronization
alarm
Circuit
Synchronization loss
alarm
Circuit
0.1 to 5.0 s
DSP5
(0.1-s increments)
DSP5H
Declare: 0 to 30 s
IMC
Clear: 1 to 30 s
Enabled
DSP3
Disabled
DSP4
DSP5
DSP5H
Synchronization lost
alarm times
Circuit
Declare: 0.5 to 60 s
DSP3
Clear: 0.5 to 60 s
DSP4
DSP5
DSP5H
T1 signaling type
Circuit
Transparent
DSP3
Clear channel
DSP4
E&M
DSP5
LGS LS
DSP5H
LGS GS
LGS PLAR
LGS PLAR D3
LGE LS
LGE GS
Transmission level
Circuit
3 to 15 dBm0
DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
Transmission rate
Circuit
4800 b/s
DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
9600 b/s
238
Parameter
Level
Options
Card
Transport bandwidth
for HCM
Circuit
(HCM_TRANS)
1 to 8 (8 to 64 kb/s)
DSP3
Circuit
16 to 64 kb/s
DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
24 to 64 kb/s
DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
Circuit
(transparent)
8 kb/s
DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
Circuit
B7 to B0
DSP3
Circuit (HCM or
transparent
8 kb/s)
B7 to B0
DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
Circuit
(transparent
16 kb/s)
B7 to B1, B6
DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
User-side interface
speed
Circuit
384 kb/s
IMC
User/system reserved
inputs
Circuit (SRM)
System
DSP1
User
DSP2
(HCM 8 kb/s)
Circuit
(HCM 16 kb/s)
Transport position
16 kb/s
DSP3
DSP4
Voice mute
Circuit
Enabled
DSP5
Disabled
DSP5H
Notes
1. The DSP5 and DSP5H cards support an 8 or 16 kb/s bit rate when HCV voice compression is
configured. The DSP5 card supports an 8 kb/s bit rate when A-CELP (G.729 and G.729A)
voice compression or VoFR is configured. The DSP5 card supports 9.6, 12.8, and 16 kb/s bit
rates with LD-CELP voice compression.
2. This option applies to CS-A-CELP (G.729A) voice compression. CS-A-CELP (G.729A) is of a
lower complexity than CS-A-CELP (G.729) voice compression. If VoFR is configured and this
option is selected, 10 DSP circuits are allocated for VoFR operation.
3. This parameter is supported on DSP5 cards configured for A-CELP voice compression and
VoFR.
239
A closer view
Table 9-4: FRS/SRIM, FRE, and PE card configurable parameters

Parameter
Level
Options
Card
36120 identifier
FASTbus interface
0 to 32767
FRE
PE
ACT
Encapsulation circuit
FASTbus interface
1 to 64 kbytes for FRS/SRIM cards
FRS/SRIM
1 to 6000 ms for FRE cards
FRE
1 to 1500 kbytes for PE cards
PE
10 to 1000 kbytes
FRE
PE
Frame stream
Backplane communications
Card
1 to 64 kbytes for FRS/SRIM cards
FRS/SRIM
1 to 1500 kbytes for PE cards
FRE
PE
Dedicated
FRS/SRIM
Shared
FRE
PE
Bc
DLC
0 to 1920 kb for FRS/SRIM cards
FRS/SRIM
0 to 1984 kb for FRE and PE cards
FRE
PE
Be
DLC
0 to 1920 kb/s for FRS/SRIM cards
FRS/SRIM
0 to 1984 kb/s for FRE and PE cards
FRE
PE
Cable name
Card slot
CIR
FASTbus interface
Card
DLC
1 to 15 alphanumeric characters, no
spaces
FRE
FRE
FRE
PE
PE
FRS/SRIM
FRE
PE
PE
Circuit application
Circuit protection
Circuit
Circuit
Stream
FRS/SRIM
Rate adaption
FRE
Encapsulation
PE
LMI-triggered RAPID
FRE
Disable
Class-of-service rate enforcement
DLC
Enable
FRS/SRIM
Disable
FRE
PE
240
Parameter
Level
Options
Card
Congestion clear time
1 to 1440 min
FRE
PE
FASTbus interface
1 to 1440 min
FRE
PE
Frame stream
1 to 1440 min
FRE
PE
Switch
(1)
1 to 1440 min
FRE
PE
Congestion filtering
FASTbus interface
Frame stream
Switch
Congestion raise time
(1)
Enable
FRE
Disable
PE
Enable
FRE
Disable
PE
Enable
FRE
Disable
PE
Enable
FRE
Disable
PE
0 to 240 s
FRE
PE
FASTbus interface
0 to 240 s
FRE
PE
Frame stream
0 to 240 s
FRE
PE
Switch
(1)
0 to 240 s
FRE
PE
CPSS router version
Card
Router version 1
FRS/SRIM
Host router
Encapsulated protocol maximum
frame size
16 to 4472 octets
FRS/SRIM
FRE
PE
Encapsulation type
LAPB RFC 1490
FRS/SRIM
LAPB Annex G
FRE
Transparent HDLC
PE
Trace agent
FASTbus CPSS
Fault handling mode
Flags between frames
Fragment payload size
Card
Card
CPSS1
FRE
CPSS2
PE
Enhanced
FRE
Standard
PE
Frame stream
1 to 10
FRE
1 to 10
PE
DLC
32, 34, 82, 128, or 130 bytes
FRE
241
A closer view
Parameter
Level
Fragmentation mode
DLC
Options
Card
Disabled
FRE
Fragment
Reassemble
Fragment and reassemble
Frame stream name
Circuit
0 to 8 alphanumeric characters, no
spaces
FRS/SRIM
FRE
PE
Heartbeat polling interval
Frame stream
5 to 30 s
FRS/SRIM
FRE
PE
Interface speed
Circuit
FRS/SRIM
FRE
PE
Loopback detection
Frame stream
Enable
FRE
Disable
Major fault card dead threshold
Major fault card reset threshold
Maximum frame size
Card
Card
Frame stream
1 to 30000
FRE
Unlimited
PE
1 to 30000
FRE
Unlimited
PE
16 to 4472 octets
FRS/SRIM
FRE
PE
MCT
0 to 100% for FRS/SRIM and PE cards
FRS/SRIM
FRE
PE
FASTbus interface
0 to 100%
FRE
PE
Frame stream
FRS/SRIM
FRE
PE
Switch
(1)
0 to 100%
FRS/SRIM
FRE
PE
Protocol type
Frame stream
LMI User, Network, Network Extended
FRS/SRIM
ANSI T1.617 Annex D User, Network,

Bidirectional
FRE
ITU-T Q.933 Annex A User, Network,

Bidirectional
No protocol
Auto discovery (network mode) (2)
242
PE
Parameter
Level
Report type
FASTbus interface
Frame stream
Options
Card
Alarm
FRE
Network management events
PE
Alarm
FRE
PE
Alarm
FRE
PE
None (FRE cards only)

Switch (1)
SCT
Alarm
FRE
PE
FRS/SRIM
FRE
PE
FASTbus interface
0 to 100%
FRE
PE
Frame stream
FRS/SRIM
FRE
PE
Switch
(1)
0 to 100%
FRS/SRIM
FRE
PE
Serial port baud rate
Card
300 b/s
FRS/SRIM
600 b/s
FRE
1200 b/s
PE
2400 b/s
4800 b/s
9600 b/s
19200 b/s
Serial port CPSS cost
Serial port type
Card
Card
Normal
FRS/SRIM
Bias against
FRE
Bias toward
PE
CPSS
FRS/SRIM
VT100
FRE
PE
Service category
DLC
Real time
FRE
Best effort
Station identifier
FASTbus interface
0 to 64
FRS/SRIM
FRE
Status enquiry message timeout
Frame stream
5 to 30 s (4)
FRS/SRIM
FRE
PE
243
A closer view
Parameter
Level
Options
Card
Status message rate
Frame stream
1 to 255
FRS/SRIM
FRE
PE
Transport bandwidth
Circuit
1 to 8 (8 kb/s to 64 kb/s)
FRS/SRIM
FRE
PE
Notes
1. The card CPU takes the same congestion clear time and congestion raise time values as those configured for the switch.
Congestion filtering is always enabled on the CPU, regardless of the configuration for the switch.
2. The auto-discovery option sets the auto-discovery protocol through the protocol type parameter, even though the auto-discovery
protocol is not a link management protocol.
3. This option is configurable as heartbeat, timeout, or status rate.
4. This option is not configurable if the auto-discovery protocol is used.
Table 9-5: SRIM configurable parameters

Parameter
Level
Options
Restrictions
A-bit handling
Slot
Nonstandard
SRIM Mode: X.50 or HCM
Standard
Aggregate circuit
mode
Circuit
CPSS
Stream
Rate adaption
Data position
Subrate
stream
F0-B7 to F9-B0
Rate adaption: HCM
DDS method
Circuit
DS0-A and DS0-B:
Rate adaption: DDS
2.4 kb/s
4.8 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
19.2 kb/s
56 kb/s (DS0-A only)
Framing bit position
244
Circuit
B7 to B0
Rate adaption: HCM
Parameter
Level
Options
Restrictions
Interface speed
Circuit
2400 b/s
SRIM mode: DDS or HCM
4800 b/s
Rate adaption: DDS
9600 b/s
19200 b/s
56000 b/s
Subrate
stream
2400 b/s
4800 b/s
Rate adaption: DDS
9600 b/s
DDS method: DS0-A
19200 b/s
56000 b/s
2400 b/s
DDS method: DS0-B
4800 b/s
9600 b/s
19200 b/s
2400 b/s
SRIM mode: X.50 or HCM
4800 b/s
Rate adaption: X.50 Div. 2,

3 or 5
9600 b/s
19200 b/s
48000 b/s
SRIM mode: X.50

Rate adaption: X.50 Bis
Loopback detection
Slot
On
Off
SRIM mode:
DDS or HCM
X.50 or HCM
Module type
Slot
No module
SRIM
Rate adaption
Circuit
HCM
DDS
X.50
Subrate
stream
Signaling
SRIM mode
DDS
HCM
X.50
Subrate
stream
On
Rate adaption: HCM
Slot
X.50 or HCM
Off
Module type: SRIM
DDS or HCM
245
A closer view
Parameter
Level
Options
Restrictions
Subframe position
Circuit
1 to 20 at 2400 b/s
1 to 10 at 4800 b/s
Rate adaption: DDS
1 to 5 at 9600 b/s
DDS method: DS0-B
2 or 4 at 19200 b/s
1 at 56000 b/s (DS0-A
only)
Subrate
stream
at 2.4 kb/s:
13
17
21
25
29
33
37
41
45
49
53
57
61
65
69
73
77
Rate adaption: X.50 Div. 2
at 4.8 kb/s:
1
17
25
33
41 49
57
65
73
at 9.6 kb/s:
17
33
49
65
at 19.2 kb/s:
1
17
33
49
at 2.4 kb/s:
1 to 20
Rate adaption: X.50 Div. 3
at 4.8 kb/s:
1
11
13
15
17
19
13
13
at 9.6 kb/s:
1
17
at 19.2 kb/s:
1
at 48 kb/s:
Rate adaption: X.50 bis
Circuit
1 to 8 (x 8 kb/s)
Rate adaption: HCM
Subrate
stream
1 to 8 (x 8 kb/s)
Transport position
Subrate
stream
B7 to B0
Rate adaption: HCM
X.50 method
Circuit
Div. 2
Transport bandwidth
Div. 3
246
Management
Management overview
Alcatel management products enable service providers to push the limits of
efficient networking and service provisioning. The management portfolio includes
a full complement of products for managing a growing, carrier-scale, multiservice
network. Alcatel management products provide harmonized solutions that are
optimized to minimize network complexity and control the total cost of
ownership.
This chapter describes:
types of management used for advanced communications networks

service management
network management
node management
open interfaces
249
Management
Types of
management
The TMN reference model defined by the ITU-T provides service providers with
layered management functions within a framework for the integrated management
of a communications network. Figure 10-1 shows the management layers.
Figure 10-1: Management layers
Business
management
A
c
c
o
u
n
t
i
n
g
Open
interfaces
Open
interfaces
Service
management
Network
management
Node
management
14765
The business management layer consists of management processes used to operate

the business of providing network-based services to customers.
The service management layer consists of management processes used to develop
and operate the services that the network supports.
The network management layer consists of management processes used to develop
and operate the infrastructure of the network.
The node management layer consists of management processes used to operate the
elements that make up the network infrastructure.
Open interfaces are a method OSSs use to manage the network and service layers.
Accounting is the means of providing information for billing of services.
Service
management
250
Alcatel service management products offer:
unparalleled subscriber service assurance by using network failure analysis

reduced time-to-market for new services
more rapid and cost-effective service activation
web-based access, visibility, and control for service providers and subscribers
advanced functions such as touchless provisioning and subscriber self-service
10. Management overview
Service management
products
The suite of Alcatel and CrossKeys service management products leverages the
Alcatel network management products and includes:
Alcatel 5740 Service Subscription Manager

Alcatel 5730 VPN Service Manager
CrossKeys Resolve Si
Alcatel 5740 Service Subscription Manager
The Alcatel 5740 SSM is a software application designed for broadband DSL service
providers who use their access infrastructure to offer their own retail services or
offer broadband connectivity to ISPs and multimedia content providers. Such
services include high-speed Internet access, broadcast TV, and video-on-demand
services.
By mapping service-level objects such as retail providers, subscribers, service
subscriptions, and service definitions to network ports and virtual connections, the
Alcatel 5740 SSM reduces the complexity of service activation.
The Alcatel 5740 SSM interprets and displays network events in terms of their
impact on subscribers and services. The Alcatel 5740 SSM provides JAVA-based
GUIs for service providers who provide web-based access.
Alcatel 5730 VPN Service Manager
The Alcatel 5730 VSM is a software application designed for service providers who
offer private VPN-based services for outsourcing corporate Intranet connectivity.
These VPN services may be offered as:
managed frame relay

managed cell relay
IP VPNs using Internet tunneling such as IPSec
QoS-based VPNs using MPLS in the core network
VPNs are identified as subscriber sites and services. All configuration, fault, and
performance management of each VPN is presented through this subscriber and
service identification. Network services and events are shown as a visual map and
presented in terms of their impact on subscribers and services. The Alcatel 5730
VSM provides JAVA-based GUIs for service providers who provide web-based
access.
CrossKeys Resolve Si
CrossKeys Resolve Si is a software application that correlates network information

to provide an end-to-end service view by linking subscriber information and QoS
objectives. It manages service performance from a subscriber perspective and
provides the necessary information to ensure delivery of high-value services that
meet the subscriber requirements.
251
Management
Network
management
The Alcatel network management portfolio includes a full complement of related

management products for managing a growing, carrier-scale, multiservice
network.
Alcatel 5620 Network

Manager
The Alcatel 5620 NM is an industry-leading network and element management

platform that is distinguished by its open, scalable, highly available, multiaccess,
multitechnology management capabilities. Network management functions
include:
fault management
configuration management
accounting
performance management
security functions
With the Alcatel 5620 NM, network operators have an easy-to-use GUI to perform
the following across a full range of ATM, frame relay, IP, X.25, and TDM elements:
monitor network operation in real time

set up and manage end-to-end connections
perform diagnostics
back up and restore node databases
perform software upgrades
isolate and manage problems
The Alcatel 5620 NM provides unsurpassed scalability and flexibility. It can

manage networks of any size, containing thousands of nodes.
Table 10-1 describes some of the features of the Alcatel 5620 NM.
Table 10-1: Alcatel 5620 NM features
252
Feature
Description
Sophisticated
network modeling
A relational database tracks the status of most of the MIB objects in the
underlying network elements.
Redundancy
Service providers can deploy two Alcatel 5620 NM stations: one in

active mode and the other in standby mode.
Scalability
The Alcatel 5620 NM offers unparalleled scalability to support networks

of up to 25 000 resources, 5000 nodes, over 250 000 SPVCs, over
1 000 000 SVCs, and up to 255 network operators.
Configuration
management
Network nodes and resources can be configured down to the port and
circuit level.
Partitioning
Service providers can design network sharing structures so that they

can assign as much or as little of the network as required.
Feature
Description
Connection
provisioning and
activation
Sophisticated access/backbone link and connection-management

capabilities provide precise control over bandwidth usage and
connection routing for the following connection types:
Layer 3
Layer 2
Layer 1
PVCs, SPVCs, and SVCs
IP services
Network map
representation and
navigation
The network navigation map displays the network hierarchy and a

structured view of the network. Icons represent individual elements and
information about the connections between them.
Node
autodiscovery
The Alcatel 5620 NM automatically detects new nodes in the network

and immediately initiates a process to reconcile node details into its
management database.
Customized
network views
Service providers can represent the network in ways that are most
meaningful to the operator.
Fault management
Network faults are immediately visible. Sophisticated tools for

diagnostics and maintenance functions aid in the recovery process.
Real-time status
reporting
An advanced real-time GUI provides visibility of the status of all network

components down to the port and circuit level.
Real-time
performance
monitoring
Operators have real-time views of the performance of elements in the

network.
Trouble ticketing
Network status changes result in the automatic generation of trouble

tickets to aid in recording and tracking network faults.
Alarms
Service providers can configure network elements to send alarms to the

Alcatel 5620 NM.
Fault notifications:
CMIP and SNMP
Alarms or trouble tickets are exported in real time to other management

systems in the form of CMIP notifications or SNMP trap messages.
Diagnostics and
maintenance
Physical port loopbacks and busy-outs, in-band ATM OAM loopback

and continuity testing, and the capability to perform on-node and
off-node maintenance connections, are powerful tools that enable
customers to carry out their own diagnostics and maintenance.
Path rerouting and

recovery
The automatic connection recovery capability attempts to reroute all

connections around any trunk failure because of a physical layer alarm.
If a network failure results in the loss of continuity of an end-to-end
connection, the Alcatel 5620 NM automatically attempts to move the
service to an alternate access point.
Alcatel 5620 NM Statistics Collector
The Alcatel 5620 NM Statistics Collector is a scalable statistics collection system

that provides raw usage data across all network equipment and technologies
managed by the Alcatel 5620 NM. It can be used to collect statistics on items such
as PVCs, trunks and access links, IP interfaces, and X.25 resources. It collects
statistics at the physical, frame, and cell-switching layers of the network for traffic
volume, network congestion, and error conditions.
253
Management
Alcatel 5620 NM Data Collector
The Alcatel 5620 NM Data Collector is a billing mediation system that collects and
processes SVC accounting records generated by X.25, frame relay, and ATM
switches. Processing includes aggregation, formatting, rating, and validation of the
collected accounting records.
Some Alcatel nodes can send SVC accounting data records to the Alcatel 5620 NM
Data Collector for processing. The Alcatel 5620 NM Data Collector can send the
data to the CrossKeys NetworkWare KeyBill for flexible billing mediation options,
to KeyInfo for network reporting, and to KeyNotes for operator-to-operator
communications.
Alcatel 5650 MultiNetwork Service Controller
The Alcatel 5650 MNSC is a software application that consolidates the

management of multiple Alcatel 5620 NM networks under a single end-to-end
management platform. Its ability to support separate networks makes the
5650 MNSC unique in the industry.
The separate networks may belong to one service provider or are recognized
through partnerships with other service providers. Consolidating the management
of multiple networks enables service providers to extend the geographical coverage
of their services to include partner networks, while continuing to enjoy
single-touch, end-to-end provisioning and service assurance as if they had a single,
integrated network.
Alcatel 5660 Network Design System
The Alcatel 5660 NDS is a software tool for network design, optimization,
planning, and failure analysis. It enables network engineers to eliminate many of
the costly, specialized, and labor-intensive tasks involved in designing complex
networks and planning for future growth.
Network design is a complex process, requiring detailed knowledge of equipment
capabilities, bandwidth provisioning, and future connectivity requirements. The
Alcatel 5660 NDS incorporates years of engineering expertise and includes
automated features to save time inputting data and defining network details.
254
Related network
management products
Alcatel provides a number of network management products that complement

the Alcatel 5620 NM. These products share the LAN used by the Alcatel 5620 NM
and include the:
Alcatel 5620 Simulator

Alcatel 5521A Auxiliary Element Manager
CrossKeys Resolve Ni
CrossKeys NetworkWare KeyInfo
CrossKeys NetworkWare KeyNotes
Alcatel 5620 Simulator
The 5620 Simulator is a software application that looks and functions exactly like
the Alcatel 5620 NM but allows network operators to simulate and test networks
without attached equipment or bandwidth resources. It is useful for training new
operators without affecting live network operations and for studying planned
changes to an existing network.
The Craft Interface Node Manager provides an easy-to-use, text-based,

menu-based interface for configuring, monitoring, and troubleshooting nodes
through a node management session.
The 5521 PC EM provides single-terminal control of small networks up to 100

nodes, allowing remote configuration of network equipment and centralized alarm
reporting.
Alcatel 5521A Auxiliary Element Manager
The 5521A PC EM works with a 5521 PC EM or an Alcatel 5620 NM to keep

on-call network technicians informed of major network events. It allows the
technician to access nodes remotely through network links or through modems on
the PSTN.
CrossKeys Resolve Ni
CrossKeys Resolve Ni is a software application that enables network operators to

explore and analyze networks from every angle to achieve rapid and
comprehensive understanding of network performance.
CrossKeys NetworkWare KeyInfo
CrossKeys NetworkWare KeyInfo is a network reporting application.
255
Management
CrossKeys NetworkWare KeyNotes
CrossKeys NetworkWare KeyNotes is a software application that provides

operator-to-operator communications.
SNMP support
SNMP is a management protocol used to set and monitor network configuration

and runtime parameters of entities in a TCP/IP LAN. The Alcatel 5620 NM
provides three levels of SNMP support for SNMP-managed devices:
direct support as part of the Alcatel 5620 NM basic configuration

Open SNMP, which is an integration with HP Openview NNM
element managers such as CrossKeys CrossControl
CPSS
The Alcatel 5620 NM uses CPSS, a proprietary communication protocol, to

manage 3600 MainStreet systems. CPSS messages carry the following types of
information:
control commands
statistics for performance monitoring
alarms for diagnostic purposes
configuration status data
CPSS messages travel through in-band or out-of-band CPSS links. In-band CPSS
links use the same medium that subscriber traffic uses, such as a T1 link between
two 3600 MainStreet systems. Out-of-band CPSS links use a different medium
than that used by subscriber traffic, such as an TIA/EIA-232 link between the
Alcatel 5620 NM and a 3600 MainStreet system.
Connection methods
Network management equipment can connect to the 3600 MainStreet system

through network or serial connections.
Network connections
When a 3600 MainStreet system is connected to the Alcatel 5620 NM through a

network connection, CPSS messages travel in band over CPSS links that use any of
the following network links:
timeslot 0 on E1 links (National Use Bits)

the FDL on T1 links using ESF framing
the supervisory channel on X.21 PRI and V.35 PRI aggregate cards (56 kb/s
and n 64 kb/s variants)
all or part of a 64 kb/s channel (DS0) on any aggregate or data link
Serial connections
When the 3600 MainStreet system is connected to the Alcatel 5620 NM through a
serial connection, CPSS messages travel out of band over CPSS links that use the
TIA/EIA-232 ports on the SCC3, SCC(8+), and DCP cards.
256
Node management
The Alcatel element management portfolio provides a comprehensive suite of tools

for managing nodes such as the 3600 MainStreet system.
Node management
products
The node management products include the:
Alcatel 5620 NM GUI

built-in node management interface
Alcatel 5520 SNMP Element Manager
CrossKeys CrossControl
Node management through the Alcatel 5620 NM GUI
The Alcatel 5620 NM has an intuitive GUI that manages the 3600 MainStreet
system over CPSS links set up for network management. The GUI is used for:
node configuration
monitoring
diagnostics
database backup and restoration
fault management
software upgrades
Built-in node management interface
The 3600 MainStreet system has a built-in, menu-driven node management

interface, known as the NMTI, that can be accessed from a node management
terminal or the Alcatel 5620 NM.
The node management terminal can be an ASCII (VT100) terminal, or a PC-based
terminal running terminal emulation software or the Alcatel Craft Interface Node
Manager. The terminal can be connected to the 3600 MainStreet system locally or
remotely through modems.
The Alcatel 5620 NM enables operators to initiate an NMTI node management
session while running a GUI-based session. An NMTI node management session
provides a supplementary method of managing the node.
See chapter 11 for information about node management sessions and the node
management products used to conduct them.
Alcatel 5520 SNMP Element Manager
The 5520 EM provides remote configuration and monitoring of third-party SNMP

nodes through a GUI. It can operate as a standalone system running on HP
OpenView NNM or can be integrated with the Alcatel 5620 NM. The 5520 EM
extends the element management footprint of the Alcatel 5620 NM to third-party
SNMP nodes.
257
Management
The 5520 EM can be used to develop device descriptor files. Device descriptor files
are value-added products that interface between the 5520 EM and SNMP nodes by
interpreting SNMP messages. The files are easily developed and modified.
CrossKeys CrossControl
The CrossKeys CrossControl products extend the Alcatel 5620 NM applications to

the management of third-party equipment. Third-party equipment can be
completely managed from the Alcatel 5620 NM, including equipment
configuration, fault management, and end-to-end 1/0 or 3/1 connection
management.
Open interfaces
The Alcatel management portfolio includes open interfaces for service and network
management using either CMIP or CORBA. These interfaces are scalable, TMN
standards-based OSS gateways that allow other OSSs to access and control
networks managed by the Alcatel 5620 NM, Alcatel 5740 SSM, or Alcatel 5730 VSN
through an object-oriented MIB.
Open interface products
The Alcatel open interface products are the:
Alcatel 5712 CORBA Service OSS Interface

Alcatel 5611 CMIP Network OSS Interface
Alcatel 5612 CORBA Network OSS Interface
Alcatel 5712 CORBA Service OSS Interface
The Alcatel 5712 CORBA Service OSS Interface is an open interface that enables
front-office, CORBA-based OSSs to connect to the Alcatel 5740 SSM or the
Alcatel 5730 VSN. This connection enables the exchange of information related to
service-level objects such as subscribers, services, subscriptions, and service
definitions. Using this interface, CORBA-based OSSs can be rapidly bonded to
Alcatel 5620 NM managed networks to automate service provisioning and
activation.
Alcatel 5611 CMIP Network OSS Interface
The Alcatel 5611 CMIP is a CMIS TMN-compliant, OSI-agent interface. CMIP is

the protocol used by CMIS to perform actions such as create, delete, set, get, action,
and event notification. The Alcatel 5611 CMIP acts as a gateway for CMIP
management applications and the Alcatel 5712 CORBA Service OSS Interface to
communicate with the Alcatel 5620 NM.
Alcatel 5612 CORBA Network OSS Interface
The Alcatel 5612 CORBA facilitates the development of distributed object-based

systems. It acts as a gateway for CORBA management applications to communicate
with the Alcatel 5611 CMIP.
258
Alcatel Connected ISV

Partner Program
Service providers require OSS solutions that will allow them to quickly and flexibly
offer new competitive services to realize aggressive RO targets. In addition, service
excellence is required to continuously meet subscriber expectations, to minimize
subscriber churn, and grow service selection. To achieve these objectives, OSS
solutions must interact in an end-to-end fashion with best-of-breed network
solutions, including network elements and network management products. The
Alcatel Connected ISV Partner Program is a program designed to provide service
providers with a pre-certified interoperable solution between the Alcatel
management platform and the appropriate ISV application. When purchasing an
Alcatel certified application from the third party, the service provider can be
confident that Alcatel and its partner(s) have jointly participated in the certification
of the application.
259
Management
260
Node management
All 3600 MainStreet systems are entirely software-configurable. All functions are
software-driven, and all configurable parameters are stored in a nonvolatile
configuration database. All functions and parameters are accessed by reading from
and writing to the configuration database during a node management session.
This chapter describes node management sessions and the node management
products used to conduct them. Most node management functions can also be
performed from Alcatel network managers (see chapter 10).
Node management
sessions
A node management session is the time during which you use the standard,
menu-driven user interface, known as the NMTI, to perform configuration and
maintenance operations on the 3600 MainStreet system.
261
Management
A node management session can be accessed from a node management station

connected to a 3600 MainStreet system serial port (directly or through a modem):
PC running the Alcatel Craft Interface Node Manager

The Alcatel Craft Interface Node Manager is a PC-based software program
designed for node installation and initial configuration or on-site
troubleshooting. It provides NMTI access to all MainStreet nodes, as well as
cards and DTUs that support an integral NMTI. The PC is connected (usually
by a direct physical connection) to a single node for the purpose of managing
that node only. All configuration and maintenance procedures can be
performed through the Alcatel Craft Interface Node Manager, which is the
preferred tool for local node management.
ASCII (VT100) terminal
Any ASCII (VT100) terminal (or PC running terminal emulation software)
can be used to initiate a node management session with a node, as well as with
cards or DTUs that support an integral NMTI. Not all configuration and
maintenance procedures can be performed through a node management
session initiated from an ASCII terminal. Some procedures must be initiated
from the Craft Interface Node Manager.
Alcatel network managers
Alcatel network managers, such as the 5620 NM, can be used to initiate a node
management session with a node, as well as with cards or DTUs that support
an integral NMTI (see chapter 10).
All common control and node management facilities for the system are performed
through the SCC3 NMTI. All node management operations (with the exception of
circuit connections and display of alarms) for an HSPS or HSPS2 system are
performed through the DS-3 II card NMTI, or from the Single E3 or Dual E3 card
NMTI. In addition, the following cards and DTUs support integral node
management sessions:
CPC
FRE card
FRS/SRIM card
PE card
2801 MainStreet DTU
2751, 2752, and 2753 MainStreet DTUs
All DS0-based circuit cross-connections are configured during a node

management session with the switching shelf SCC3. All frame relay DLC
cross-connections are configured during a node management session with the
appropriate FRS/SRIM, FRE, or PE card.
262
11. Node management
Active and inactive cards
Cards can be active or inactive depending on their redundancy configuration. You

can initiate a node management session with either the active or inactive node. For
control-redundant shelves, the operating SCC3 is called active, and the standby
SCC3 is called inactive.
Any configuration change made during a node management session with the active
card is applied to the system immediately. Any configuration change made during
a node management session with the inactive card is not applied to the system until
an activity switch occurs. This allows in-service system upgrades with little or no
interruption of service: a new revision of system software can be installed on the
inactive card while the system is operating. When the installation is complete, an
activity switch can be configured to bring the new software online.
Figure 11-1 shows the nodes with which you can have a node management session.
Figure 11-1: 3600 MainStreet node management sessions
SCC3 in active shelf

Switching
shelf
SCC3 in inactive shelf
Active SCC3
Node
management
session
Peripheral shelf
Inactive SCC3
Cards and DTUs supporting

integral NMTI
Active DS-3 II,
SE3, or DE3 card
HSPS or HSPS2
Inactive DS-3 II,
SE3, or DE3 card
12721
263
Management
System serial ports
A management station can be connected to one of two TIA/EIA-232 ALAPB

system serial ports. System serial ports are accessible on the backplane or bulkhead
of 3600 MainStreet shelves and on the faceplates of some cards.
Configuration and
cross-connections
Complete configuration of a 3600 MainStreet system, including all slot and circuit
parameters, can be performed before UCS cards and modules have been installed.
The configuration database of any node, or any card and DTU that supports an
integral NMTI, can be downloaded in a newly commissioned system to reduce the
time required to configure basic attributes.
Configuration access can be restricted by the use of user-configurable,
password-protected access levels. Five access levels are provided to tailor user group
requirements with read-only, read/write, and no access privileges to critical areas of
system configuration.
You can copy operating parameters (except the circuit name and connection) from
one circuit to another. For DS-3 II and E3 cards, you can copy the parameters of
one circuit to several circuits in a single operation.
Database
management
All node connection and configuration information (collectively called the

configuration database) for nodes is stored in NVM on the SCC3, DS-3 II, and E3
cards. Any card that supports an integral NMTI stores its own configuration
database. The configuration databases of DTUs (including those that support an
integral NMTI) are stored in NVM on the SCC3.
Checking the NVM
The NVM can be checked to determine whether the configuration database has
been corrupted. An NVM problem may be fixed by restoring the database.
Backup and restore
The database of a node, card, or DTU that has NVM can be backed up to an
external device. If the node database becomes corrupted, it can be restored from the
backup file through a node management session.
The backup file from one node can also be used to restore the database to another
node of the same type. This facilitates configuring a series of nodes with identical
databases. The node number and node name are not affected by a database restore.
Verify
The verify procedure compares two configuration databases to determine if they

are identical. This procedure can be used to determine if the node has been
configured with the correct database.
Reconcile
The configuration database for cards that have NVM is divided between the card
NVM and the NVM of the SCC3 in the shelf in which the card is installed. If
inconsistencies develop between the two configuration databases, the NVM of the
card can be configured to match the database of the SCC3. This process is called
reconciliation.
264
11. Node management
Database management
access
All database management operations are performed through a node management

session with the appropriate node. The availability of database management
operations is dependent upon:
the card type

the card status
the node manager type: NMTI, Craft Interface Node Manager, 5521 PC EM,
5521A PC EM, or 5620 NM
Table 11-1 summarizes the conditions under which database management
operations can be performed. For inactive cards, the table indicates whether the
verify or restore operation can be done from the external file or from the active
card.
Table 11-1: Configuration database operations
Card and status
Operation (1)
Card type
Status
Backup
Verify
Restore (2)
Switching shelf
Active SCC3
To file
From file
From file
Inactive SCC3
To file
From file or
active
From file or
active card
Active SCC3
To file
From file
From file
Inactive SCC3
To file
From file or
active
From file or
active card
Active card
To file
From file
From file
Inactive card
To file
From file or
active
From file or
active card
To file
From file
From file
Peripheral shelf
DS-3 II, DE3, or SE3
CPC, FRE,
FRS/SRIM, or PE (3)
Notes
1. All operations on an active card or on any card or DTU that has NVM require access to an
external device in order to back up, verify, or restore the configuration database file.
2. A restore operation cannot be performed through a node management session with an
Alcatel 5521 PC EM or Alcatel 5521A PC EM connected indirectly to the node through a
modem.
3. Available only through an Craft Interface Node Manager, 5521 PC EM, or 5521A PC EM node
management session.
265
Management
Maintenance and
diagnostics
The 3600 MainStreet system offers an extensive suite of maintenance and

diagnostic applications that facilitate network monitoring and problem isolation.
Maintenance and diagnostic applications are:
Loopbacks
loopbacks
signaling lead control
alarm monitoring
statistics gathering
diagnostics
digital connection maintenance
digital and metallic split and monitor test access
A loopback is a maintenance application used to isolate faults in a transmission

path. During a loopback, the transmitted signal is looped back and returned to the
transmitting device. The outgoing and returned signals can then be compared.
Loopbacks are available on all voice and data circuits, on individual channels on the
primary rate link, and on the primary rate link as a whole.
Signaling lead control
The incoming and outgoing signaling leads on the 3600 MainStreet node can be
examined, and the outgoing signaling leads can be changed to force conditions at
the far end. Table 11-2 shows the supported incoming and outgoing signaling
leads.
Table 11-2: Incoming and outgoing signaling leads
Circuit type
Incoming signaling leads
Outgoing signaling leads
4WDX
ABCD (received)
ABCD (transmitted)
64 kb/s
codirectional
ABCD (received)
ABCD (transmitted)
ASC (AAL1)
ABCD (received)
ABCD (transmitted)
Primary rate
ABCD (received)
ABCD (transmitted)
Primary rate for

TTC2M card
A (received)
A (transmitted)
E&M
M-lead
E-lead
LGS
Loop current detect
Ringing
Ground detect
Tip open
Reverse battery
LGE
Ringing
Loop closure
Tip ground
Ring ground
Forward feed
Reverse feed
266
11. Node management
Alarm monitoring
The cards and shelves are continuously monitored for abnormal conditions or
significant events. When an abnormal condition is detected or a significant event
occurs, an alarm record is created. For more information about alarm handling, see
chapter 1.
Statistics gathering
The 3600 MainStreet node gathers the following types of statistics:
usage statistics for voice card circuits

quality statistics for primary rate cards
quality statistics for 27LC2, 27LC3, and 28LC line cards, and for 2B1Q channel
Diagnostics
units
node synchronization statistics
switch, frame stream, DLC, AAL5 VCC, and AAL1 VCC statistics for the
ATM Services cards
switch, frame stream, encapsulation circuit, DLC, and CPSS statistics for
FRS/SRIM cards
switch, frame stream, FASTbus, FASTbus station, encapsulation circuit, DLC,
and CPSS statistics for FRE and PE cards
service category, muxpoint, and muxpoint DLC statistics for FRE cards
X.25 and X.75 statistics for PE cards
The cards and channel units in 3600 MainStreet systems can perform a number of
system-wide and circuit-specific diagnostic tests. Some tests are performed during
the power-up procedure; others can be enabled to take place automatically in the
background or on a directed basis. System commands, given through a node
management session, can enable or disable diagnostics or perform a specified test
repeatedly.
Diagnostics do not busy out a circuit or remove it from service. If the circuit is
required for a call while a test is in progress, the test on that circuit is terminated.
Similarly, diagnostics are not performed on busy circuits.
Table 11-3 lists the diagnostic tests that can be run.
Table 11-3: Background and directed diagnostic tests
Test (1)
Function
Description
Program Integrity
Performs a checksum over the entire program space

and ROM.
RAM Integrity
Performs a read and write test over the entire range

of RAM.
Nonvolatile RAM Integrity
Performs a checksum of NVM space.
(2)
Tone Generator Self-test 1
Compares the tone from the GFC2 to known tone

data.
5 (3)
Tone Generator Self-test 2
Applies and checks a tone from the GFC2 or GFC3

to a frequency detector within the card.
267
Management
Test (1)
Function
Description
Digital Loopback test
Tests 4WDX, 4WTO, E&M, LGS, LGE, MRD, T1,

and E1 circuits by performing digital loopbacks on a
circuit and SMACing the data patch over a specified
time.
7 (3)
Analog Loopback test 1
Tests 4WDX, 4WTO, E&M, LGS, LGE, and MRD

circuits by using the GFC2 or GFC3 to perform a
digital loopback of the CODEC and applying a 1 kHz
digital tone at 0 dBm0. The system will detect the
tone.
8 (3)
Analog Loopback test 2

circuits by using the GFC2 or GFC3 to loopback at
the external analog point of the interface and
applying a digital tone. The system will detect the
tone.
9 (2)
Frequency test

circuits by using the GFC2 to loopback at the
external analog point of the interface and applying a
digital tone. Listen for the tone with a frequency
detector.
13
Connection Matrix Integrity
Compares DX connection memory with RAM

connection memory. Tests SCC3s and Switching
Interface cards.
14 (4)
Mx Connection Matrix
Integrity
Compares the content of the MX connection memory

on the Switching card to a copy of the connection
memory stored in local RAM. Detects MX failures
and MX connect memory failures for the MX chips on
Switching cards.
Notes
1. The diagnostic tests are described in the order in which the tests are performed.
2. These tests require a GFC2 in the shelf.
3. These tests require a GFC2 or GFC3 in the shelf.
4. Does not test the MX chip on the switching shelf SCC3.
Digital connection
maintenance
Digital connection maintenance provides access to the data paths through the
central switching matrix of the 3600 MainStreet node, so that data and signaling
carried between two connected target circuits can be verified and changed by some
additional maintenance circuits.
Connection maintenance provides:
monitor maintenance, which duplicates (nonintrusively) the data passing

between two target circuits and then outputs that data on the maintenance
circuits
split-through and split-back maintenance, which allows the maintenance
circuits to receive sourced data from the target circuits and to source their own
data to the target circuits
terminate-and-leave maintenance, which does not use any maintenance
circuits, but forces target circuits to apply trunk conditioning to their line
outputs
268
11. Node management
Almost any connection (primary rate, voice, data, and unidirectional or

bidirectional) can be used as a target for connection maintenance. The exceptions
are:
any on-card connections, such as connections between SRMs on a DCC

three- and four-party connections, such as connections involving HCV or
echo canceller DSP circuits

CPSS connections
ADPCM connections
GFC connections
T1 FDL, E1 TS0, V.35 PRI TS0, or X.21 PRI TS0 connections
SRS subset connections
Monitor maintenance
Monitor maintenance is a nonintrusive maintenance function that provides

listen-only access to a connection. External test equipment is used to monitor the
connection.
Bidirectional connections require a maintenance circuit for each direction (see
Figure 11-2). Unidirectional and broadcast connections require only one
maintenance circuit.
Figure 11-2: Bidirectional monitor maintenance

Target
circuit 1
Target
circuit 2
Network
Maintenance
circuit 1
Test
equipment
Maintenance
circuit 2
Test
equipment
10827
269
Management
Split-through maintenance
Split-through maintenance is an intrusive maintenance function that inserts the

maintenance circuits in the data and signaling path between the target circuits.
External test equipment is used to insert and monitor test patterns.
As with monitor maintenance, bidirectional connections require a maintenance
circuit for each direction (see Figure 11-3); unidirectional and broadcast
connections require only one.
Figure 11-3: Bidirectional split-through maintenance

Target
circuit 1
Target
circuit 2
Network
Maintenance
circuit 1
Test
equipment
Maintenance
circuit 2
Test
equipment
10829
Split-back maintenance
Split-back maintenance is an intrusive maintenance function that establishes a

bidirectional data and signaling path between each target circuit and its
maintenance circuit. External test equipment is used to insert and monitor test
patterns.
Figure 11-4 shows a bidirectional split-back maintenance connection. Split-back
maintenance is not available for unidirectional target connections.
270
11. Node management
Figure 11-4: Bidirectional split-back maintenance

Target
circuit 1
Target
circuit 2
Maintenance
circuit 1
Maintenance
circuit 2
10826
Terminate-and-leave maintenance
Figure 11-5 shows how bidirectional terminate-and-leave maintenance is applied

when there is no other connection maintenance.
This maintenance function provides a mechanism to apply trunk conditioning at
the line output of a target circuit without actually deprogramming the target
circuit. The target circuit can be the source or the destination of a unidirectional or
broadcast connection. Trunk conditioning may be applied at the output of only
one pair of connected circuits, or at the output of both target circuits involved in a
connection.
Figure 11-5: Bidirectional terminate-and-leave maintenance

Target
circuit 1
Target
circuit 2
TC
TC
Network
TC = trunk conditioning
10828
271
Management
Digital and metallic split

and monitor test access
Digital test connections provide access to any DS0 from the faceplate of the
Test card and GFC3, and can be configured for interface speed, error correction,
and fault signaling. Digital test connections are supported on the 64 kb/s
Codirectional card, ATM Services card, DS-3 II card, Single E3 and Dual E3 cards,
Optical Extension cards, Single and Dual E1 and T1 cards, X.21 and V.35 PRI cards,
and the DS0-DP and OCU-DP channel units.
Metallic test connections provide direct metallic access to tip and ring pairs from
the faceplate of the Test card and GFC3, and are supported on the 4WTO line card,
and 4WDX, 4WTO, E&M, LGE, LGS, and MRD channel units.
The Test card and GFC3 support these metallic test connections:
direct monitor
This monitors the facility tip and ring pairs (see Figure 11-6).
high-impedance monitor
This monitors the facility tip and ring pairs with a balanced impedance buffer
between the facility circuit and the Test card (see Figure 11-6).
split-access
This splits the connection between the equipment and the facility and brings
the tip, ring, and signaling pairs to the Test card (see Figure 11-7).
4-wire loopback
This loops back the tip to the tip return and the ring to the ring return on both
the equipment and the facility sides of the connection (see Figure 11-8).
Figure 11-6: Metallic direct and high-impedance monitor connection
Connected
equipment
25-pair
backplane
connector
Channel
unit
Primary
rate card
SCC3
Network
(facility)
Test
card/
GFC3
Test card/GFC3
Test card/GFC3
MTAU
MTAU
T/R
T1/R1
FAC A
FAC B
Metallic direct monitor
T/R
T1/R1
600
FAC A
FAC B
Metallic high impedance monitor

10821
272
11. Node management
Figure 11-7: Metallic split-access connection
Connected
equipment
25-pair
backplane
connector
Channel
unit
Primary
rate card
SCC3
Network
(facility)
Test
card/
GFC3
Test card/GFC3
Test card/GFC3
MTAU
T/R
T1/R1
E/M
MTAU
EQUIP A
EQUIP B
EQUIP C
T/R
T1/R1
E/M
FAC A
FAC B
FAC C
10822
Figure 11-8: Metallic 4-wire loopback connection
Connected
equipment
25-pair
backplane
connector T/T1
Channel
unit
T/T1
R/R1
R/R1
Primary
rate card
SCC3
Network
(facility)
Test
card/
GFC3
Test card/GFC3
Test card/GFC3
MTAU
T
T1
R
R1
MTAU
T
T1
R
R1
10823
273
Management
274
System specifications
This chapter contains system specifications for 3600 MainStreet systems.
Shelves
Shelves consist of the metalwork and backplane that house the system, interface
and application cards, power supplies, and internal ringing generators.
Table 12-1 lists the dimensions of the various shelf types.
Table 12-1: Shelf dimensions
Power supplies
Shelf type
Width
Height
Depth
Class A (rear cable entry)
48.3 cm (19 in.)
48.6 cm (19.15 in.)
25.8 cm (10.15 in.)
Class B
48.3 cm (19 in.)
48.6 cm (19.15 in.)
23.5 cm (9.25 in.)
23-inch
58.4 cm (23 in.)
44.5 cm (17.5 in.)
30.5 cm (12 in.)
HSPS
48.3 cm (19 in.)
48.6 cm (19.15 in.)
23.5 cm (9.25 in.)
HSPS2
48.3 cm (19 in.)
57.8 cm (22.75 in.)
30.5 cm (12 in.)
Power supplies regulate the input power (from ac or dc feeds) to provide the
various voltages required by the shelf for use by the system, interface, and
application cards.
For a Class A shelf, Class B shelf, or an HSPS, power supplies are mounted in a
removable power tray. For a 23-inch shelf or HSPS2, power supplies are packaged
as Power Supply cards, which are installed in reserved slots of the shelf.
Table 12-2 lists the power supply specifications.
277
Table 12-2: Power supply specifications

Power
Variant
Input specification (design range)
AC
100 to 120 V ac
87 to 264 V ac
3.5 A (maximum)
47 to 63 Hz
300 W (maximum)
200 to 240 V ac
87 to 264 V ac
3.5 A (maximum)
47 to 63 Hz
300 W (maximum)
120 V ac
102 to 132 V ac
4.7 A (maximum)
60 Hz
300 W (maximum)
240 V ac
204 to 264 V ac
2.3 A (maximum)
50 Hz
300 W (maximum)
DC
24 V
24 V dc
19 to 36 V dc
18 A (maximum)
200 W (maximum)
+24 V dc
19 to 36 V dc
18 A (maximum)
200 W (maximum)
48 V
19-inch Power
Supply (1)
38 to 75 V dc
7.9 A (maximum)
300 W (maximum)
HSPS2 Power Supply

card (1)
38 to 75 V dc
7.9 A (maximum)
300 W (maximum)
23-inch Power Supply

card (1)
38 to 75 V dc
6.5 A (maximum)
215 W (maximum)
Note
1. The effective system input range of these power supplies is reduced when used with any of the
following components:
42 to 62 V dc: 2B1Q line card, 4WTO channel unit, E&M card, E&M channel unit, GFC2,
LGE card, LGE channel unit, or MRD channel unit
42 to 58 V dc: ringing generator
38 to 62 V dc: fan tray
When components from more than one group are used in the same system, the effective input
range of the system is limited to the intersection of the effective ranges of each of the
components. If the available battery source does not fall within the effective input range, then
either an external dc power converter or an ac power supply must be used.
278
12. System specifications
Ringing generators
Ringing generators provide a high-power alternating current to an LGS or MRD

interface, which drives the ringer on the destination telephone.
Alcatel supplies internal and external ringing generators. Both provide
64 to 80 V rms (75 V rms nominal) ringing voltage and are available in a 20 or
25 Hz variant. An enhanced ringing generator that supplies 71 to 79 V rms
(75 V rms, nominal) ringing voltage at 16, 20, or 25 Hz (user-selectable) is also
available.
Site requirements
The following site requirements must be observed when installing a

3600 MainStreet system to ensure adequate room to access equipment, fault-free
operation, and personal safety.
Location and working

space
Although the 3600 MainStreet system is designed and tested to all relevant
standards of conducted and radiated electromagnetic interference, it may be
affected by strong sources of electromagnetic radiation in the near field, such as
elevators, air conditioners, photocopiers, and facsimile machines.
Make sure that the location can accommodate the planned type of installation,
including switching, peripheral, and high-speed peripheral shelves, interfaces,
terminals, modems, CSUs, NTIs, and cabling.
Sufficient working space for installation and maintenance should be provided.
A minimum distance of 1.25 m (4 ft) at the front of the shelf is suggested.
Temperature and humidity
A 3600 MainStreet system is intended for indoor use. During shipping and storage,
it can withstand temperatures ranging from 40 to +66C (40 to +150F) and a
relative humidity of 5 to 95%. Operating temperatures can range from 0 to +40C
(+32 to +100F) with a relative humidity of 5 to 95%, noncondensing.
When ventilation or air conditioning is provided, sensors connected to an alarm
system should be provided to monitor for excessive temperatures. These sensors
can also be connected to user alarm inputs on the peripheral and switching shelf,
so that sensor relay closures can be logged in the shelf alarm queues and to a
network manager.
Altitude
A 3600 MainStreet system must be installed at an altitude in the range of

60 m (197 ft) below sea level to 1800 m (5905 ft) above sea level.
Power
When an ac power source is used to supply the 3600 MainStreet system, the power
source fluctuations must not exceed +6% or 10%.
When a dc power source is used to supply the 3600 MainStreet system, the dc
power source used must comply with the mandatory regulations applicable to the
country in which the system is installed.
279
Grounding
The 3600 MainStreet system requires separate signal and chassis ground points.
Provision must be made at the installation site for access to the appropriate
building ground points.
Electrostatic discharge
precautions
When installing a 3600 MainStreet system, installers must wear an antistatic strap
when handling cards and modules to prevent ESD. Provision must be made at the
installation site for the grounding of antistatic straps. The 3600 MainStreet shelves
provide a ground strap connection point at the front of the shelf frame.
280
Voice interface specifications

Tables 13-1 to 13-9 list the audio and signaling specifications for the
4WDX channel unit, 4WTO line card, MRD channel unit, LGE channel unit,
LGE card, E&M card, E&M channel unit, LGS card, and LGS channel unit,
respectively.
Table 13-1: 4WDX channel unit specifications
Specification
Variant: 90-2769-01
60 Hz loss (A/D)
Loss of 20 dB greater than the loss at 1004 Hz
A to B lead resistance
1250 5%
Amplitude tracking (A/D and D/A)

37 to +3 dBm0
0.25 dB (maximum deviation at 1 kHz)
50 to 37 dBm0
0.50 dB (maximum deviation at 1 kHz)
Companding law
Mu-law
Crosstalk
Intrachannel
> 65 dB maximum
Interchannel
> 65 dB maximum
Dial pulse distortion
< 2%
Idle channel noise (A/D and D/A)
20 dBrnC0 maximum
Impulse noise threshold level

maximum 10 hits in 30 minutes
41 dBrnC0
maximum 1 hit in 30 minutes
51 dBrnC0
maximum 0.1 hit in 30 minutes
58 dBrnC0
Line impedance
150
600
1200
281
Specification
Variant: 90-2769-01
Longitudinal balance (A/D and D/A)

200 Hz
> 74 dB minimum
500 Hz
> 74 dB minimum
1000 Hz
> 74 dB minimum
3000 Hz
> 69 dB minimum
Maximum loop length
5000
Peak to average ratio
> 94 dB
On- and off-hook detection
Over full loop length (0 to 5000 ) and full battery range

(42 to 56 V) for fixed and switched bias signaling
Receive (D/A) frequency response

200 Hz
+1.0 to 0
300 Hz to 3000 Hz
0.15
3.2 kHz
+0.75 to 0.15
3.4 kHz
+1.5 to 0
Return loss (Tx and Rx pairs)

1 kHz
> 28 dB minimum
300 Hz to 3 kHz
> 23 dB minimum
Sending on- and off-hook
Over full loop length (0 to 5000 ) and full battery range

(42 to 56 V) for fixed and switched bias signaling
Single frequency distortion (A/A with digital loopback)

0 dBm0 from 0 to 12 kHz
28 dBm0 or > at any other frequency
0 dBm0 at 1004 to 1020 Hz
40 dBm0 or > between 0 and 4 kHz
Signal to distortion (A/D and D/A) measured at 1004 Hz

0 to 30 dBm0
> 35 dB
40 dBm0
> 29 dB
45 dBm0
> 25 dB
TLP ranges
+6 to 10.5 dBr in 0.1-dB increments

+1.5 to 15 dBr in 0.1-dB increments
Transmit (A/D) frequency response

200 Hz
2.0 to 0
300 Hz to 3000 Hz
0.15
3.2 kHz
+0.75 to 0.15
3.4 kHz
+1.5 to 0
282
13. Voice interface specifications
Table 13-2: 4WTO line card specifications

Specification
Variant: 90-2687-01
Companding law
Mu-law
Gain tracking
+3 to 40 dBr
0.3 dB
40 to 50 dBr
0.5 dB
50 to 55 dBr
1.5 dB
Idle channel noise

A/A
< 23 dBrnC0 maximum
D/A
< 20 dBrnC0 maximum
A/D
< 20 dBrnC0 maximum

41 dBrnC0
51 dBrnC0
58 dBrnC0
Line impedance
600
Longitudinal balance
200 Hz
74 dB minimum
500 Hz
74 dB minimum
1000 Hz
74 dB minimum
3000 Hz
69 dB minimum
Receive (D/A) frequency response (relative to gain at 1004 Hz)

200 Hz
1.0 to +0.15 dB
300 to 3000 Hz
0.15 to +0.15 dB
3200 Hz
0.75 to +0.15 dB
3400 Hz
1.5 to +0.25 dB
4000 Hz
< 14 dB
> 4600 Hz
< 28 dB

A/A
> 94 dB
D/A or A/D
> 97 dB
Return loss (600 )

1000 Hz
> 28 dB
300 to 3000 Hz
> 23 dB
Signal to distortion (A/A)

0 to 30 dBr
> 33 dB
30 to 40 dBr
> 27 dB
40 to 45 dBr
> 22 dB
Signal to distortion (A/D or D/A)

0 to 30 dBr
> 35 dB
30 to 40 dBr
> 9 dB
40 to 45 dBr
> 25 dB
283
Specification
Variant: 90-2687-01
TLP range
Transmit
8.5 to +7.0 dBr in 0.5-dB increments
Receive
8.5 to +7.0 dBr in 0.5-dB increments
Transmit (A/D) frequency response (relative to gain at 1004 Hz)

60 Hz
< 14 dB
200 Hz
2.0 to +0.15 dB
300 to 3000 Hz
0.15 to +0.15 dB
3200 Hz
0.75 to +0.15 dB
3400 Hz
1.5 to +0.25 dB
4000 Hz
< 14 dB
> 4600 Hz
32 dB
Table 13-3: MRD channel unit specifications

Specification
Variant
90-1755-01
2-wire impedance
90-1755-02
900 + 2.16 F
600 + 2.16 F
900 + 2.16 F
Balance impedance
Fixed short (900 + 2.16 F)
Fixed short (900 + 2.16 F)

Fixed long (1650 // 100 + 5 nF)
Adapt/freeze
(1)
Fixed long (1650 // 100 + 5 nF)

Adapt/freeze
Continuous adapt
Companding law
Mu-law
Mu-law
Crosstalk coupling
65 dB maximum
65 dB maximum
+3 to 40 dBr
0.3 dB
0.3 dB
40 to 50 dBr
0.5 dB
0.5 dB
50 to 55 dBr
1.5 dB
1.5 dB
A/A
23 dBrnC0 maximum
23 dBrnC0 maximum
A/D
20 dBrnC0 maximum
20 dBrnC0 maximum
D/A
20 dBrnC0 maximum
20 dBrnC0 maximum
maximum 10.0 hits in 30 minutes
41 dBrnC0
41 dBrnC0
51 dBrnC0
51 dBrnC0
58 dBrnC0
58 dBrnC0
200 Hz
58 dB minimum
58 dB minimum
500 Hz
58 dB minimum
58 dB minimum
1000 Hz
58 dB minimum
58 dB minimum
3000 Hz
53 dB minimum
53 dB minimum
280
1600
Gain tracking
Idle channel noise
Maximum external dc loop circuit

resistance
284
Specification
Variant
90-1755-01
90-1755-02
A/A
> 94 dB
> 94 dB
D/A or A/D
> 97 dB
> 97 dB
ERL
28 dB minimum
28 dB minimum
SRL/SRH
20 dB minimum
20 dB minimum
< 200 Hz
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
Return loss
Receive (D/A) frequency response (2)

200 Hz
2.0 to +0.25 dB
2.0 to +0.25 dB
300 to 3000 Hz
0.5 to +0.25 dB
0.5 to +0.25 dB
3200 Hz
0.75 to +0.25 dB
0.75 to +0.25 dB
3400 Hz
1.5 to +0.25 dB
1.5 to +0.25 dB
4000 Hz
< 14 dB
< 14 dB
> 4600 Hz
< 28 dB
< 28 dB
ERL
34 dB minimum
34 dB minimum
SRL/SRH
20 dB minimum
20 dB minimum
Ringing frequency
20 Hz
20 Hz
Ringers per line
5 REN maximum
5 REN maximum
Ringing voltage
75 V rms
75 V rms
0 to 30 dBr
> 35 dB
> 35 dB
30 to 40 dBr
> 29 dB
> 29 dB
40 to 45 dBr
> 25 dB
> 25 dB
Transmit
12 to 0 dBr
12 to +6 dBr
Receive
10 to +6 dBr
10 to +6 dBr
60 Hz
< 20 dB
< 20 dB
Relative transhybrid loss
TLP range
Transmit (A/D) frequency response (2)

200 Hz
3.0 to +0.25 dB
3.0 to +0.25 dB
300 to 3000 Hz
0.5 to +0.25 dB
0.5 to +0.25 dB
3200 Hz
0.75 to +0.25 dB
0.75 to +0.25 dB
3400 Hz
1.5 to +0.25 dB
1.5 to +0.25 dB
4000 Hz
< 14 dB
< 14 dB
> 4600 Hz
< 32 dB
< 32 dB
Notes
1. // = in parallel with
2. Relative to gain at 1004 Hz.
285
Table 13-4: LGE channel unit specifications

Specification
Variant
90-1229-01
90-1229-02
Matched impedance
Matched impedance
Compromise impedance with loaded

cable 1650 // (100 + 5 nF) (1)
Compromise impedance with loaded

cable 1650 // (100 + 5 nF)
Adapt and freeze
Adapt and freeze
Battery signaling limits
42.25 to 52.5 V
42.25 to 52.5 V
Companding law
Mu-law
Mu-law
Crosstalk coupling
< 65 dB maximum
65 dB maximum
2% at 12 pps, 64% break
2% at 12 pps, 64% break
(A/D) 60 Hz (relative to 1004 Hz)
> 20 dB rejection
> 20 dB rejection
A/D or D/A 300 to 3000 Hz
0.25 to +0.5 dB
0.25 to +0.5 dB
+3 to 37 dBr
0.5 dB
0.5 dB
37 to 50 dBr
1.0 dB
1.0 dB
50 to 55 dBr
3.0 dB
3.0 dB
Half-channel
20 dBrnC0 maximum
20 dBrnC0 maximum
Full-channel
23 dBrnC0 maximum
23 dBrnC0 maximum
41 dBrnC0
41 dBrnC0
51 dBrnC0
51 dBrnC0
maximum 0.1 hits in 30 minutes
58 dBrnC0
58 dBrnC0
Balance impedance
Frequency response
Gain tracking (maximum deviation)
Idle channel noise
600 + 2.16 F
600 + 2.16 F
900 + 2.16 F
900 + 2.16 F
200 Hz
58 dB minimum
58 dB minimum
500 Hz
58 dB minimum
58 dB minimum
1000 Hz
58 dB minimum
58 dB minimum
3000 Hz
53 dB minimum
53 dB minimum
1800
1800
Half-channel
> 97 dB
> 97 dB
Full-channel
> 94 dB
> 94 dB
ERL
28 dB minimum
28 dB minimum
SRL
20 dB minimum
20 dB minimum
40 to 110 V rms, 36 to 52.5 V dc,

20 3 Hz
40 to 110 V rms, 36 to 52.5 V dc,

20 3 Hz
Line impedance
Maximum external circuit resistance

P/AR
Return loss
Ringing detect
286
Specification
Variant
90-1229-01
90-1229-02
0 to 30 dBr
35 dB
35 dB
30 to 40 dBr
29 dB
29 dB
40 to 45 dBr
25 dB
25 dB
up to 850
up to 850
Transmit
12.0 to 0.0 dB
12.0 to 0.0 dB
Receive
10.0 to +6.0 dB
10.0 to +6.0 dB
ERL
34 dB minimum
34 dB minimum
SRL
20 dB minimum
20 dB minimum
Tip ground detect

TLP levels
Transhybrid loss
Note
Table 13-5: LGE card specifications

Specification
Variant
90-0343-02
90-0343-03
90-0343-04
90-0343-05
90-0343-11
Channel crosstalk
< 65 dBm0
< 65 dBm0
< 65 dBm0
< 65 dBm0
< 65 dBm0
Companding law
Mu-law
A-law
Mu-law
Mu-law
A-law
Dial pulsing
detection speed
(trunk input duty
cycle 40 to 60%)
< 20 pps
< 20 pps
< 20 pps
< 20 pps
< 20 pps
External circuit
resistance
1750
1750
1750
1750
1750
Frequency
response (analog
subsection) into
600
+0.5 to 2.0 dB
+0.5 to 2.0 dB
+0.5 to 2.0 dB
+0.5 to 2.0 dB
+0.5 to 2.0 dB
Ground differential
< 3 V dc
< 3 V dc
< 3 V dc
< 3 V dc
< 3 V dc
Tip
< 850
< 850
< 850
< 850
< 850
Ring (nominal)
400
400
400
400
400
Feed removal
> 10 k
> 10 k
> 10 k
> 10 k
> 10 k
Tip open
> 10 k
> 10 k
> 10 k
> 10 k
> 10 k
Line impedance
600
600
600 + 2.16 F
900 + 2.16 F
600
600 + 2.16 F
370 + (620 //
0.31 F) (1)
Ground resistance
Leakage resistance
900 + 2.16 F
370 + (620
// 0.31 F)
Longitudinal balance (average)

50 Hz to 200 Hz
> 50 dB
> 50 dB
> 50 dB
> 50 dB
> 50 dB
0.2 to 1.0 kHz
> 58 dB
> 58 dB
> 58 dB
> 58 dB
> 58 dB
1.0 to 4.0 kHz
> 55 dB
> 55 dB
> 55 dB
> 55 dB
> 55 dB
287
Specification
Variant
90-0343-02
90-0343-03
90-0343-04
90-0343-05
90-0343-11
Longitudinally
induced voltage
(maximum)
50 V rms
50 V rms
50 V rms
50 V rms
50 V rms
Maximum
operating current
110 mA
110 mA
110 mA
110 mA
110 mA
Minimum operating
current
20 mA
20 mA
20 mA
20 mA
20 mA
Maximum signal power measured across leads

A/D (from line)
6.0 dBm
6.0 dBm
6.0 dBm
6.0 dBm
6.0 dBm
D/A (to line)
6.0 dBm
6.0 dBm
6.0 dBm
6.0 dBm
6.0 dBm
SRL
> 20 dB
> 20 dB
> 20 dB
> 20 dB
> 20 dB
ERL
> 28 dB
> 28 dB
> 28 dB
> 28 dB
> 28 dB
Ring load nominal
20 k + 1 F
20 k + 1 F
20 k + 1 F
20 k + 1 F
20 k + 1 F
Minimum
17 Hz
17 Hz
17 Hz
17 Hz
17 Hz
Maximum
30 Hz
30 Hz
30 Hz
30 Hz
30 Hz
Minimum
40 V rms
40 V rms
40 V rms
40 V rms
40 V rms
Maximum
110 V rms
110 V rms
110 V rms
110 V rms
110 V rms
4.5 to +3.0 at 600
4.5 to +3.0
0.0 to 7.0
0.0 to 7.0
4.5 to +3.0
13.5 to +2.0
13.0 to +2.0
14.0 to +1.0
13.5 to +2.0
Return loss
Ringing frequency
Ringing voltage
TLP range (dB)

Transmit
6.5 to +1.0 at 900

Receive
13.5 to +2.0 at 600

15.5 to 0.0 at 900
Transhybrid loss into nominal impedance, short loop selected

SRL
> 20 dB
> 20 dB
> 20 dB
> 20 dB
> 20 dB
ERL
> 30 dB
> 30 dB
> 30 dB
> 30 dB
> 30 dB
Trunk-to-trunk background noise

C message
< 20 dBmC0
< 20 dBmC0
< 20 dBmC0
< 20 dBmC0
< 20 dBmC0
3 kHz flat
< 30 dBmC0
< 30 dBmC0
< 30 dBmC0
< 30 dBmC0
< 30 dBmC0
Psophometric
< 25 dBrnC0
< 25 dBrnC0
< 25 dBrnC0
< 25 dBrnC0
< 25 dBrnC0
Note
288
Table 13-6: E&M card specifications

Specification
Variant
90-0079-03
90-0079-04
90-0079-05
90-0079-06
90-0091-05
90-0091-06
Transmit (dB)
16.0 to 0.5
16.0 to 0.5
16.0 to 0.5
16.0 to 0.5
17.5 to 10.0
17.5 to 10.0
Receive (dB)
8.5 to +7.0
8.5 to +7.0
8.5 to +7.0
8.5 to +7.0
+4.0 to +11.5
+4.0 to +11.5
Transmit (dB)
7.0 to +8.5
7.0 to +8.5
7.0 to +8.5
7.0 to +8.5
3.5 to +4.0
3.5 to +4.0
Receive (dB)
14.5 to +1.0
14.5 to +1.0
14.5 to +1.0
14.5 to +1.0
7.5 to 0.0
7.5 to 0.0
Companding law
A-law
A-law
A-law
Mu-law
Mu-law
Mu-law
< (0.6 to 0.7)
< (0.6 to 0.7)
< (0.6 to 0.7)
< (0.6 to 0.7)
< (0.6 to 0.7)
< (0.6 to 0.7)
4-wire TLP range
2-wire TLP range
Frequency
response (200 to
3400 Hz) into
corresponding line
impedance
Gain linearity (referenced at 0 dBm0)

55 dBm0
< 3 dB
< 3 dB
< 3 dB
< 3 dB
< 3 dB
< 3 dB
50 dBm0
< 1 dB
< 1 dB
< 1 dB
< 1 dB
< 1 dB
< 1 dB
37 to +3 dBm0
< 0.5 dB
< 0.5 dB
< 0.5 dB
< 0.5 dB
< 0.5 dB
< 0.5 dB
C-message
< 20 dBmC0
< 35 dBm
< 35 dBm
< 35 dBm
< 20 dBmC0
< 20 dBmC0
3 kHz flat
< 35 dBm
< 65 dBm0p
< 65 dBm0p
< 65 dBm0p
< 35 dBm
< 35 dBm
Interchannel
crosstalk
< 65 dBm0
< 65 dBm0
< 65 dBm0
< 65 dBm0
< 65 dBm0
< 65 dBm0
Level tolerance
0.3 dB
0.3 dB
0.3 dB
0.3 dB
0.3 dB
0.3 dB
4-wire
600
600
600
600
600
600
2-wire
370 + 620 //
0.31 F (1)
600
600 +
2.16 F
600 +
2.16 F
900 +
2.16 F
600 +
2.16 F
Idle channel noise
Line impedance

200 Hz to 1 kHz
> 63 dB
> 58 dB
> 58 dB
> 58 dB
> 63 dB
> 63 dB
1 kHz to 4 kHz
> 58 dB
> 53 dB
> 53 dB
> 53 dB
> 58 dB
> 58 dB
4-wire ERL
> 28 dB
> 28 dB
> 28 dB
> 28 dB
> 28 dB
> 28 dB
4-wire SRL
> 20 dB
> 20 dB
> 20 dB
> 20 dB
> 20 dB
> 20 dB
2-wire ERL
> 28 dB
> 28 dB
> 28 dB
> 28 dB
> 28 dB
> 28 dB
2-wire SRL
> 20 dB
> 20 dB
> 20 dB
> 20 dB
> 20 dB
> 20 dB
Signal balance
(200 Hz to 4 kHz)
> 46 dB
> 46 dB
> 46 dB
> 46 dB
> 46 dB
> 46 dB
Signaling type
IV
I, II, III
I, II, III
ERL
> 25 dB
> 28 dB
> 28 dB
> 28 dB
> 34 dB
> 34 dB
SRL
> 20 dB
> 20 dB
> 20 dB
> 20 dB
> 20 dB
> 20 dB
Return loss
Transhybrid loss
Note
289
290
(North America)
(North America)
23 dB in 0.1-dB steps
Receive
< 2% at 20 pps
(74% break)
3600 nominal
3600 nominal
< 20 at 50 mA
> 550 k
< 2% at 20 pps
(74% break)
Mu-law
0.25 to +0.5
2-wire audio
600
600 + 2.16 F
900 + 2.16 F
600
600 + 2.16 F
900 + 2.16 F
2-wire audio
0.25 to +0.5
0.25
4-wire audio
Line impedance
0.25
4-wire audio
600 + 1.00 F
600
0.25 to +0.5
0.25
Frequency response (A/D or D/A) relative to 1 kHz at 0 dBm0, 300 to 3000 Hz
3600 nominal
< 20 at 50 mA
< 20 at 50 mA
Off-hook
E-lead resistance to
ground (2- and 4-wire
audio)
> 550 k
> 550 k
On-hook
E-lead leakage resistance to ground (2- and 4-wire audio, E&M mode)
< 2% at 20 pps
(74% break)

(2- and 4-wire audio)
Mu-law
Compromise
impedance, loaded
cable 1650 //
(100 + 5 nF)
Compromise
impedance, loaded
cable 1650 //
(100 + 5 nF)
Compromise
impedance, loaded
cable 1650 //
(100 + 5 nF) (1)
Mu-law
Adaptive
Adaptive
Companding law
Matched impedance
Matched impedance
Adaptive
Matched impedance
Balance impedance
(2-wire only)
Receive
(Japan)
90-1230-04
Transmit
Attenuation range (2-wire audio)
Transmit
90-1230-03
90-1230-02
Variant
Attenuation range (4-wire audio)
Specifications
Table 13-7: E&M channel unit specifications
115 nF
220 + 820 F //
600
0.25 to +0.5
0.25
3600 nominal
< 20 at 50 mA
> 550 k
< 2% at 20 pps
(74% break)
A-law
Compromise
impedance, loaded
cable 1650 //
(100 + 5 nF)
Adaptive
Matched impedance
(Germany)
90-1230-05
310 nF
370 + 620 F //
600
0.25 to +0.5
0.25
3600 nominal
< 20 at 50 mA
> 550 k
< 2% at 20 pps
(74% break)
A-law
Compromise
impedance, loaded
cable 1650 //
(100 + 5 nF)
Adaptive
Matched impedance
(United Kingdom)
90-1230-06
150 nF
180 + 910 F //
600
0.25 to +0.5
0.25
3600 nominal
< 20 at 50 mA
> 550 k
< 2% at 20 pps
(74% break)
A-law
Compromise
impedance, loaded
cable 1650 //
(100 + 5 nF)
Adaptive
Matched impedance
(France)
90-1230-07
10.0 to +6.0
Receive (dB)
> 69 dB minimum
1 kHz to 3 kHz
> 53 dB minimum
1 kHz to 3 kHz
> 53 dB minimum
> 58 dB minimum
> 69 dB minimum
> 74 dB minimum
10.0 to +6.0
12.0 to +6.0
16.0 to +7.0
23 dB minimum
28 dB minimum
20 dB minimum
4-wire SRL
2-wire ERL
2-wire SRL
> 20 dB minimum
SRL
Note
> 34 dB minimum
ERL
Transhybrid loss (2-wire audio only)
28 dB minimum
4-wire ERL
> 20 dB minimum
> 34 dB minimum
20 dB minimum
28 dB minimum
23 dB minimum
28 dB minimum
3600 nominal
3600 nominal
M-lead resistance to
ground (2- and 4-wire
audio)
Return loss
46 V
46 V
Off-hook
< 20 at 50 mA
< 20 at 50 mA
On-hook
M-lead leakage resistance to ground (2- and 4-wire audio, PLR mode)
> 58 dB minimum
200 Hz to 1 kHz
Longitudinal balance (2-wire)
> 74 dB minimum
200 Hz to 1 kHz
Longitudinal balance (4-wire)
12.0 to 0.0
Transmit (dB)
2-wire TLP range
16.0 to +7.0
Receive (dB)
16.0 to +7.0
(North America)
(North America)
16.0 to +7.0
90-1230-03
90-1230-02
Variant
Transmit (dB)
4-wire TLP range
Specifications
> 20 dB minimum
> 34 dB minimum
20 dB minimum
28 dB minimum
23 dB minimum
28 dB minimum
3600 nominal
46 V
< 20 at 50 mA
> 53 dB minimum
> 58 dB minimum
> 69 dB minimum
> 74 dB minimum
10.0 to +6.0
12.0 to +6.0
16.0 to +7.0
16.0 to +7.0
(Japan)
90-1230-04
> 20 dB minimum
> 34 dB minimum
20 dB minimum
28 dB minimum
23 dB minimum
28 dB minimum
3600 nominal
46 V
< 20 at 50 mA
> 53 dB minimum
> 58 dB minimum
> 69 dB minimum
> 74 dB minimum
10.0 to +6.0
12.0 to +6.0
16.0 to +7.0
16.0 to +7.0
(Germany)
90-1230-05
> 20 dB minimum
> 34 dB minimum
20 dB minimum
28 dB minimum
23 dB minimum
28 dB minimum
3600 nominal
46 V
< 20 at 50 mA
> 53 dB minimum
> 58 dB minimum
> 69 dB minimum
> 74 dB minimum
10.0 to +6.0
12.0 to +6.0
16.0 to +7.0
16.0 to +7.0
(United Kingdom)
90-1230-06
> 20 dB minimum
> 34 dB minimum
20 dB minimum
28 dB minimum
23 dB minimum
28 dB minimum
3600 nominal
46 V
< 20 at 50 mA
> 53 dB minimum
> 58 dB minimum
> 69 dB minimum
> 74 dB minimum
10.0 to +6.0
12.0 to +6.0
16.0 to +7.0
16.0 to +7.0
(France)
90-1230-07
291
292
A-law
30 k
0.5 dB
Companding law
Conductor leakage
resistance
Frequency response
(analog subsection)
370 + (620 //
0.31 F)
600
370 + (620 //
0.31 F) (1)
Line impedance
20 pps
1350
2 km (1.25 mi)
1350
20 pps
1350
2 km (1.25 mi)
1350
30 mA
110 V rms at 20/25 Hz
50 mA
Maximum dial pulse

detection
Maximum ground
detect resistance
Maximum loop length
Maximum loop
resistance, including
termination, at 50 V
battery
Maximum operating
current (0 loop and
100 termination)
Updated April 2006
Maximum ringer
voltage
Maximum short circuit

current
50 mA
110 V rms at 20/25 Hz
30 mA
> 53 dB
48 dB
1.0 to 4.0 kHz
58 dB
48 dB
60 to 1000 Hz
> 70 dB
> 70 dB
> 70 dB
8 kHz leakage
50 mA
110 V rms at 20/25 Hz
30 mA
1350
2 km (1.25 mi)
1350
20 pps
48 dB
48 dB
< 20 dBm
< 35 dBm
< 35 dBm
20 dBrnC
20 dBrnC
0.5 dB
30 k
A-law
65 dBm0
90-0029-07
3 kHz flat
20 dBrnC
+0.25 to 0.5 dB
30 k
A-law
65 dBm0
90-0029-05
C message
Idle channel noise
65 dBm0
90-0029-01
Variant
Channel crosstalk
Specification
Table 13-8: LGS card specifications
50 mA
110 V rms at 20/25 Hz
30 mA
1350
2 km (1.25 mi)
1350
20 pps
> 53 dB
> 58 dB
600 + 2.16 F
> 70 dB
< 35 dBm
20 dBrnC
+0.25/0.5 dB
30 k
Mu-law
65 dBm0
90-0030-01
50 mA
110 V rms at 20/25 Hz
30 mA
1350
2 km (1.25 mi)
1350
20 pps
> 53 dB
58 dB
900 + 2.16 F
> 70 dB
< 20 dBm
20 dBrnC
+0.25/0.5 dB
30 k
Mu-law
65 dBm0
90-0030-03
50 mA
110 V rms at 20/25 Hz
30 mA
1350
2 km (1.25 mi)
1350
20 pps
> 53 dB
58 dB
900 + 2.16 F
> 70 dB
< 20 dBm
20 dBrnC
+0.25/0.5 dB
30 k
Mu-law
65 dBm0
90-0030-04
90-0029-01
Variant
90-0029-05
6 dBm
25 mA
12
D/A (to line)
Minimum operating
current 6 dB audio
Number of voice
circuits
6.0 to +1.0
Receive (dB)
25 dB
SRL
Note
25 dB
ERL
Transhybrid loss
3.0 to +4.0
Transmit (dB)
TLP range
0.2 to 4.0 kHz
40 dB
> 20 dB
SRL
Signal balance
25 dB
ERL
Return loss
6 dBm
A/D (from line)
> 20 dB
34 dB
6.0 to +1.0
3.0 to +4.0
40 dB
> 20 dB
28 dB
12
25 mA
6 dBm
6 dBm
Maximum signal power (measured across a-b leads)
Specification
25 dB
25 dB
6.0 to +1.0
3.0 to +4.0
40 dB
> 20 dB
25 dB
12
25 mA
6 dBm
6 dBm
90-0029-07
> 20 dB
34 dB
6.0 to +1.0
3.0 to +4.0
40 dB
> 20 dB
28 dB
12
25 mA
6 dBm
6 dBm
90-0030-01
> 20 dB
34 dB
7.0 to 0.0
7.0 to 0.0
40 dB
> 20 dB
28 dB
25 mA
6 dBm
6 dBm
90-0030-03
> 20 dB
34 dB
6.0 to +1.0
3.0 to +4.0
40 dB
> 20 dB
28 dB
12
25 mA
6 dBm
6 dBm
90-0030-04
293
294
< 2% at 12 pps
(64% break)
0.25 to +0.5 dB
< 2.0 dB
< 2.0 dB
50 to 55 dBr
20 dBrnC0 max
600 + 2.16 F
900 +2.16 F
20 dBrnC0 max
20 dBrnC0 max
600 + 2.16 F
900 +2.16 F
A/D
D/A
Line impedance
20 dBrnC0 max
< 0.5 dB
< 0.5 dB
37 to 50 dBr
Idle channel noise
0.25 dB
0.25 dB
0.25 to +0.5 dB
20 dB rejection
< 2% at 12 pps
(64% break)
< 65 dB maximum
Mu-law or A-law
+3 to 37 dBr
Gain tracking (maximum deviation)
A/D or D/A 300 to

3000 Hz
A/D 60 Hz (relative to
1.004 kHz)
20 dB rejection
< 65 dB maximum
Crosstalk coupling
Frequency response
Mu-law
Companding law
Continuous adaption
42.25 to 52.5 V
Continuous adaption
Adapt and freeze
Adapt and freeze
42.25 to 52.5 V
Adapt and freeze
Alternate impedance
Alternate impedance
600 + 1.00 F
20 dBrnC0 max
20 dBrnC0 max
< 2.0 dB
< 0.5 dB
0.25 dB
0.25 to +0.5 dB
20 dB rejection
< 2% at 12 pps
(64% break)
< 65 dB maximum
Mu-law or A-law
42.25 to 52.5 V
Alternate impedance
Compromise
impedance, loaded
cable 1650 //
(100 + 5 nF)
Compromise
impedance, loaded
cable 1650 //
(100 + 5 nF)
Compromise
impedance, loaded
cable 1650 //
(100 + 5 nF)
Matched impedance
(Japan)
90-1228-04
Matched impedance
(North America)
(North America)
Matched impedance
90-1228-03
90-1228-02
Variant
Battery signaling
limits
Balance impedance
Specification
Table 13-9: LGS channel unit specifications
220 + 820 //
115 nF
20 dBrnC0 max
20 dBrnC0 max
< 2.0 dB
< 0.5 dB
0.25 dB
0.25 to +0.5 dB
20 dB rejection
< 2% at 12 pps
(64% break)
< 65 dB maximum
Mu-law or A-law
42.25 to 52.5 V
Continuous adaption
Adapt and freeze
Alternate impedance
Compromise
impedance, loaded
cable 1650 //
(100 + 5 nF)
Matched impedance
(Germany)
90-1228-05
370 + 620 //
310 nF
20 dBrnC0 max
20 dBrnC0 max
< 2.0 dB
< 0.5 dB
0.25 dB
0.25 to +0.5 dB
20 dB rejection
< 2% at 12 pps
(64% break)
< 65 dB maximum
Mu-law or A-law
42.25 to 52.5 V
Continuous adaption
Adapt and freeze
Alternate impedance
Compromise
impedance, loaded
cable 1650 //
(100 + 5 nF)
Matched impedance
(United Kingdom)
90-1228-06
180 + 910 //
115 nF
20 dBrnC0 max
20 dBrnC0 max
< 2.0 dB
< 0.5 dB
0.25 dB
0.25 to +0.5 dB
20 dB rejection
< 2% at 12 pps
(64% break)
< 65 dB maximum
Mu-law or A-law
42.25 to 52.5 V
Continuous adaption
Adapt and freeze
Alternate impedance
Compromise
impedance, loaded
cable 1650 //
(100 + 5 nF)
Matched impedance
(France)
90-1228-07
10.0 to +6.0
2000
58 dB minimum
53 dB minimum
30 mA, nonsaturating
2 km (1.25 mi)
2000
Supported
> 97 dB
1000 Hz
3000 Hz
Loop feed
Loop length
(maximum)
Maximum external dc
loop circuit resistance
On-hook transmission
P/AR
75 to 110 V rms
20 3 Hz
20 dB minimum
5 maximum
75 to 110 V rms
20 3 Hz
Ringers per line
Ringing voltage
5 maximum
20 dB minimum
28 dB minimum
SRL
28 dB minimum
> 97 dB
Supported
53 dB minimum
58 dB minimum
ERL
Return loss
2 km (1.25 mi)
58 dB minimum
58 dB minimum
58 dB minimum
500 Hz
58 dB minimum
10.0 to +6.0
12.0 to +6.0
200 Hz
12.0 to 0.0
Receive (dB)
41 dBrnC0 max
(North America)
(North America)
41 dBrnC0 max
90-1228-03
90-1228-02
Variant
Transmit (dB)
TLP range
Impulse noise
threshold level
(maximum 10 hits in
30 minutes)
Specification
20 3 Hz
75 to 110 V rms
5 maximum
20 dB minimum
28 dB minimum
> 97 dB
Supported
2000
2 km (1.25 mi)
53 dB minimum
58 dB minimum
58 dB minimum
58 dB minimum
10.0 to +6.0
12.0 to +6.0
41 dBrnC0 max
(Japan)
90-1228-04
20 3 Hz
75 to 110 V rms
5 maximum
20 dB minimum
28 dB minimum
> 97 dB
Supported
2000
2 km (1.25 mi)
53 dB minimum
58 dB minimum
58 dB minimum
58 dB minimum
10.0 to +6.0
12.0 to +6.0
41 dBrnC0 max
(Germany)
90-1228-05
5 maximum
75 to 110 V rms
20 3 Hz
75 to 110 V rms
20 3 Hz
20 dB minimum
28 dB minimum
> 97 dB
Supported
2000
2 km (1.25 mi)
53 dB minimum
58 dB minimum
58 dB minimum
58 dB minimum
10.0 to +6.0
12.0 to 0.0
41 dBrnC0 max
(France)
90-1228-07
5 maximum
20 dB minimum
28 dB minimum
> 97 dB
Supported
2000
2 km (1.25 mi)
53 dB minimum
58 dB minimum
58 dB minimum
58 dB minimum
10.0 to +6.0
12.0 to +6.0
41 dBrnC0 max
(United Kingdom)
90-1228-06
295
296
(North America)
(North America)
29 dB
25 dB
30 to 40 dBr
40 to 45 dBr
20 dB minimum
SRL
Note
34 dB minimum
ERL
Transhybrid loss
35 dB
0 to 30 dBr
20 dB minimum
34 dB minimum
25 dB
29 dB
35 dB
90-1228-03
90-1228-02
Variant
Specification
20 dB minimum
34 dB minimum
25 dB
29 dB
35 dB
(Japan)
90-1228-04
20 dB minimum
34 dB minimum
25 dB
29 dB
35 dB
(Germany)
90-1228-05
20 dB minimum
34 dB minimum
25 dB
29 dB
35 dB
(United Kingdom)
90-1228-06
20 dB minimum
34 dB minimum
25 dB
29 dB
35 dB
(France)
90-1228-07
Power dissipation
Table 14-1 lists the power dissipation of all ringing generators, distribution panels,
cards, and channel units.
Table 14-1: Power and heat dissipation of system components
Item
Watts (W)
BTU/h
15
51
DCC distribution panels
PRI RJ45 Distribution Panel
S/T BRI Distribution Panel
SCC3 (includes memory module)
28
Clock card
27
Common Carrier card
Double Bandwidth module
19
GFC2
GFC3
17
Switching card
10
33
Ringing generators
Each ringing generator (when generating ringing
voltage)
Distribution panels
System cards
297
Item
Watts (W)
BTU/h
Switching Interface card
25
Test card
Test module
11
ATM Services card with IMA module
16
54
Single E1 card with modules
14
Dual 2.048 Mb/s E1 card with VCM3
11
37
Dual 2.048 Mb/s E1 card with interface modules
20
Dual E1-2 card
10
Dual E1-2 card with FAM
27
Dual E1-2 card with interface modules
20
Single T1 card with modules
12
Dual T1 card with interface modules
17
Dual T1 card with interface modules and VCM3
27
Dual T1-2 card
10
Dual T1-2 card with interface modules
20
Dual T1-2 card with FT1 and interface modules
14
DS-3 II card
31
Single E3 card
27
Dual E3 card
12
41
Fibre card
17
MPA card
12
42
X.21 PRI card
18
X.21 ESI PRI card
18
V.35 PRI card
21
CPC
26
DCP card
17
DSP card (6 DSP)
17
DSP card (2 DSP)
DSP2 card (6 DSP)
17
DSP2 card (2 DSP)
DSP3 card (6 DSP)
17
DSP3 card (2 DSP)
DSP4 card
10
33
DSP4 card with Fax/HCV module
13
45
Aggregate cards
Application cards
298
14. Power dissipation
Item
Watts (W)
BTU/h
DSP5 card
11
37
DSP5H card
19
63
IMC
10
34
FRE card
22
74
FRS/SRIM card
13
45
PE card
31
106
4WTO line card
20
E&M card (Mu-law)
17
E&M card (A-law)
23
LGS card (12 cct) 90-0030-01
14
47
LGS card (12 cct) 90-0030-01/D
31
LGS card (6 cct) 90-0029-02/D
31
LGE card (6 cct)
20
4WDX channel unit
10
E&M channel unit
LGS channel unit (International)
LGE channel unit
MRD channel unit (90-1755-01)
MRD channel unit (90-1755-02)
V.24/RS232 DCC
X.21/RS449 DCC (6 cct)
13
45
X.21/RS449 DCC (4 cct)
25
V.35 DCC (6 cct)
11
37
V.35 DCC (3 cct)
22
RS-422 DCC
23
2B1Q line card
23
27LC2 line card
30
27LC3 line card
23
28LC line card
30
11
BRI S/T card
24
2B1Q channel unit
DS0-DP channel unit
OCU-DP channel unit
11
4WTO channel unit
Voice interface cards and channel units
Data interface cards and channel units
299
300
Abbreviations
Abbreviations
23B+D
twenty-three bearer channels plus one data channel
2B+D
two bearer channels plus one data channel
2B1Q
two binary, one quaternary
30B+D
thirty bearer channels plus one data channel
4WDX
4-wire duplex
4WTO
4-wire transmission only
A/A
analog to analog
A/D
analog to digital
A-CELP
algebraic code excited linear prediction
AAL1
ATM adaptation layer type 1
AAL5
ATM adaptation layer type 5
AAR
automatic alternate routing
ac
alternating current
ACT
absolute congestion threshold
ADI
automatic or alternate digit inversion
ADPCM
adaptive differential pulse code modulation
AIS
alarm indication signal
303
Abbreviations
304
AL
analog loopback
AMA
automatic message accounting
AMI
alternate mark inversion
ANM
advanced network management
ANS
automatic network synchronization
ANS v2
automatic network synchronization, version 2
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
APC
access protection capability
AQA
activity qualified access
ASC
abnormal station code
ASC circuit
ATM Services card circuit
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
AT&T
American Telephone & Telegraph
ATM
asynchronous transfer mode
ATM SC
ATM Services card
AWG
American wire gauge
Bc
committed burst size
BCD
binary coded decimal
BCH
Bose, Chaudhuri and Hocquenghem (an error correction

code, named after its three inventors)
Be
excess burst size
BER
bit error ratio
BERT
bit error ratio tester
BITS
building integrated timing system
BNC
A bayonet-locking connector (Bayonet-Neill-Concelman)
BONDING
Bandwidth ON Demand INteroperability Group
Abbreviations
BRI
basic rate interface
control (a control signal for X.21)
CAC
connection admission control
CAS
channel associated signaling
CBW
central battery working
CC
continuity checking
CCM
companding conversion module
CCS
common channel signaling
CELP
code excited linear prediction
CIR
committed information rate
CLP
cell loss priority or cell loss probability
CMI
control module idle
CMIP
common management information protocol
CMIS
common management information services
CO
central office
CODEC
coder/decoder
CPC
Call Processing card
CPE
customer premises equipment
CPSS
control packet switching system
CPSS v2
control packet switching system, version 2
CPU
central processing unit
CRC
cyclic redundancy check
CRC-4
cyclic redundancy check - 4 bit
CSA
carrier serving area
CS-A-CELP
Conjugate-Structure Algebraic Code-Excited Linear

Prediction
305
Abbreviations
306
CS-LD-CELP
Conjugate-Structure Low-Delay Code-Excited Linear

Prediction
CSS
controlled slip seconds
CSM
customer service management
CSSNA
carrier special services network applications
CSU
channel service unit
CSU-2
channel service unit 2
CTS
clear to send
CU
channel unit
D/A
digital to analog
dc
direct current
DCC
Direct Connect card
DCD
data carrier detect
DCE
data communications equipment
DCP
data communications processor
DCS
digital cross-connect switch
DDS
Dataphone Digital Service
DE
discard eligible
DE3
Dual E3 (card)
DEC
Digital Equipment Corporation
DLC
data link connection
DLCI
data link connection identifier
DLCS
data link connection segment
DMM
downloadable memory module
DP
dial pulsing
DPM
DNIC Processor module
Abbreviations
DPM1
DNIC Processor module 1
DPM2
DNIC Processor module 2
DPO
dial pulse originating
DPT
dial pulse termination
DRM
DSP Resource module
DS0
digital signal, level 0
DS0-A
digital signal, level 0A
DS0-B
digital signal, level 0B
DS0-DP
Digital Signal level 0 Data Port (module)
DS1
DS3
DSL
digital subscriber line
DSP
digital signal processor
DSR
data set ready (a V.24 control signal)
DSU
data service unit
DSX-0
digital signal cross-connect, level 0
DSX-1
DSX-3
DTE
data termination equipment
DTMF
dual tone multiple frequency
DTR
data terminal ready
DTU
data termination unit
DX
digital cross-connect
E&M
ear and mouth, or earth/magneto
EC
earth calling
EIA
Electronic Industries Association
307
Abbreviations
308
EMC
electromagnetic conformance
EMI
electromagnetic interference
EN
European norm
eoc
embedded operation channel at the DSL level
ERL
echo return loss
ESD
electrostatic discharge
ESF
extended superframe format
ESI PRI
external sync indication primary rate interface
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute
FAM
Framed AIS module
FAS
frame alignment signal
Fax or fax
facsimile
FC
fiber connector
FCC
Federal Communications Commission
FDDI
fiber distributed data interface
FDL
facility data link
FECN
forward explicit congestion notification
FIC
Fibre Interface card
FIP
FASTbus Interconnect Panel
FPP
Fibre Patch Panel
fps
frames per second
FRAD
frame relay access device or frame relay

assembler/disassembler
FRATM
frame relay-to-ATM interworking unit
FRC
frame stream circuit
FRE
Frame Relay Engine
Abbreviations
FRS
Frame Relay Switch
FSC
frame stream circuit
FT1
fractional T1
FXO
foreign exchange service office
FXS
foreign exchange service subscriber
G3 fax
Group 3 facsimile
GFC2
GFC3
GND
ground
GS
ground start
GUI
graphical user interface
HCM
high-capacity multiplexing
HCV
high-capacity voice
HCVD
high-capacity voice and data
HDB3
high-density bipolar 3
HDLC
high-level data link controller
HDSL
high bit-rate digital subscriber line
HEC
header error check
HSPS
high-speed peripheral shelf
HSPS2
high-speed peripheral shelf 2
indication (an X.21 control signal)
I/F
interface
I/O
input/output
IBM
International Business Machines
IBR
intermediate bit rate
IC
integrated circuit
309
Abbreviations
310
ID
identifier or identification
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IFM
ISDN Framing module
IHTU
Integrated HDSL Terminal Unit (module)
IMA
inverse multiplexing over ATM
IMC
Inverse Multiplexer card
IOTU
integrated optical termination unit
IP
Internet protocol
IPX
Internet packet exchange
ISDN
integrated services digital network
ISSU
intelligent system synchronization unit
ITU-T
International Telecommunications Union

Telecommunications
L2TP
Layer 2 tunneling protocol
LAC
L2TP access concentrator
LAN
local area network
LAPB
link access protocol balanced
LAT
local area transport
LCDC
loop calling disconnect clear
LD-CELP
low-delay code excited linear prediction
LED
light emitting diode
LGE
loop start ground start exchange
LGS
loop start ground start subscriber
LIM
Line Interface module
LIS
LL
local loopback
Abbreviations
LMI
local management interface
LS
loop start
LSB
least significant bit
LT
line termination
LULT
LT-like line unit
LUNT
NT-like line unit
MAN
metropolitan area network
MCT
mild congestion threshold
MDDB
multidrop data bridge
MIR
minimum information rate
MJU
multijunction unit
MNSC
MultiNetwork Service Controller
MOS
mean option score
MPA
Multiport Aggregate (card)
MRD
manual ringdown
MSB
most significant bit
MSR
mean slip rate
MTA
maintenance and test access
MTAU
metallic test access unit
MX
mate interface
NA
North America
NCI
network control interface
NIS
network information service
NMTI
node management terminal interface
NSF
non-standard facilities
NT
network termination
311
Abbreviations
312
NTI
Network Termination Interface (module)
NTT
Nippon Telephone and Telegraph
NTU
network termination unit
NU
national use
NUI
Network User Identifier
NVM
non-volatile memory
OCU
office channel unit
OCU-DP
office channel unit - data port
OEC
Optical Extension card
OOS
out-of-service or out-of-sync
OSI
open systems interconnection
OSS
operations support system
P/AR
peak to average ratio
PAD
packet assembler/disassembler
PBX
private branch exchange
PC
personal computer
PCM
pulse code modulation
PE
Packet Engine (card)
PIR
peak information rate
PLAR
private line automatic ringdown
PLR
pulse link repeater
POTS
plain old telephone service
PRI
primary rate interface
PS
peripheral shelf
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network
PTT
Postal, Telephone and Telegraph
Abbreviations
PTX
packet transfer exchange
PVC
permanent virtual connection
QoS
quality of service
ring
R2D
RAI
remote alarm indication
RAM
random access memory
RAPID
reserved alternate path with immediate diversion
RBS
robbed bit signaling or reverse battery signaling
RDL
remote digital loopback
RE
remote extension
RFC
request for comment
RI
ring indicator or ring identification
RL
remote loopback
ROM
read-only memory
RTS
request to send
RU
rack unit
Rx
receive
SAM
Super-rate Adapter module
SB
signal battery
SCC3
System Control card 3
SCT
severe congestion threshold
SDH
synchronous digital hierarchy
SDLC
synchronous data link control
SE3
Single E3 (card)
SES
severely errored second
313
Abbreviations
314
SG
signal ground
SIR
sustained information rate
SNA
systems network architecture
SNMP
simple network management protocol
SONET
synchronous optical network
SPID
service profile identifier/identification
SRIM
Subrate Interface module
SRL
subrate link
SRM
subrate multiplexer
SRS
subrate switch
SS
switching shelf
STP
spanning tree protocol
SU
switching unit
SVC
switched virtual circuit
tip
TA
terminal adapter
TDM
time division multiplexing
TE
terminal equipment
TEI
terminal-end point identifier
TEP-1(E)
Telecommunications Equipment Practice 1(E)
TIA
Telecommunications Industry Association
TLP
transmission level point
TM
test mode
TO
transmission only
TS0
timeslot zero
TS16
timeslot 16
Abbreviations
TS24
timeslot 24
TSM
Timeslot 24 Signaling module
TTC
Telecommunications Technology Committee
TTC2M
Telecommunications Technology Committee, Two

Megabit (card)
TxD
transmit data
UCS
universal card slot
UDP
Universal Distribution Panel
UDP/IP
user datagram protocol/Internet protocol
UK
United Kingdom
UMC
unassigned multiplexer channel
UPS
uninterruptible power supply
V rms
volts (root mean square)
VBN
virtual backbone network
VC
virtual channel (ATM)
VCB
voice conference bridge
VCC
virtual channel connection
VCI
virtual channel identifier
VCM3
Voice Compression module 3
VF
voice frequency
VoFR
voice over frame relay
VP
virtual path
VPI
virtual path identifier
VSN
virtual switched network
VU
vertical unit
WAN
wide area network
315
Abbreviations
316
Index
Index
1.544 Mb/s Dual T1 card, 188
1.544 Mb/s Dual T1-2 card, 189
1.544 Mb/s T1 card, 188
19-inch shelf
Class A, 103
Class B, 103
2.048 Mb/s Dual E1 card, 185
2.048 Mb/s Dual E1-2 card, 186
2.048 Mb/s E1 card, 184
23-inch shelf, 102, 104
equipment interface, 116
status indicators, 117
27LC2 line card, 11
configurable parameters, 216
control leads, 222
faceplate, 212
modules, 213
overview, 213
rate adaption requirements, 224
27LC3 line card, 27
control leads, 222
faceplate, 212
modules, 214
overview, 214
28LC line card
control leads, 222
enhanced version, 214
faceplate, 212
overview, 214
2B1Q channel unit, 11
control leads, 222
faceplate, 212
interface speeds, 223
overview, 213
2B1Q line card, 11

control leads, 222
faceplate, 212
modules, 213
overview, 213
2WMRD channel unit
faceplate, 203
overview, 207
3DS0
format, 40
loop extension, 40
4WDX channel unit
faceplate, 203
overview, 205
specifications, 281
4WTO channel unit
faceplate, 212
overview, 215
4WTO line card
faceplate, 203
overview, 205
specifications, 281
5712 CORBA Service OSS Interface, 258
5DS0
format, 40
loop extension, 40
64 kb/s Codirectional card, 11
faceplate, 212
overview, 215
319
Index
A
AAR, 22
access protection capability, 153
active cards, 263
activity switch control, 28
ADPCM, 71
G3 fax, 83
aggregate cards
ATM Services card, 183
DS-3 II card, 184
Dual E1 card, 185
Dual E1-2 card, 186
Dual E3 card, 186
Dual Optical Extension card, 187
Dual T1 card, 188
Dual T1-2 card, 189
E1 card, 184
MPA card, 187
Single E3 card, 186
Single Optical Extension card, 187
Single T1 card, 188
V.35 PRI card, 190
X.21 ESI PRI card, 190
X.21 PRI card, 190
aggregate interfaces, 8
alarm logging, 26
alarm monitoring, 25
alarm recording, 25
alarm support, 26
alarms
frame relay, 94
monitoring, 267
A-law, 85
Alcatel 5520 SNMP Element Manager, 257
Alcatel 5520 SNMP EM, 257
Alcatel 5521 PC-Based Element Manager, 20, 255
Alcatel 5521A Auxiliary Element Manager, 255
Alcatel 5620 Network Manager, 3, 8, 20, 252, 262
Alcatel 5620 NM Data Collector, 254
Alcatel 5620 NM Statistics Collector, 253
Alcatel 5620 Simulator, 255
Alcatel 5650 MultiNetwork Service Controller, 254
Alcatel 5660 Network Design System, 254
Alcatel 5730 VPN Service Manager, 251
Alcatel 5740 Service Subscription Manager, 251
Alcatel Connected ISV Partner Program, 259
Alcatel Craft Interface Node Manager, 255, 262
analog voice interfaces, 12
ANS, 23, 161
APC, 153
320
application and packet switching cards

CPC, 229
DCP card, 229
DSP cards, 229
FRE card, 230
FRS/SRIM card, 231
IMC card, 229
PE card, 231
applications, 29
ATM adaptation, 31
frame relay switching, 89
inverse multiplexing, 67
ISDN bandwidth on demand, 34
overview, 29
subrate data, 41
super-rate data, 69
X.25 switching, 94
architecture, 97
HSPS, 129
HSPS2, 129
peripheral shelf, 126
shelf, 116
switching shelf, 123
ASCII terminal, 20, 262
ATM adaptation, 31
AAL1 adaptation, 31
AAL1/5 adaptation, 31
application, 31
ATM Services card, 31
ATM Services card
faceplate, 181
overview, 183
automatic alternate routing, 22
automatic network synchronization, see ANS
B
backplane architecture, 116
common control section, 114
faceplate, 169
overview, 171
bandwidth, 5
double, 118
single, 118
basic rate (2B+D) interfaces, 11
BERT, 13
bidirectional connections, 15
bit aligned framing, 54
Index
BRI S/T card

faceplate, 212
overview, 215
C
cables, 144
CAS, 85
channel units, 13
circuit switching, 6
Class A, 102
Class A shelf
Class B, 102
Class B shelf
Clock card, 23
faceplate, 169
overview, 172
Common Carrier card, 174
common control section, 112, 122
Balanced Transceiver card, 114
Expander card, 113
GFC2, 115
GFC3, 115
SCC3, 113
SCC3(+8), 113
communications protocol
Bisync, 65
Pole Response, 65
SNA/SDLC, 65
companding conversion, 85
configurations
dual-shelf, 107
dual-shelf, control-redundant, 109
single-shelf, 106
single-shelf, control-redundant, 107
connection methods, 256
continuous alarm monitoring, 25
control lead propagation, 54
Control Packet Switching System, see CPSS
control redundancy, 107, 109, 146
convection, 135
cooling equipment, 135
CPC
faceplate, 227
overview, 229
CPSS, 20, 156, 256
shared, 158
CPSS v2
domains, 157
routing algorithm, 157
transport layer, 157
Craft Interface Node Manager, 20
CrossKeys Resolve Si, 251
CS-A-CELP, 71
D
D4 framing, 85
data interface cards
27LC2 line card, 213
27LC3 line card, 214
28LC line card, 214
2B1Q line card, 213
64 kb/s Codirectional card, 215
BRI S/T card, 215
RS-232 DCC, 216
RS-422 DCC, 216
V.35 DCC, 216
X.21 DCC, 216
data interface channel units
2B1Q, 213
4WTO, 215
DS0-DP, 215
OCU-DP, 215
data interfaces
control leads, 222
signaling lead control, 266
data termination units, see DTUs
database management, 264
access, 265
NVM, 264
database operations configuration, 265
DCC distribution panels, 136
DCP card
faceplate, 227
overview, 229
321
Index
DDS
Access, 42, 48
channel unit access, 42, 45
continuity checking, 50
Core, 42, 50
overview, 42
SRS, 42, 51
subrate data applications, 41
diagnostics, 23, 267
digital connection maintenance, 24, 268
monitor maintenance, 269
split-back maintenance, 270
split-through maintenance, 270
terminate-and-leave maintenance, 271
direct connect data interfaces, 11
dissimilar voice and data, 13
distribution panels
DCC, 136
Fibre Patch Panel, 140
overview, 136
PRI BNC, 139
PRI RJ45, 138
S/T BRI, 140
UDP, 11, 136
DMM3, 27
double bandwidth, 118
Downloadable Memory Module 3, see DMM3
DPM3 module, 27
DS0-DP channel unit
faceplate, 212
overview, 215
DS3 capability, 9
DS-3 II card
faceplate, 181
overview, 184
DSP applications, 7
DSP cards
faceplate, 227
modules, 229
overview, 229
DTUs, 11, 12, 141
2700 MainStreet series, 11, 143, 213
2801 MainStreet, 12, 27, 144, 214
2-wire, 214
4-wire, 27, 214
loop length, 11
322
Dual E1 card
faceplate, 181
modules, 185
overview, 185
supported connections, 185
Dual E1-2 card
faceplate, 181
modules, 186
overview, 186
Dual E3 card
faceplate, 181
overview, 186
dual maintenance ports, 23
Dual Optical Extension card
faceplate, 181
modules, 187
overview, 187
variants, 188
Dual T1 card
faceplate, 181
modules, 188
overview, 188
Dual T1-2 card
faceplate, 181
modules, 189
overview, 189
dual-shelf system, 107
dual-shelf, control-redundant system, 109
E
E&M card
faceplate, 203
overview, 205
specifications, 281
E&M channel unit
faceplate, 203
overview, 205
specifications, 281
E3 capability, 9
echo cancellation, 85
EMC, 102
Index
equipment interface
23-inch shelf, 116
Class A shelf, 116
Class B shelf, 116
HSPS, 128
HSPS2, 128
equipment interface area, 116
equipment interface section, switching shelf, 122
equipment shelves, overview, 110, 130
ESF, 85
Expander card
overview, 172
variants, 172
external equipment connectors, 168
external station clock, 159
F
failure switching, 28
fan trays, 135
fax, 83
Fibre card
faceplate, 169
overview, 187
Fibre Patch Panel, 140
forced air, 135
frame relay
alarms, 94
application, 89
congestion management, 93
features, 90
FRE card, 89
FRS/SRIM card, 89
link management protocols, 93
loopbacks, 94
PE card, 89
recovery facilities, 93
SRIM, 92
statistics, 94
subrate, 92
frame relay cards, 7
frame relay switching, 6, 89
frame slips, 160
FRE card, 7
faceplate, 227
overview, 230
FRS/SRIM card, 7
faceplate, 227
module, 92
overview, 231
G
G.704, 11
G3 fax
ADPCM, 83
HCV, 83
GFC2 card, 23
faceplate, 169
overview, 172
GFC3 card, 24
faceplate, 169
overview, 173
test connections, 24, 272
H
HCM, 8
and HCV, 57
and transparent, 57
overview, 55
HCV
G3 fax, 83
types, 71
heat deflectors, 135
high-speed peripheral shelves, see HSPS, HSPS2
HSPS, 16, 102
architecture, 129
dimensions, 104, 277
interface section, 128
overview, 127
power section, 128
323
Index
HSPS2, 16, 102

architecture, 129
dimensions, 277
overview, 127
power section, 128
I
IMC
faceplate, 227
overview, 229
inactive cards, 263
independent clocking, 58
interface section
HSPS, 128
HSPS2, 128
overview, 111
interfaces
aggregate, choice of, 8
direct connect, 11
internal station clock, 159
inverse multiplexing, 67
application, 67
BONDING-based, 68
over ATM, 67
ISDN access, 35
ISDN bandwidth on demand, 34
ISDN channel search, 37
ISDN leased line protection, 150
ISDN protocol tracing, 37
ISDN transport, 37
ISDN leased lines, 38
ISDN loop extension, 38
L
LD-CELP, 71
LGE card
faceplate, 203
overview, 206
specifications, 281
324
LGE channel unit

faceplate, 203
overview, 206
specifications, 281
LGS card
faceplate, 203
overview, 206
specifications, 281
LGS channel unit
faceplate, 203
overview, 206
specifications, 281
LMI, 93
loopbacks, 26, 266
frame relay, 94
M
maintenance and diagnostics, 266
maintenance features, 23
management, 249
layers, 250
network, 252
node management, 257
open interfaces, 258
service, 250
types, 250
migration paths, 17
MJU, 41
MPA card
faceplate, 181
overview, 187
MRD channel unit
faceplate, 203
overview, 207
specifications, 281
Mu-law, 85
multidrop data bridge
and HCM, 59
and X.50, 54
digital, 65
overview, 64
PCM, 65
multirate HDSL interfaces, 12
Index
network control, remote, 19

network management, 252
5620 Network Manager Data Collector, 254
5620 Network Manager Statistics Collector, 253
5620 Network Simulator, 255
5660 Network Design System, 254
Alcatel 5521 PC-Based Element Manager, 255
Alcatel 5521A Auxiliary Element Manager, 255
Alcatel 5620 Network Manager, 20, 252
Alcatel Craft Interface Node Manager, 255
centralized, 21
connection methods, 256
CPSS, 256
CrossKeys NetworkWare KeyInfo, 255
CrossKeys NetworkWare KeyNotes, 256
CrossKeys Resolve Ni, 255
SNMP support, 256
NMTI, 20, 261
node management, 261
5520 SNMP, 257
alarm monitoring, 267
Alcatel 5620 NM, 257
built-in interface, 257
configuration, 264
Craft Interface Node Manager, 20
cross-connections, 264
database management, 264
diagnostics, 267
digital connection maintenance, 268
loopbacks, 266
maintenance and diagnostics, 266
NMTI, 20
overview, 261
products, 257
statistics, 267
system serial ports, 264
test connections, 272
using CrossKeys CrossControl, 258
node management sessions, 261
cards and DTUs supporting integral NMTI, 262
DS-3 II card, 262
Dual E3 card, 262
SCC3, 262
Single E3 card, 262
nonvolatile memory, 264
OCU-DP channel unit

faceplate, 212
overview, 215
open interfaces, 258
5611 CMIP Network OSS Interface, 258
5612 CORBA Network OSS Interface, 258
Optical Extension cards
card variants, 188
modules, 187
overview, 187
out-of-service codes, 149, 156
P
partitioning, 21
pass-through clocking, 58
PE card, 7
faceplate, 227
frame relay support, 94
overview, 231
23-inch dimensions, 277
architecture, 126
Class A dimensions, 277
Class B dimensions, 277
overview, 124
power section, 125
types
control-redundant, 109
dual-shelf, 107
plesiochronous networks, 162
power dissipation, 297
power redundancy, 147
power section
HSPS, 128
HSPS2, 128
325
Index
power supplies
19-inch shelf, 131
23-inch shelf, 132
24 V dc, 27
connectors, 168
HSPS2 Power Supply cards, 132
overview, 130
specifications, 277
PRI BNC Distribution Panel, 139
PRI RJ45 Distribution Panel, 138
PVCs, 7
R
RAPID, 22, 147
rate adaption, subrate data applications, 41
RBS, 85
redundancy
1.544 M/bs T1 card, 154
2.048 M/bs E1 card, 152
AAR, 149
APC, 153
control, 146
DS3 access protection, 153
DS-3 II card interface, 152
E3 access protection, 153
power, 147
protection switching, 147
RAPID, 147
Single and Dual E3 card interface, 152
V.35 PRI card, 154
X.21 PRI card, 154
remote network control, 19
reserved alternate path with immediate diversion,
see RAPID
return loss, 85
ringing generators
external, 134
internal, 133
overview, 133
ringing voltage, 133
specifications, 279
RS-232 DCC
control leads, 222
faceplate, 212
overview, 216
326
RS-422 DCC
control leads, 222
faceplate, 212
overview, 216
Slip Buffer module, 216
S
S/T BRI Distribution Panel, 140
scalability, 17
SCC3, 20
faceplate, 169
overview, 171
SCC3(8+)
overview, 171
service management, 250
5650 Multinetwork Service Controller, 254
5730 VPN Service Manager, 251
5740 Service Subscription Manager, 251
CrossKeys Resolve Si, 251
shelves
19-inch
Class A, 103
Class B, 103
23-inch, 102, 104
and systems, 118
architecture, 116
dimensions, 277
HSPS, 102, 127
HSPS2, 102, 127
peripheral shelves, 124
switching shelves, 121
types
control-redundant, 107
dual-shelf, 107
single-shelf, 106
single-shelf, control-redundant, 107
variants, 102
single bandwidth, 118
Single E1 card
faceplate, 181
modules, 184
overview, 184
supported connections, 184
Index
Single E3 card
faceplate, 181
overview, 186
Single Optical Extension card
configurable features, 191
faceplate, 181
modules, 187
variants, 188
Single T1 card
faceplate, 181
modules, 188
overview, 188
single-shelf system, 106
single-shelf, control-redundant system, 107
site requirements, 279
ac power source, 279
altitude, 279
antistatic strap, 280
dc power source, 279
electrostatic discharge, 280
grounding, 280
location, 279
power, 279
temperature and humidity, 279
working space, 279
SNMP, 256
software control, 19
software upgrading, 20
SRM, subrate data applications, 41
SRS, 60
DDS, 61
HCM, 59, 63
overview, 59, 60
transparent, 64
X.50 Basic and Telco Division 3, 62
standard alarm queues, 25
standards, 4
enhancements, 4
international, 4
startup diagnostics, 23
statistics
frame relay, 94
gathering, 267
HSPS, 128
HSPS2, 128

subrate data, 41
super-rate, 68, 69
super-tandem
HCV, 77
VoFR, 81
switching bus, 14
Switching card
faceplate, 169
overview, 173
Switching Interface card
faceplate, 169
overview, 173
switching section, switching shelf, 122
switching shelf, 14
23-inch dimensions, 277
architecture, 123
Class A dimensions, 277
Class B dimensions, 277
overview, 121
power section, 122
switching section, 122
synchronization, 159
synchronization tables, 22
system cards
Balanced Transceiver card, 171
Clock card, 172
Common Carrier card, 174
Expander card, 172
Fibre card, 187
GFC2, 172
GFC3, 173
SCC3, 171
SCC3(8+), 171
Switching card, 173
Switching Interface card, 173
Test card, 173
system configurations
dual-shelf, 107
single-shelf, 106
single-shelf control-redundant, 107
system integrity, 145
system serial ports, 264
system timing, 159
system upgrades, 17
327
Index
T
tail circuit, 85
Test card, 13, 24
faceplate, 169
overview, 173
test connections, 272
test connections, 24, 272
GFC3, 272
Test card, 272
types, 272
Test module, 13
TIA/EIA-422 DCC, 11
TIA/EIA-449/V.36, 11
TIA/EIA-530-A, 11
timing source, 22
transparent rate adaption
overview, 59
trunk conditioning
custom, 156
hold, 156
idle, 155
out-of-service (OOS) codes, 156
seized, 155
TTC2M card
faceplate, 181
U
UDP, 11
UDP/IP, 157
unidirectional connections, 15
upgrades, system, 17
V
V.24/RS-232 DCC, rate adaption requirements, 224
V.24/TIA/EIA-232, 11
V.32 modem relay, 71
V.35, 11
V.35 DCC
control leads, 222
faceplate, 212
overview, 216
328
V.35 PRI card

card variants, 190
faceplate, 181
overview, 190
VBN, 21
VCM3, 7
virtual backbone network, see VBN
virtual switched network, see VSN
VoFR, 79
with super-tandem, 81
voice compression, 71
voice interface cards
4WTO line card, 205
E&M card, 205
LGE card, 206
LGS card, 206
voice interface channel units
2WMRD, 207
4WDX, 205
E&M, 205
LGE, 206
LGS, 206
MRD, 207
voice interfaces
off-premises, 12
on-premises, 12
voice over frame relay, see VoFR, 79
voice, G3 fax, 83
VSN, 21
VT100 terminal, 20
X
X.21, 11
X.21 DCC
control leads, 222
faceplate, 212
overview, 216
X.21 ESI PRI card
faceplate, 181
overview, 190
X.21 PRI card
faceplate, 181
overview, 190
Index
X.21/V.11, 11
X.25, 94
architecture, 97
definition, 94
features, 95
frame relay interworking, 98
packet switching, 6
service, 94
standards, 97
X.25 switching, 94
X.50
back-to-back SRMs, 54
Basic, 51
Division 2, 51
Division 3, 51
network access, 11
overview, 51
SRS, 54
Telco, 51
329
Index
330
19942007 Alcatel. All rights reserved.

3CL 00469 0091 TQZZA Ed.04

Alcatel-Lucent 3600 MainStreet UG

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Alcatel-Lucent 3600 MainStreet UG

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Alcatel assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the information presented, which is subject to change without notice.

Cables .......................................................................................................................... 144

4 Network and external equipment connections .............. 165

5 System cards ................................................................... 169

6 Aggregate cards .............................................................. 181

7 Voice interface cards and channel units.......................... 203

8 Data interface cards and channel units........................... 211

9 Application and packet switching cards ......................... 227

10 Management overview.................................................... 249

11 Node management .......................................................... 261

12 System specifications ...................................................... 277

13 Voice interface specifications ......................................... 281

a high-order DCS /M13 multiplexer

built-in intelligence and flexibility

By embracing industry standards, the 3600 MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth

The 3600 MainStreet system was developed in accordance with recognized

Enhancements to standards, where implemented, are optional; their use is at the

The 3600 MainStreet system is designed to expand easily to handle growth in

2.048 Mb/s E1-to-1.544 Mb/s T1 format conversion

voice compression, super-tandem operation, and transport of compressed

Figure 1-1: 3600 MainStreet service capabilities

56/64 kb/s V.35/X.21

56/64 kb/s V.35/X.21

frame relay-to-X.25 network and service internetworking

800 b/s switching

Further bandwidth efficiency is achieved through Alcatel 5620 Network Manager

A fully configured 3600 MainStreet switching shelf provides switching for

Integral DS3 and E3 a

CCS, or 31-channel signaling

Figure 1-2: An integrated environment for common carriers

Voice and data

Direct connect data

For direct connection to computers, peripherals, front-end processors, video

Basic rate (2B+D)

Multirate HDSL interfaces

Central office compliant

The 3600 MainStreet switching matrix is fully interconnected and nonblocking. It

Peripheral shelf: single (8 UCSs) or dual shelf (16 UCSs)

a peripheral shelf pair with 16 UCSs providing up to 32 T1 or E1 interfaces

The switching shelf provides eight nonblocking switching buses, allowing it to

As shown in Figure 1-5, unidirectional connections provide a single path between

Versatile peripheral shelf

The peripheral shelf provides interface and application functions, connects

HSPSs provide high-order interfaces and are available in two variants.

DS0s configured for no signaling (NoSig) can be cross-connected without

In 3600 MainStreet multishelf systems, peripheral shelf UCSs accommodate any of

Assorted shelf options

Development of a common architecture and standard components enables the

Figure 1-6: Typical 3600 MainStreet system configurations

Single or dual shelf

High-capacity frame relay

Figure 1-7: 3600 MainStreet system scalability

Multishelf system with dual

Multishelf system with single

All 3600 MainStreet hardware is software-configurable; there are no mechanical

Node and network

This sophisticated network manager uses a GUI that runs on a UNIX-based

Software upgrading and

The centralized approach to network management reduces internode control

Shared node usage

A suite of system protection capabilities ensures that 3600 MainStreet nodes

Hot standby protection

Alternate path routing